JP2015181483A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (a pachinko machine) or a rotary reel game machine (a slot machine) and characterized in display means.SOLUTION: Display means 208 is means for starting at least the display of a first display (the display of an image of four Sarcandra glabras boxes shown in Fig. 178(d)) in the case where the count value of count means 308 is a first count value ("1") (Fig. 178(d)) and a first condition is established, and for starting at least the display of a second display (the display of the image of four Sarcandra glabras added in Fig. 178(i)) in the case where the count value is a second count value ("5") (Fig. 178(i)) different from the first count value and a second condition is established. The second display is the same as the first display.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning area where the game ball can enter, a starting area, a variable winning opening, etc. Is common. When a game ball enters these, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
.

  In addition, some of these game tables display a count value with a display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
Counting means;
Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display;
Control means;
A game machine equipped with
The control means is means having at least the counting means,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the first display when the first condition is satisfied,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the first count value,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the second count value,
The second count value is a count value different from the first count value,
The second display is the same display as the first display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in a count value display function.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (c) shows an example of an ordinary stop symbol. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation time determination table, (b) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation time determination table. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the control unit 400. It is the figure which expanded the external output terminal board 190 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing time charts of external terminal board signals output from channels 1 to 5 of the external output terminal board 190, respectively. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a time chart of external terminal board signals output from channels 6 to 8 of the external output terminal board 190, respectively. 6 is a diagram showing a time chart of an external terminal plate signal output from channel 9 of external output terminal plate 190. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed the time chart of the external terminal board signal 10 output from the channel 10 of the external output terminal board 190, (b) is the external output from the channel 6 of the external output terminal board 190. It is the figure which showed the time chart of the modification of the terminal board signal. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the 2nd applicable form from the front. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (first symbol aspect) of the special figure, and (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in FIG. (A) shows an example of a stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of a normal diagram, and (b) shows an example of a general symbol decoration symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process in a 2nd applicable form. (A) is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the operation | movement aspect of the common figure electric accessory 252, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for a common figure decision | availability determination, The figure (c) is a common figure. It is a figure which shows the high probability table for the success / failure determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability per unit table for usual figure change period determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability lose table for usual figure change period determination, (c) is a figure change. It is a figure which shows the high probability per table for period determination, (d) is a figure which shows the high probability loss table for usual fluctuation period determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for special figure success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for special figure success / failure determination, (c) is the special figure determination table for big hits FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for special figure fluctuation period determination at the time of a normal figure high probability, (b) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for determination of a special figure fluctuation period at the time of a common figure low probability, (c () Is a diagram showing a loss table for determining a special figure fluctuation period at the time of a normal high probability, and (d) is a diagram showing a loss table for determining a special figure fluctuation period at a time of a normal low probability. It is a flowchart which shows a part of flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100 of the 2nd applicable form, It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 24 in steps. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the game flow shown in FIG. 24. FIG. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in case a first hit is a big hit without a probability change in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the extra chance shown in FIG.27 (c). It is the figure which showed the time chart of the external terminal board signal output from each of the channels 3-5 of the external output terminal board 190 in a 2nd applicable form. It is the figure which showed the time chart of the external terminal board signal output from each of the channel 6 and the channel 8 of the external output terminal board 190 in a 2nd applicable form. It is the figure which showed the time chart of the external terminal board signal 10 output from the channel 10 of the external output terminal board 190 in a 2nd applicable form. It is a figure for demonstrating a demonstration effect display. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a time chart when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened and a game ball enters the special-purpose start opening 230, and (b) is a general-purpose electric drive. It is a figure which shows an example of a time chart when a game ball does not approach into the special figure starting port 230 although the door member 2521 of the accessory 252 is opened. It is a figure which shows an example of a predetermined special effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure fluctuation | variation time determination in each control state. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation | variation time table. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the special figure fluctuation | variation time determination table in each control state. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the special figure fluctuation | variation time determination table in each control state. It is a figure which shows the table set in a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows each table in a 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the modification of the table set A shown to Fig.40 (a). It is a figure which shows the table set which switches a table by regulation remaining frequency. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure fluctuation | variation time determination which can be applied to the pachinko machine which provided reservation of special figure. It is a figure which shows the table for other special figure variable time determination which can be applied to the pachinko machine which provided holding of special figure. (A) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is five, and (b) is the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) of 11 (MAX). It is a figure which shows the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the state which became). It is a figure which shows an example of an effect in steps. 48 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 47 step by step. 49 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 48. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which determines whether it is with probability change separately from the determination of the stop symbol of a special figure. It is a figure which shows the example of a count display. It is a figure which shows the other example of a count display. It is a figure which shows the further another example of a count display. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated so far of the count display. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the specific example of the count display shown in FIG.53 (b), (d) is a figure which shows the specific example of the level display of the two-stage display of this side and the back. is there. It is a figure explaining the period of a count display. It is a figure which shows the relationship different from the relationship shown in FIG. (A) is a figure explaining the initial value setting and resetting in a count circuit, (b) is a figure explaining the example which is performing false count display, (c) is a button operation effect. It is the table which summarized the kind of. It is a figure which shows an example of a button operation effect. It is a figure which shows an example which succeeds by a button operation effect. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 60. It is a figure which shows the example corresponded to an example of the 2nd button operation effect shown in FIG.58 (c), or a 3rd button operation effect. It is a modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows two examples as an additional display example of the remaining period in a button operation effect. It is the figure which showed the example of the numerical display different from the meter display demonstrated so far. It is the figure which showed the example different from the meter display and numerical display which were demonstrated so far. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example in which the failed button operation effect is successful. It is the figure which showed the example of the button operation effect different from the button operation effect demonstrated so far. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing two modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a third modification of the example shown in FIG. 68. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a fourth modification example of the example shown in FIG. 68. It is a figure which shows an example of the other production using the count display 703. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a time rewind effect is performed in the effect described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 73. (A) is a figure which shows the modification of a hold display, (b) is a figure which shows the modification of a decoration symbol. It is a figure which shows various count display 703. FIG. It is a figure which shows various count display 703. FIG. It is a figure which shows various count display 703. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the decorative design display apparatus 208. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the decorative design display apparatus 208. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration around a decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example where the display screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is hidden. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the brightness of 1st area | region S1 and 2nd area | region S2 with the arrangement space | interval of a light source. It is a figure which shows the example in which production produces visual or auditory overlap. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 and the shielding means 2477. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the movable range of the shielding means 2477, and a display position. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the movable range of the shielding means 2477, and a display position. It is a figure which shows two examples of the 1st display and the 2nd display in multiple changes. It is a figure which shows the 1st example in which a display is hidden in time series. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example by which a display is hidden in time series. It is a figure which shows the 3rd example by which a display is hidden in time series. It is a figure which shows the 4th example with which a display is hidden. It is a figure which shows the 5th example by which a display is hidden. It is a figure which shows the 6th example by which a display is hidden. 4 is a diagram showing a variable putty set selection table used when selecting a variable time pattern table (hereinafter, referred to as “variable putty” for short) stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows a part of variable putty set, (b) is a table | surface which shows the relationship between a timer number and the fluctuation time of a special figure. It is a figure which shows the content of some strange putty. It is the flowchart which described each operation | movement of a normal map fluctuation display, an electric Chu, a special figure fluctuation display, and an attacker. It is the flowchart which described each operation | movement of a normal map fluctuation display, an electric Chu, a special figure fluctuation display, and an attacker. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of this embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the display mode of a special figure pseudo hold display, (c) is a figure. It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the lottery of the display mode memorize | stored in ROM406 of 1 sub control part 400. FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode until a reset to the regulation frequency | count of a probability variation counter is performed during a retreat. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 101 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 103 in steps. It is a figure which shows a mode in the state at the time of winning a jackpot with probability variation in the state where the specified number of times is set in the probability variation counter. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition production failure in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the superposition effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a fake addition effect. It is a figure which shows the example in which the big bonus effect was performed as a special effect in steps. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 110. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the example from which a background display differs, (c) is a figure which shows a mode when the symbol fluctuation display of a special figure is performed 98 times after a strange putty set is selected. It is. It is a figure which shows an example of the promotion effect using the special figure pseudo hold display. It is a figure which shows the example in which the 1st special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, the 2nd special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, and the special figure pseudo hold display are displayed even during execution of a freeze exclusive effect. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115. It is a figure which shows the modification of this embodiment. (A) is a time indicating the operation of each of the general-purpose display device 210 and the electric chew, and whether the general-purpose electric accessory is in operation or not, and the on / off state of the solenoid signal that opens the general-purpose electric accessory. It is a chart, (b) is a table | surface which shows the operation | movement aspect of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (electricity | church), (c) is the determination of the success / failure of the general-purpose figure in the general-purpose low probability state (non-electric support state). It is a figure which shows the table used by (2nd success / failure determination), (d) is used by the success / failure determination (2nd success / failure determination) of the usual figure in a usual figure high probability state (electric support state). It is a figure which shows a table. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability per unit table for usual figure change period determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability lose table for usual figure change period determination, (c) is for figure change period decision. It is a figure which shows the table per high probability, (d) is a figure which shows the high probability lose table for a common figure fluctuation period determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for special figure success / failure determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for special figure success / failure determination similarly memorize | stored in ROM306. FIG. 8C is a diagram showing a special jackpot determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for the special figure change time determination at the time of a usual figure high probability, (b) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for the special figure change time at the time of a usual figure low probability, (c) is a figure. It is a figure which shows the loss table for special figure fluctuation time determination at the time of a normal high probability, (d) is a figure which shows the loss table for determination of the special figure fluctuation time at the time of a normal low probability. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a continuation of step S512 shown in FIG. 24. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in case a first hit is a big hit without a probability change in steps. It is a figure which shows various effects in the 1st freeze. It is a figure which shows the various effects in a 2nd freeze. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect by which alerting | reporting is performed according to the frequency | count and timing of profit provision assumed. It is a figure which shows the modification of the round digestion effect in jackpot game in steps. It is a front view of the enclosure type pachinko machine which can apply the technique explained in this specification. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. The prefetch result information etc. are illustrated in the state where the prefetch result memory | storage part was memorize | stored. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process. (A) It is an example of the table used for the decision | availability determination of special figure 1 when a special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (B) It is an example of the table used for the success / failure determination of the special figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. (C) It is an example of the table used for the success / failure determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in a special figure low probability state. (D) It is an example of the table used for the decision | availability determination of special figure 2 when a special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (A) Special figure 1 It is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. (B) Special figure 2 It is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. It is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation | variation time of special figure 1. FIG. It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation time of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an operation means image display process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a notice lottery process. It is an example of a notice lottery table. (A)-(d) It is an example of a notice table. (A)-(b) It is an example of a notice table. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 8 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 10 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of the applicable example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of the applicable example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 18 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable example 19 in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time alert image, and the remaining time alert image. It is a figure for demonstrating a false count value. It is a figure which shows the example of a control structure. (A) is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of the jackpot game, and (b) is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by an ellipse indicated by a one-dot chain line in (a). It is a figure which shows a mode that a true effect is performed during the 8-round jackpot game. It is a figure which shows a mode that a true effect is performed during a 4-round jackpot game. It is a figure which shows a mode that a fake production is performed during the 8-round big hit game. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in case only the big hit game of 4 rounds is played although it is a big hit of 8 rounds. It is a figure which shows a mode that a prize ball number display effect is performed in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a step production. It is a figure which shows an example of a false step production in steps.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the description here, a light source that uses an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 are incorporated in the effect button 136. An effect button lamp 138 that causes the button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a player's balance return instruction to the card unit And a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying a player's balance and card unit status. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, a cross key 141 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  Further, on the upper side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, that is, in the upper right part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100, an external output terminal board 190 for outputting game information in the pachinko machine 100 to a computer of a game store where the pachinko machine 100 is installed. Is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  Details of the rendering device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this applicable embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The universal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a universal map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this applicable form. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this applicable form. These ordinary figure display device 210, first special figure display device 212, and second special figure display device 214 correspond to an example of symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form.

  In addition, the display area (here, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) and the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the size of seven segments) and the special symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 (symbol display means). The display area of the decorative design display device 208 is larger than the display area of the effect display means (here, the size of the display screen is equivalent). In this applicable form, the general symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 cannot display a moving image, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208. Can display video.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are being held. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, two). The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of a predetermined second variable game (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that is being held. In the possible form, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored.

  In addition, there are a general winning opening 226, a general opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, a central variable winning opening 234, and a right side. A variable winning opening 235 is provided.

  A plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged in the game board 200 in this applicable form, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general winning holes 226). 2), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this applicable form, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. Collectively, it is called “sphere (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this applicable form, One is arranged on the right side. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200 in this applicable form. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present applicable form, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the applicable form is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238 and the like. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative design display device 208, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. It corresponds to an example.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In this applicable form, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be formed from one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, various data representing predetermined information and the like are stored in the ROM 306 for each address, and when referred to as a table in the following description, a condition for determining which address in the ROM 306 is designated is displayed in a table format. May refer to a summary. The same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes three random value generation circuits). 1), the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the door sensor with ball storage tray 1082, and the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a drive circuit for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 24, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general map hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected.

  The main control unit 300 is game control means for performing game control.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to a random value generation circuit. Output to 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. Further, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the universal start port 228, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the general start port 228. Then, the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start port 228 built in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, the general winning opening 226, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, and the like. For example, a sensor that detects a sphere that has won a predetermined winning opening, or a sensor that detects a sphere that passes through the normal start opening 228.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302. From the information output circuit 336, a signal representing information related to control in the main control unit 300 (for example, control state information) is output to the external output terminal board 190. Note that a signal representing the payout information of the game ball is also output from the payout device 152 to the external output terminal board 190. A signal representing game information in the pachinko machine 100 is output from the external output terminal board 190 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown). The information output from the external output terminal board 190 will be described later in detail.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this applicable embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and an effect button (chance button) shown in FIG. There is also a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of 136 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402.

  Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The sub-control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 receives a command signal from the main control unit 300 that is a game control unit, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device The effect means such as 208 is controlled.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 mainly based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and receives a prize based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the rental ball has been completed, communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Based on the control signal instructing the launch intensity according to the amount, the launcher 146 and the launcher motor 632 driving the launcher 148 shown in FIG. The device 634 is controlled.

  The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In this applicable mode, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of a special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “figure display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows ten types of special drawings from “special drawing A” to “special drawing J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In this applicable form, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure C” is a 2R special jackpot symbol, which is called sudden change. When these symbols (special drawings A and C) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol, which is called a sudden reduction. When the special figure B or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and “Special figure F” is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal. When the special figure E is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. However, the control state of the normal figure high probability / low probability includes the control state when the winning is won (whether it was a special figure high probability state and whether it was a special figure high probability state), and the special figure symbol ( It depends on the stop symbol). For example, when the control state before the big hit game is a low probability state of ordinary figure (regardless of the state of the special figure), “special figure A” to “special figure D” that shift to the common figure high probability state are When it is stopped, after the big hit game is over, it shifts to the usual high probability state. The same applies when the control state before the big hit game is a normal high probability state. On the other hand, if the control state before starting the big hit game is the normal figure high probability state, even if the "special figure E" or "special figure F" that becomes the normal figure low probability state is stopped, Returns to the normal high probability state. In this case, although the big hit is usually drawn in a high probability state, the interest of the game is prevented from deteriorating by avoiding the disadvantage to the player. If the control state before the big hit game is in the special figure low probability state normal figure low probability state, if the “special figure E” or “special figure F” is stopped, the general bonus game will end even after the big hit game ends. If the figure low probability state is maintained, but the “special figure E” and “special figure F” are stopped in the special figure high probability state ordinary figure low probability state, the state shifts to the common figure high probability state. In addition, “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” may be symbols that are not selected in the special drawing 2 that is mainly drawn in the high-probability state.

The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In this applicable form, the number of operations of the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235 shown in FIG. 3 is represented, and the 15th round is one or more of the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235. This means that the opening / closing operation is performed once (one operation), and this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). The right variable prize winning opening 235 performs the specific change a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds) during the big hit game. Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 of this applicable form, as will be described later, the determination of whether or not a big win in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit or the short time big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit or short time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this applicable form, during the big hit game, when the special figure A, the special figure C, and the special figure E are elected, the special figure until the next big hit is reached. The figure high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure B, special figure D, and special figure F are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends may be referred to as a special figure probability change, and a state where the probability of winning a big jackpot after the jackpot game ends (a special figure high probability state) is a player. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, if the special drawings A to D are won, all of them shift to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state) after the big hit game ends. The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls start up before the predetermined number of game balls enter the central variable winning hole 234 and the right variable winning hole 235 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that many game balls enter 232 and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling. In this applicable form, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are all performed. If at least one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and it may be in the electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In this applicable form, when special figure A and special figure C are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is completed. When the special figure B and the special figure D are stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure variable game is executed 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, and the non-electric support is provided for the 101st time. Transition to the state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (special figure E, special figure F) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state. The main control unit 300 also performs the transition of the approach rate control state, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of an approach rate control state transition unit.

  Furthermore, in this applicable form, in addition to the big hit symbol, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols. The special figure G shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first small hit symbol, and the special figure H is the second small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door members 2341 and 2351 of the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235 are operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door members 2341 and 2351 are fully opened for each operation. Only for 1.5 seconds. When the door members 2341 and 2351 are opened at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game.

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door members 2341 and 2351 of the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235 are opened and closed one or more times, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  In this applicable form, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure I shown in FIG. 5 (a) is the first lost symbol, and the special figure J is the second lost symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door members 2341 and 2351 of the central variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235 are not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, it is possible to further prepare a losing symbol (for example, a third losing symbol etc.) other than “Special Figure I” and “Special Figure J”. Is included.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present applicable embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) of the second advantage with a high advantage of the player, and the second advantage Is provided with a loss control state (corresponding to an example of a normal control state) having a first advantage with a low advantage, and the pachinko machine 100 takes one of the control states of the hit control state and the loss control state. . The loss control state corresponds to an example of the first control state, and the big hit control state corresponds to an example of the second control state. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit.

  In addition, the jackpot includes a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous. In terms of the number of rounds, 15R special jackpot (Special Figure A) and 15R jackpot (Special Figure B) correspond to advantageous jackpots, and 2R series jackpots (Special Figure C to Special Figure F) correspond to disadvantageous jackpots. . Also, if you see whether or not there is a probability change, 15R special big hit (Special Figure A), sudden probability change (Special Figure C), and hidden probability change (Special Figure E) correspond to advantageous big hits, 15R big hit (Special Figure B) Sudden time reduction (Special Figure D) and sudden normal (Special Figure F) correspond to disadvantageous jackpots. The result of determining whether or not the jackpot is relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a specific lottery result. After the symbol pattern which is advantageous to the player is stopped and displayed, the game is started from the normal control state. The control state shifts to a big hit control state that is relatively advantageous to the user.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is also provided with symbols other than the “special symbol A” as the jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( The symbol variation display until the special drawings A to J) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of this applicable form, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot, or “Special Figure C”, which is a 2R special jackpot, three “odd” decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination 2 ”(for example,“ decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3 ”,“ decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5 ”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When notifying “Special Figure B” which is a 15R jackpot, “decoration pattern combination 1” (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 2— “Decoration 2”, “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”, etc.) are stopped. In the case of notifying “special drawing E” that is a hidden probability change, “special drawing F” that is suddenly normal, “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” that are small hits, the symbol display area 208a. ˜208c, “decoration pattern combination 3” such as “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and “special drawing C” that is suddenly probable or “special drawing D” that is suddenly shortened is notified. In this case, “decorative symbol combination 4” such as “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, when notifying “special drawing I” and “special drawing J” that are lost, decorative symbols other than “decorative symbol combination 1” to “decorative symbol combination 4” are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination (for example, loose eye) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of this “decorative symbol variable display” until the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”) is stopped are displayed. Sometimes referred to as symbol change stop display.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 5A) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and the stop of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern (see FIG. 10B) is larger in the design (see FIG. 10B).

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (2nd symbol mode). There are two types of stoppage display modes of the usual figure of this applicable form: “common figure A” which is a winning symbol and “common figure B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 has a special jackpot special random number counter, a small bonus special figure 1 random counter, a lost special figure 1 random number counter, and a counter for these counters for the special figure 2. Is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores the number of reservations shown in FIG. 1, the special figure 1 winning random value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 success / failure. The determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, the special figure 1 variation time, and the retention number, random value, and result for special figure 2 are stored. In addition, the RAM 308 has separate storage units that are divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery), separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Yes. As will be described later, the special-purpose 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure, as will be described later, One random number value for determining one variation time is set as one set, and the five random number values are stored for each area in a winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In this applicable form, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this applicable embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, 4 for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter, the big hit special figure random value counter, the small hit special figure random value counter, and the lose special figure random value counter, respectively. Three initial value generation random number counters and three random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value, the special figure 1 variation time determination random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as normal timer random numbers is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (about once every 4 ms in the present applicable embodiment). The controller timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this applicable form) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect processing abnormality). In this applicable mode, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this applicable form, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this applicable form, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). . In this step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this applicable form, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). Information indicating that it is present), the entry to the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special figure starting opening 232 It is determined that there has been a passage of the ball or the normal start port 228. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 234, 235, 230 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this applicable form, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Special-purpose timer random number, special jackpot special figure 1 random value, small bonus special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, special figure 1 variation time determining random value, big hit special figure 2 random value, small hit The random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value, the special figure 2 random value for losing, and the random value for determining the special figure 2 variation time is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In addition, in this applicable form, although the counter for acquiring the random value regarding FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value regarding FIG. 2 are provided separately, the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 234, 235, 230 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, if there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of the special figure 1 variable games on hold is less than a predetermined number (4 in this applicable embodiment), the predetermined special figure starts. Get start information. That is, if the number of holdings is less than a predetermined number, special figure 1 winning random number value, big hit special figure 1 random value, small hit special figure 1 random value, lost special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time Get random number for decision. The special figure 1 winning random value acquired here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small special figure 1 random value, the lost special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 1 variation time determining random value are derived from a software random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing generates and derives start information, and start information deriving means This corresponds to an example of (first start information deriving means, second start information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of FIG. The The reserved storage unit of FIG. 1 stores the start information acquired when a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. The first start-up information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage section and the temporary area shown in FIG. 1 may be used as the first start-up information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of holdings in FIG. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit. As for special figure 2, each random value which is starting information is acquired similarly to special figure 1, and the acquired random number value is similarly stored as a set of starting information in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308. In addition, 1 is added to the value of the number of holdings in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 stores the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 (second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to a possible second starting information storage means. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 may be used as the second start-up information storage unit, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area shown in FIG.

  In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in this applicable embodiment), the general timing at that timing is also determined. The value of the random number counter for generating the figure winning random value is acquired as the universal winning random number value which is the start information, and is stored in the random value storage area different from that for the special figure provided in the RAM 308. In this winning acceptance process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to win the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235. When detecting (entrance), the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, and the central variable winning port. 234, and winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the start information is not acquired and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting region, and the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). In addition, a signal to be held is output and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 in this way corresponds to an example of a variable start region control unit that performs variable start region control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, in the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal operation is not set, and no signal is sent to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232. Is not output. By doing so, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in the closed state may be output without fail.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 0.1 second), a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321, and the valve is closed in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period.

  In the case of the electric support state, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area, set “Normal” inactive. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is a loss, the usual figure loss flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in the step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225), Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first lose flag, second lose flag, probability change flag, and hourly flag. Is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is changed from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process to be described later Based on the determination result (stop pattern mode of the special figure), the 7 segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set to represent. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the second lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is turned off during the big hit game or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (second control state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to the door member 2341 of the center variable prize winning opening 234 or the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this example), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, An effect waiting period is set in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Set the information to show.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 performs variable winning control for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the big hit gaming state. It corresponds to an example of means. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. When the probability variation flag is set to ON, it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit game is high (a special figure high probability state). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is not set to ON (set to OFF), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability variation flag affects the result of the determination of success / failure (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in an electric support state, the electric chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the opening time based on one hit is long, and the number of times of opening based on one hit is large. The variable starting area control is performed so as to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, if the time reduction flag is set to OFF, it is in a non-electric support state, and the variable start area control is performed so as to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time reduction flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, information indicating the setting state of the probability variation flag and / or the time reduction flag corresponds to an example of game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control information determination means.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate. In other words, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present applicable embodiment performs priority variation of the special figure 2, and the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure start port 232 (determination of the special figure 2) is determined as the first special figure. This is prioritized over the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230 (determination determination in FIG. 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present applicable form, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and the second special start A winning storage unit that stores up to the maximum number of reserved random numbers in the second random value storage area when a game ball is won in the area, both the first random value storage area and the second random value storage area When the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area, the time when the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area and the time when the random number value is stored in the second random number value storage area. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage is performed. If a random value is stored in the area, the second The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the second random number value storage area, and the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area. In the case where it is stored, there is provided a go / no-go judging means for making a go / no-go judgment based on the random number value stored in the first random number value storage area. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means. It should be noted that the special figure 2 related lottery process is performed first after the special figure 2 state update process of step S225, and then the special figure 1 state update process of step S227 is performed, and then the special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. It may be.

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is executed (lottery), determination of the special figure to be stopped, and determination of the variation time are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this determination, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. That is, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying the special figure variation or the stop display, and if any one is being displayed, the main controller timer interrupt processing is performed. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt Returning to the process, if the special figure is not in operation, it is determined that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. The determination as to whether or not the game is successful is determined by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable game held is larger than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the start information stored most recently from the holding storage unit of FIG. Random values for the set (Special Figure 2 Winning Random Value, Special Bonus Figure 2 Random Value, Small Bonus Special Figure 2 Random Value, Loss Special Figure 2 Random Value, and Special Figure 2 Variation Time Random Value) The start information (a set of random values) that is acquired and still stored in the hold storage unit is transferred from the area currently stored to the adjacent area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values (special figure 2 winning random number value, big hit special figure 2 random value, small hit special figure 2 random value, lost special figure 2 random value, The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the process of acquiring the special figure 2 variable time determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start information acquisition unit. Note that the above-described predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition corresponds to an example of the correctness determination condition referred to in the present invention.

  FIG. 8A is a diagram illustrating a high probability table for determination of success / failure, and FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating a low probability table for determination of success / failure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag. If the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state is obtained. The numerical value range 0 to 65535) is based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Or, “losing” is derived. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state. Therefore, based on which random number range in the special figure 2 winning random number value shown in FIG. Then, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” is derived as the special figure 2 determination result. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” corresponds to determination of success / failure.

  Next, the symbol of the special figure 2 is determined based on the special figure 2 determination result.

  FIG. 8C shows a special figure determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special figure determination table, a random number range corresponding to a stop symbol form of the special figure (see FIG. 5A) is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, if the special figure 2 determination result is a big hit, the special figure 2 random number value for big hit (taken out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308. The numerical value range to be obtained is 0 to 99), and it is determined which random number range of the jackpot the result of the success / failure determination in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are determined. Also, if the special figure 2 win / fail determination result is a small hit, the special figure 2 random number value for small hits (a possible numerical range is one of the random values for one set previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308) 0 to 99) determines which random number range of the small hits in the special figure determination table shown in (c) of FIG. G "or" Special Figure H "is determined. Furthermore, if the special figure 2 determination result is a loss, the special figure 2 random number value for lost out of one set of random values previously obtained from the storage unit of the RAM 308 (possible numerical range is 0 to 99) determines to which random number range out of the losses the decision result in the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 10C belongs, and the special figure 2 determination result is “special figure I” or Determine “Special Figure J”. The special figure 2 decision result decided here is information representing the symbol form of special figure 2 to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation time (special diagram 2 variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined based on the special diagram 2 determination result. For the determination of the variation time here, a special figure 2 variation time determination random value (a possible numerical range is 0 to 65535) out of one set of random values previously acquired from the reserved storage unit of the RAM 308 is used. It is done.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a special figure 2 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 2 variable time determination table is composed of tables 1 to 5, and table 1 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a jackpot symbol (special figures A and B) of 15R. Yes, Table 2 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special G, H). Tables 3 to 5 are This is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (Special Figure I, J).

  Each table of Tables 1 to 5 defines a correspondence relationship between the variation time and the random number selection range of the special figure 2 variation time determination random value. In addition, in each table shown in FIG. 9A, the name of the variation pattern representing the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to each variation time is also shown for reference. In the applicable form, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one. The main control unit 300 may determine up to the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time of the special figure. However, in the applicable form, the information indicating the variation time determined here is the first information. The first sub control unit 400 determines an effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the variation time. In this applicable form, 10 types of variation patterns are prepared. These fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern with a reach effect and a change pattern without a reach effect. In this applicable form, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are displayed in the same manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is stopped. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed (reach state), that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed stops displaying a specific symbol (the symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the predetermined jackpot symbol This is a state in which the combination (“decorative symbol combination 1” or “decorative symbol combination 2” shown in FIG. 5B) is stopped and displayed.

  Super Reach A (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “reach A”) and Super Reach B (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “reach B”) are produced by adding special variation display to normal reach. It is a kind of reach that improves the effect.

  In addition, long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, and the like are known as super reach, and special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like are also known. In the present specification, the term “reach” means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special reach. This reach is an effect of notifying the player after the success / failure determination and notifying the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the special determination's success / failure determination (lottery) will be the winning determination result. Thus, whether or not to perform reach is determined after determining whether or not to reach. In the case of no reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively short, in the super reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is relatively long, and in the normal reach, the fluctuation time of the special figure is the time between no reach and the super reach.

  When the special figure 2 determination result is special figure A or special figure B (see Table 1), both are 15R jackpot symbols with electric support, and as shown in Table 1, the longest fluctuation time of 65 seconds Is most likely to be selected, and the fluctuating time of 15 seconds is the least likely to be selected. In this case, reach design is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and if the decorative symbol display device 208 is developed to Super Reach B, the possibility of 15R big hit becomes high. There is a possibility of a big hit. That is, Super Reach B and Super Reach A are reach modes in which the reliability of 15R jackpot is higher than other reach modes.

  If the special figure 2 decision result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Fig. C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special G, H) (see Table 2), the fluctuation time is uniformly 12 seconds. To be elected. In this case, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily turns off the decorative symbol combination (decorative symbol combination 3, decorative symbol combination 4) that is stopped and displayed after fluctuation without reach, so-called chance all-off. Done.

  When the determination result of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of reservations in the special figure 2. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines a table to be used with reference to the time reduction flag and the number of suspensions in FIG. 2 stored in the RAM 308.

  If the determination result of the special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J) and the support status is 1 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 1 to 3, the table 3 is used. In this case, it is in the electric support state, and in order to speed up the digestion of the special figure 2, the shortest fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is uniformly selected. Will be done.

  Table 4 is used when the determination result of special figure 2 is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the support status is zero, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is zero. In this case, in order to save the special figure 2 hold, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds, which is somewhat longer, is uniformly selected, and the decorative design display device 208 does not perform the reach effect.

  When the special figure 2 determination result is a losing symbol (special figure I, J) and the non-electric support state, the table 5 is used regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 2. In the non-electric support state, if there is a prize at the second special figure starting port 232, it is a rare case that the normal figure variable game was won in the low probability state of the normal figure, In the state where the special figure 1 variable game is continuously performed, the special figure 2 variable game is interrupted and preferentially digested. In this case, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds (losing without reach) is selected with a high probability, as shown in Table 5, without shortening or extremely shortening the fluctuation time of FIG. However, a variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds may be selected. When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect.

  As described above, the special figure 2 variation time is determined, and the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) is ended.

  Subsequently, special drawing 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is read as “special figure 1”. That is, in the special figure 1 related lottery process, one set of random values (the special figure 1 winning random number value, the big hit special figure 1 random value, the small hit special figure 1 random value from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 of the RAM 308) , Special figure 1 random value for losing, and random number value for determining special figure 1 variation time) are obtained, and based on one set of random values (starting information), whether or not to determine whether or not special figure 1 is true (lottery) Determines the special figure to be executed and stopped, and the change time. The execution determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 8C is used to determine the special figure. For the determination of the variation time, a variation time determination table shown in FIG. 9B is used.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the special figure 1 variation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 1 variation time determination table is composed of tables 6 to 9, and the table 6 is a table used when the special figure 1 decision result is a 15R jackpot symbol (special figures A and B). The contents are the same as the contents of the table 1 shown in FIG. The table 7 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a 2R big hit symbol (Special Drawings C to F) or a small hit symbol (Special Drawings G and H). The content is the same as the content of the table 2 shown.

  Tables 8 and 9 are tables used when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J). Even when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figures I and J), the table used differs depending on whether or not it is in the electric support state and the number of holdings in the special figure 1.

  When the determination result of the special figure 1 is a losing symbol (special figures I and J), the non-electric support state and the holding number of the special figure 1 is 3, the table 8 is used. In this case, in order to expedite digestion of the special figure 1, there is a high probability that a short variation time of 3 seconds is selected, and when the variation time of 3 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a reach effect. Instead, a shortened change will be made.

  When special figure 1 decision result is losing design (special figure I, J) and non-electric support state and special figure 1 hold number is 0-2 or electric support state (the hold number is irrelevant) For this, the table 9 is used. This table 9 has the same contents as the contents of the table 5 shown in FIG.

  In step S233, which is performed following the special drawing 1 related lottery process in step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this applicable form, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 11 to 14 are command types (in this applicable form, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, per round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, Information that can specify a command type such as a special figure hold increase command, a general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (result of determining a special symbol), information indicating a control state, and the like, a winning effect start command and an end effect start are included. In the case of a command, information indicating a control state is included, and in the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating a control state, a per-round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing the control state, and information representing the special figure variation time stored in the RAM 308 as command data. The information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is on hold is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state that are stored in the RAM 308 and are output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the winning effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the winning effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the winning effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), The jackpot game starts.

  In the above-described general command end effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game that is held is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for informing the player that the big hit is to be ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). finish.

  In the general command big prize opening release transmission process described above, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation held. Information indicating the number of games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. This general command special figure pending increase processing is step S215 in the same timer interruption processing as the timer interruption processing of the winning acceptance processing that acquired the starting information when the starting information was acquired in the previous winning acceptance processing (step S217). Is executed. In the general command special figure hold increasing process, the special figure identification information (information shown in FIG. 1 or 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is added to the command data of the special figure hold increasing command, and the control state is set. Set information to be displayed.

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, an external output signal setting process (step S235) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, a signal representing information related to control in the main control unit 300 stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step 205 are read, and the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored. When the lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether or not there is a glass frame opening error or lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special diagram display device 212, the second special diagram display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the 1st sub control part 400 is demonstrated using FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing and the like are performed, and details will be described later.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S311, when the pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this applicable embodiment). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S343 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S317, an effect random number value is updated, and the like. Ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

  Next, the external output terminal board 190 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of the external output terminal board 190 shown in FIG.

  The external output terminal plate 190 is provided with channels (CN) 1 to 11. A connector from the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG. 4 is inserted into the connector 191 of the channel 11. In the external output signal setting process (step S235) shown in FIG. 7 described above, a signal representing information related to control is transferred from the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 to the channel 11 of the external output terminal board 190 via the information output circuit 336. Entered. The external output terminal board 190 also receives a signal representing the payout information of the game ball from the payout device 152. Channels 1 to 10 are connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer or the like. The external output terminal board 190 is a predetermined signal representing game information in the pachinko machine 100 based on a signal input to the channel 11 or a signal representing payout information of a game ball input from the payout device 152. A terminal board signal is output to the outside from each of the channels 1 to 10. The external output terminal board 190 corresponds to an example of game information output means.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signals output from the channels 1 to 5 of the external output terminal board 190, respectively.

  12A is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 1 output from the channel 1 of the external output terminal board 190. FIG. In this time chart, time elapses from left to right in the figure. This is the same in the subsequent time charts, but the time scale is not unified among the time charts.

  The external terminal board signal 1 is a signal that is output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 128 ms) every time a predetermined number (for example, 10) is detected by the payout number sensor provided in the payout device 152 during the prize ball paying operation. The payout operation state of the payout device 152 is switched between a prize ball state in which a prize ball is being paid out and a lending state in which a ball can be lent. In the example shown in FIG. 12A, after paying out 13 prize balls, it is switched to paying out a rental ball.

  FIG. 12B is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 2 output from the channel 2 of the external output terminal board 190.

  The external terminal board signal 2 is detected while the front frame door sensor 1061 shown in FIG. 1 detects the open state of the front frame door (glass frame) 106 or the main body opening sensor 1041 shown in FIG. While the open state of 104 is detected, this signal is output to the outside.

  FIG. 12C shows a time chart of the external terminal board signal 3 output from the channel 3 of the external output terminal board 190.

  The external terminal board signal 3 is a signal output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 600 ms) after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 is stopped. That is, it is a signal indicating that the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 has stopped and displayed the symbol form, and corresponds to an example of a third signal. Here, the predetermined time (for example, 600 ms) may be a symbol fixed display period.

  FIG. 12D is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 4 output from the channel 4 of the external output terminal board 190.

  The external terminal board signal 4 is a signal output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) after the first start port sensor detects that a game ball has won the first special figure start port 230. However, the external terminal board signal 4 is output at the same time interval as the predetermined time so that the signals do not continue.

  FIG. 12E shows a time chart of the external terminal board signal 5 output from the channel 5 of the external output terminal board 190.

  The external terminal board signal 5 is a signal output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) after the second start port sensor detects that a game ball has won the second special figure start port 232. However, as with the external terminal board signal 4, the external terminal board signal 5 is also output at the same time interval as the predetermined time so that the signal does not continue.

  The external terminal board signal 4 and the external terminal board signal 5 correspond to an example of a second signal.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal output from each of the channels 6 to 8 of the external output terminal board 190.

  FIG. 13A shows a time chart of the external terminal board signal 6 output from the channel 6 of the external output terminal board 190. FIG.

  The external terminal board signal 6 is a signal output to the outside during the small hit game and the big hit game. That is, it is a signal indicating that it is a small hit gaming state or a big hit gaming state. It should be noted that the external terminal board signal 6 may not be output during the small hit game in the short time state (electric support state).

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 7 output from the channel 7 of the external output terminal board 190.

  The external terminal board signal 7 is a signal output to the outside during time saving (electric support) and big hit games. That is, it is a signal indicating that it is in a short-time state (electric support state) or a big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 8 output from the channel 8 of the external output terminal board 190.

  The external terminal board signal 8 is a signal output to the outside during the big hit game. That is, it is a signal indicating that it is a big hit gaming state.

  Note that the external terminal board signals 6 to 8 are all signals indicating that they are in the big hit gaming state, but the output conditions differ slightly for these three types of signals. There are multiple specifications for the hall computer. Depending on the situation, the hall computer can use one of these three types of signals or combine them as appropriate, that is, provide options. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to this applicable embodiment outputs these three types of signals. External terminal board signals 6 to 8 correspond to an example of a fourth signal. These external terminal board signals 6 to 8 may be signals that are output based on the fact that the control state has shifted to the big hit control state, or are output based on whether the result of the determination is a big hit determination result. It may be done.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal output from the channel 9 of the external output terminal board 190.

  FIG. 14A shows a time chart of the external terminal board signal 9 output from the channel 9 of the external output terminal board 190 when the power is turned on.

  The external terminal board signal 9 is a signal that is output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the activation wait time of the CPU mounted on the peripheral board has elapsed when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 14B is a time chart of the external terminal board signal 9 output from the channel 9 of the external output terminal board 190 when a winning abnormality, a sensor level abnormality, or a magnetic field abnormality is detected.

  As the winning abnormality here, for example, when there is a winning at the central variable winning opening 234 even though the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 is not opened (closed), the right variable winning is possible. Even if the door member 2351 of the mouth 235 is not opened (closed), even if there is a prize at the right variable prize winning port 235, or the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. If there is a prize at the second special figure starting port 232 which is not (closed), or the general prize slot 226 is awarded a predetermined number (for example, two) within a predetermined time (for example, 3 s). The case where there is. The external terminal board signal 9 is also a signal output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) after detecting a predetermined abnormality. However, when a new abnormality is detected while the external terminal board signal 9 is being output, a signal is output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the new abnormality detection time point. That is, an extended output for a predetermined time is performed.

  FIG. 14C shows a time chart of the external terminal board signal 9 output from the channel 9 of the external output terminal board 190 when a magnetic abnormality is detected.

  The external terminal board signal 9 is also a signal output to the outside after the magnetic abnormality is detected until the power is turned off (power is turned off).

  FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 10 output from the channel 10 of the external output terminal board 190.

  The external terminal board signal 10 is a signal output to the outside during the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214. That is, the external terminal board signal 10 is a signal output based on the start of the symbol variation display in the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and is the first special figure display device. This is a signal indicating that the symbol variation display by 212 or the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is being performed. Therefore, the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 corresponds to an example in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the external terminal board signal 10 is displayed in the symbol variation display. This corresponds to an example of a signal indicating that the medium is in the middle. This external terminal board signal 10 is output regardless of whether or not it is in the probability variation state, and whether or not it is in the short time state (electric support state). In addition, during the big hit control state and the small hit control state, since the symbol variation display of the special figure is not performed, it is not output.

  The hall computer of the amusement store can easily grasp the operating status of the game stand (the time that the player is actually playing) by the total output time of the external terminal board signal 10 (total symbol display time). it can. In other words, by counting the external terminal board signals 10, it is possible to grasp whether the pachinko machine 100 is in operation or in a demonstration display effect (not in operation). In other words, the operating time of the gaming machine on which the player has played can be calculated by adding up the time when the symbols are changing, and the gaming store side can easily grasp the operating status of the gaming machine. In addition, by grasping the usage status of the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, or the decorative symbol display device 208 in detail, it is possible to grasp the replacement time of these devices, the lifespan at the time of reuse, etc. It is possible to improve maintainability and recyclability.

  In addition, the hall computer side needs to associate the start opening prize with the special symbol stop, but since the fluctuation time can be calculated from the external terminal board signals 3 to 5, it is combined with the external terminal board signal 10. Double check of variation time can be performed. In other words, in addition to grasping the symbol variation time with the external terminal plate signal 10, the symbol variation time is also grasped according to the correspondence between the external terminal plate signal 4 and the external terminal plate signal 5 and the external terminal plate signal 3. Therefore, the amusement store side can perform a double check, and the amusement store side can reliably grasp the operating status of the amusement stand.

  Further, it is possible to grasp in more detail by adding the total output time (round-robin time) of the external terminal board signals 6, 7, or 8. In other words, in addition to grasping the symbol variation time, the big hit game time can be grasped by the external terminal board signal 6, 7, or 8, so that the game shop side can grasp the operating status of the game table more reliably.

  FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a time chart of a modified example of the external terminal board signal 6 output from the channel 6 of the external output terminal board 190.

  The external terminal board signal 6 shown in FIG. 13 (a) was a signal output during the small hit control state and the big hit control state, but in addition to these, the external terminal board signal 6 of this modified example is It is also output during the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214. Therefore, the external terminal board signal 6 of the modified example is output to the outside during the small hit control state, during the big hit control state, and during the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214. It is a common signal. That is, the external terminal board signal 6 of the modified example is one type of signal obtained by combining the external terminal board signal 6 shown in FIG. 13A and the external terminal board signal 10 shown in FIG. For example, it can be said that the signal includes the external terminal board signal 6 and the external terminal board signal 10 shown in FIG. 15A, and corresponds to an example of the fourth signal.

  Since the hall computer can grasp the total variation display time and the total hit time of the symbol even by summing up the external terminal board signals 6 of this modified example, the hall computer can easily do without requiring complicated processing. It is possible to grasp the operating status of the game machine. In other words, by knowing the predetermined signal output time that is common between the symbol variation display and the big hit game, it is possible to more easily calculate the operating time of the game machine, and the game shop side can more easily understand the situation of the game machine. be able to. In addition, the usage status of the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, or the decorative symbol display device 208 can be grasped in more detail, and the maintainability and recyclability can be improved.

  Subsequently, another pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described. In the following description, matters that overlap with the items described so far will be described again. In addition, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 16 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the second applicable form as seen from the front.

  In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 16, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display device 212, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208. Is arranged. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. The pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form is also configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. In the second applicable form of the pachinko machine 100, as will be described later, the 4th symbol of the usual figure and the 4th symbol of the special figure are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The universal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a universal map, and is also configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form. The special figure display device 212 is a display device for displaying a special figure, and is also configured by a 7-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form. The general symbol display device 210 and the special symbol display device 212 correspond to an example of symbol display means and also correspond to an example of notification means.

  It should be noted that the display area of the ordinary figure display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 (here, equivalent to the size of 7 segments) and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (effect display means) (here, the size of the display screen is the same). The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger. Further, even in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the general pattern display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 cannot display moving images, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 can display moving images. It is.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined second floating games (detailed universal figure floating games to be described later) that are held, and in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the figure variation game.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored.

  In addition, there are a general prize opening 226, a general figure start prize opening 251, a general figure start gate 253, a general figure electric accessory 252, a special figure start opening 230, and a variable prize opening around the effect device 206. 234 is provided.

  Even in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226. (When winning the general winning opening 226), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. Here again, the balls paid out to the player as a consideration for winning a prize are sometimes referred to as “prize balls”, and the balls lent out to the players are sometimes referred to as “rental balls”. This is called a “ball (game ball)”.

  Here, the game performance of the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 16 will be briefly described. This pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that does not enter a game ball into the variable prize opening 234 and earns a ball out, but earns a ball out by entering the game ball into an ordinary electric accessory 252. In a normal state (a special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state, which will be described later), first, when a game ball enters the general figure start winning opening 251, aiming at the general drawing starting winning opening 251 provided at the lower center of the game board. Then, whether or not the normal map is determined (second determination) is determined, and the general map display device 210 starts the variable display. In addition to the variable display of the general-purpose display device 210, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variable display of the normal-pattern decorative symbol. That is, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the general symbol display device 210 in a form with enhanced performance.

  When winning is determined by the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is won, the general symbol display device 210 displays a stop symbol (see FIG. 5C) of a predetermined symbol mode corresponding to the winning symbol, and a decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to make a right strike, and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds). To do. In other words, the ordinary electric accessory 252 includes a movable member (here, a door member 2521) that can be freely opened and closed, and when the door member 2521 is opened, it is possible to win a prize at the special drawing start port 230. The door member 2521 is a member that changes the difficulty level of winning a prize to the special figure starting port 230. When the door member 2521 is closed, it is impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230, and the closed state where the door member 2521 is closed is an open / close state in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, the state in which the door member 2521 is open is an open / close state in which winning is easy. Accordingly, the special figure starting port 230 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). This is a variable start area in which the ease of entering a game ball changes from one size to the other size. The size of the large size is larger than the sizes of the entrances to the ordinary drawing start winning opening 251 and the ordinary drawing starting gate 253. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the sizes of the entrances of the ordinary drawing start winning port 251 and the universal drawing start gate 253 or smaller than the sizes of the entrances of those (251, 253). It should be noted that the closed state of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . The closed state of the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 corresponds to an example of the first state, and the open state corresponds to an example of the second state. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, seven) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. 16 is a variable starting means and can be said to be an attacker-type electric tulip (electric chew).

  When a game ball enters the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in a state where the door member 2521 is opened, the ball always enters the special figure starting port 230. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 230 by opening the door member 2521 once, whether or not the special figure is determined (lottery) is performed only for the first ball that has entered. That is, in this pachinko machine 100, there is no special figure holding storage. Therefore, the game board 200 is not provided with a special figure holding lamp. In addition, a winning lamp 254 is provided in the vicinity (in this example, on the right side) of the ordinary electric accessory 252. The winning lamp 254 emits light (flashes) when there is a winning at the special drawing start port 230. Further, light is emitted (flashing) when the door member 2521 is closed. The winning lamp 254 corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  The door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds), and a predetermined number of balls (here, ten balls) enter the general-purpose electric accessory 252 during the predetermined time. In this case, the door member 2521 is closed without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time when the predetermined number of balls have entered. When the game ball enters the general-purpose electric accessory 252, whether or not the special figure is appropriate (lottery) is determined, and the special figure display device 212 starts the variable display. In addition to the variation display of the special figure display device 212, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the one-time opening of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is achieved by acquiring the right to determine whether or not the special drawing is won once and winning one or more balls. The purpose is to increase.

  When the big win is won in the special symbol determination, the special symbol display device 212 displays a stop symbol of a predetermined symbol form corresponding to the big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also produces an effect corresponding to the big hit. The variable start port 234 is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times or twice) for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second). Only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. That is, the variable winning opening 234 includes a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening state) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. The variable winning means is capable of changing the open / closed state from one to the other. It should be noted that the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, since the open state at the variable prize opening 234 is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds), almost no payout by entering the variable prize opening 234 is made. I can't expect. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), if a big win is won in the special figure success / failure determination, it always shifts to the electric support state (also called short-time state, general figure high probability state). In the electric support state, first, the normal start gate 253 is aimed. A general electric accessory 252 is provided directly below the normal start gate 253. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed the usual start gate 253 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start gate 253, a determination of whether or not the normal map has been made is performed, and the normal map variable game by the general map display device 210 is started.

  If the pachinko machine 100 is in the electric support state, it is easy to hit in the normal determination. If it is determined whether or not the normal figure is correct, the door member 2521 of the general purpose electric accessory 252 is opened again, and when the game ball enters the general purpose electric accessory 252, whether or not the special figure is appropriate is determined. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (special figure low probability state), the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure determination is changed. Even in the state, it is configured to win a big hit with a high probability. If the big win is not won in the special figure determination (if it is a loss), the variable winning opening 234 is not opened. However, since it is in the electric support state, if the game ball passes the normal start gate 253, the door member 2521 of the normal electric accessory 252 opens with a considerable probability. In this way, it is easy to win a special jackpot several times during the electric support state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the period between the electric support states corresponds to a special game state, and a bonus game is produced.

  In general, when winning a ball is not reduced, repeatedly winning a special bonus jackpot is called a ream. Therefore, even if it is in the non-electric support state, while it is in a probable variation state, repeatedly winning a special figure jackpot may be referred to as a recreational resort. However, in the gaming board 200 shown in FIG. 16, there is only one special figure starting port, and the special figure starting port 230 is not won unless the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened. Therefore, here, it is referred to as consecutive resort that, during the electric support state, the jackpot with the electric support is repeatedly elected and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is repeatedly opened. For example, during the electric support state, a consecutive house is also established when a special jackpot with electric support of the special figure is won by one or more times. Special bonus jackpots are available with probability variation jackpots and non-probability variation jackpots. It is easy to win a jackpot with probability variation with a jackpot with probability variation and a jackpot with probability variation, but the number of times that a jackpot with probability variation can be acquired between the transition to the non-power support status after transition to the power support status. There are restrictions. Hereinafter, this probability variation limit is referred to as a limiter, and the above number is referred to as a prescribed number. Here, the specified number of times is 11. When the specified number of times is reached, the electric support state is changed to the non-electric support state and the non-probable change state is changed. That is, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state which is a normal state is obtained.

  On the other hand, if the special figure wins a non-probable big hit before the specified number of times is reached, the limiter is reset and the number of wins with a probable big hit becomes zero.

  In the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, a plurality of types of times are prepared as the time until the result of determining whether or not the normal map is determined, that is, the variation time of the general map display device 210. A plurality of types of times are also prepared for the time until derivation, that is, the variation time of the special figure display device 212. In the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual figure is short, and when the game ball passes the usual figure start gate 253, the result of the determination of success / failure is notified immediately. When the special figure is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure is not more than one opening period (here, 5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 in the general-purpose electric accessory 252; It may become longer with a predetermined probability.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a game nail 238 are arranged in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, and the inner rail 204 At the bottom, an out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Popular start winning opening 251, general drawing starting gate 253, special drawing starting opening 230) or winning through any winning opening or starting opening, or just passing through the general drawing starting gate 253 Reach the out port 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by the game nail 238 and the like, and the passed ball enters the normal start winning opening 251 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate this.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 16 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the effect display means. .

  In addition, about the circuit structure of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 in a 2nd applicable form, since it is fundamentally the same as the circuit structure of the control part of the pachinko machine of a 1st applicable form, description is abbreviate | omitted.

<Type of design>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17A, the types of special figures that are stopped and displayed by the special figure display device 212 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 17 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the special figure. The special figure variation game is started on the condition that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened and the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure starting port 230. When the special figure variable game is started, the special figure display device 212 displays “variable display of special figure” (special figure variable game) which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. Then, when the variation time (first variation time) determined before the start of the variation of the special figure elapses, the special diagram display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “figure display of special figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of the special figure may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 17 (a) shows 22 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure W” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 17A, a white portion in the drawing indicates a segment location where the light is turned off, and a black portion indicates a location where the segment is turned on.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, 20 types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure T") are prepared as the stop patterns of the special figure. Any jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol of a predetermined round (for example, 15 rounds or two rounds).

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 16 is represented, and 15 rounds means one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (1 Operation) means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. A big hit game is in progress for a predetermined round.

  FIG. 17B is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in FIG.

  When the special figure is a big hit in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability), that is, in the state where the special figure is big hit in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general figure electric accessory 252 repeatedly opens and closes. The probability of going is very low, and in FIG. 17B, it is marked as when the general electric component is released (initial). This means that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 for which the determination of whether or not the special drawing is to be performed is performed once. At the time of the normal drawing electric component release (initial stage), the special figure A to the special figure P become a big hit with certainty. If it is with certainty change, it will shift to a state where the probability of winning a big hit is high in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Even in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the game shifts to a special figure low probability state during the big hit game, and when the big hit with probability change is won, the special figure high probability state is transferred after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, special figure Q to special figure T are big hits without certainty.

  Also, at the time of releasing the ordinary electric charge (initial stage), if the special figure is a big hit, the time is given. That is, special figure A to special figure P will be a big hit with a time-saving until the next big hit, and special figure Q to special figure T will be given a short time while the symbol variation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times. After any big hit game from special figure A to special figure T, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). The electric support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time reduction state. The electric support state (short-time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the probability of winning the usual figure variation game is 1/60 in the low figure probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 1 / 1.0003 in the high figure probability state (electric support state). To do. In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.5 seconds in the electric support state. The probability of entering the special figure starting port 230 increases due to the change of the universal figure and the change of the universal figure. In the second applicable form of the pachinko machine 100, the normal figure change and the normal figure change are performed in the electric support state (short-time state), but the electric chew release period is extended and the electric chew release frequency is increased. Also good. From the above, in the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure starting port 230 than in the electric support state. That is, in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is likely to be closed, and the rate of entry of game balls into the special-purpose starting port 230 is low. On the other hand, in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easy to open, and the rate of entry of game balls into the special-purpose starting port 230 is increased. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of a non-specific state (which also corresponds to a normal game state), and the electric support state corresponds to an example of a specific state (also corresponds to a special game state). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a game state transition unit that shifts the game state between the normal game state and the special game state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, there is a limit to the number of times that a jackpot with probability variation can be obtained between the transition to the non-electric support state and the transition to the non-electric support state (limiter). ) Is provided. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation counter that counts the number of times that a big hit with probability variation can be obtained. When the non-electric support state is shifted to the electrical support state, a specified number of times is set in this probability variation counter. Then, every time a jackpot with probability variation is obtained, the probability variation counter is decremented by one. This probability variation counter corresponds to an example of a specified number counter. When the limiter is set and the specified number of times has not been reached (when the limiter has not been reached), that is, until the number of jackpots with probability change after shifting to the electric support state reaches the specified number of times Then, special figure A to special figure P will be a big hit with certainty and with a short time until the next big hit. Further, in the special drawings A to P, the probability variation counter is not reset. On the other hand, when the limiter is not reached, the special figure Q to the special figure T are big hits with no probability change, and the probability variation counter is reset to the specified number of times, and the symbol variation stop display with a special time is 100 times. Granted while done.

  Further, when the probability variation counter reaches the specified number of times (here, the counter value becomes 0), that is, when the limiter is reached, the special figures A to H and the special figures Q and R are big hits without the probability variation, and the time reduction is A special symbol change stop display is given 100 times, and the probability variation counter is reset. On the other hand, when the limiter is reached, the special drawings I to P and the special drawings S and T are big hits with no probability change and no short time, and the limiter setting is completed and the normal game state is entered.

  To summarize the above, special maps A to P are in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state from the first hit (when the electric figure electric component is released (initial)) to when the limiter has not reached (in the Renzhuang). Yes, special figure Q to special figure S are special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. When the limiter is reached, special figure A to special figure H and special figures Q and R are in a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and special figure I to special figure P and special figures S and T are special figures low. It is a low probability state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the benefit given to the player based on the stop pattern aspect of the special figure is in the gaming state (when the electric figure is released (initial), the limiter is not reached) Although it differs depending on the time (during the retreat) and the time when the limiter is reached, the stop symbol form of the special figure is shared in different game states.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure V shown in FIG. 17A is the first loss symbol, and the special figure W is the second loss symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open / close.

  In addition to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol, a small hit symbol in which the control state (game state) does not change before and after the small hit game may be prepared.

  The special figure display device 212 corresponds to an example of a first symbol display means for notifying a special figure determination result (first determination result).

  FIG. 18 (a) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (second symbol mode). There are two types of stoppage display modes of the usual figure of the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form: “normal figure A” which is a winning symbol and “common figure B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the normal map start area (the general map start winning opening 251 and the general map start gate 253), Performs “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure variable game) that repeats lighting of all segments and lighting of one central segment. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 18A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of a second symbol display means for notifying the normal decision determination result (second correctness determination result).

  FIG. 18B shows an example of a general-purpose decorative symbol. There are ten types of decorative patterns of the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the condition that the ball has entered the universal symbol start area (the universal symbol start winning opening 251 and the universal symbol start gate 253). Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner separately from the general symbol display device 210. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit of a normal figure, combinations of decorative symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1 -decoration 1 -decoration 1” or “decoration 2 -decoration 2”). -Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When a combination of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds). On the other hand, in the case of notifying the usual figure, the combination of the decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols in which three of the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, dissemination) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. . Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop display of the decorative symbol stop pattern may be referred to as decorative symbol variation stop display.

  In addition, the stop symbol mode (refer to FIG. 18A) of a normal symbol and the stop symbol mode of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the middle left and right of the decorative symbol display device 208 (same figure) (See (b)) is larger for decorative designs (see (b) in the figure).

<Main control section control processing>
Next, with respect to the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the second applicable form, the main control part main process shown in FIG. 8 executed by the CPU 304 of the main control part 300 in the first applicable form. The description is omitted because it is basically the same.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second applicable form will be partially described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second applicable form.

  In step S1217 shown in FIG. 19, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, there is a prize in the usual figure starting area (the ordinary figure starting winning port 251 or the ordinary figure starting gate 253), and the number of pending figure changing games is less than a predetermined number (here, 4). If this is the case, predetermined start-up information is acquired. In other words, if the number of holds in the usual figure is less than the predetermined number, the usual prize winning random number value and the usual figure changing period determining random number value are acquired. The universal winning random value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of the R register + 1), and a random value for determining a normal variation period is a value obtained by processing a software random number ( Software random number value + R register value + 1). The random number generation circuit 318 includes a random number storage register corresponding to the normal start area, a general variable period determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing. This corresponds to an example of information deriving means (second starting information deriving means). The random number value (starting information) acquired here is stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the usual figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This ordinary figure storage unit stores the starting information acquired when a game ball enters the ordinary figure starting area (the ordinary figure starting prize opening 251 and the ordinary figure starting gate 253) up to a predetermined upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to startable information storage means that can be stored. At this time, the start information may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the usual storage unit. In this case, the temporary area may be used as the start information storage means. Alternatively, the usual reserved storage unit and temporary area may be used as the starting information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the usual number of reservations stored in the RAM 308, and the number of usual reservations increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form does not have a special figure hold memory. A special figure winning flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The special figure winning flag is turned off when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is closed. Therefore, immediately after the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened, the special figure winning flag is off. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains predetermined start information if there is a prize at the special drawing start port 230 and the special figure winning flag is off. That is, as the predetermined starting information, a special figure winning random number value, a special figure determining random value, and a special figure changing time determining random value are acquired. The special figure winning random number value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (hardware random number value + R register value + 1), and the special figure determining random value and the special figure variation time determining random value are: A value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). A combination of a random value storage register corresponding to the special figure start port 230 of the random value generation circuit 318, a special figure variable time determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing, This corresponds to an example of start information deriving means (first start information deriving means). The special figure winning random number value, the special figure determining random number value, and the special figure variation time determining random value acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in the special figure starting information storage area provided in the RAM 308. The

  Furthermore, in this winning acceptance process, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) at the ordinary drawing start winning port 251, the ordinary drawing starting gate 253, the special drawing starting port 230, or the variable winning opening 234. In addition, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 indicates the presence / absence of winning (winning) of the ordinary drawing start winning port 251, the ordinary drawing starting gate 253, the special drawing starting port 230, and the variable winning opening 234. Set the prize acceptance information.

  In addition, when there is a winning at the special figure starting port 230, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG.

  In step S1221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off, and the hit flag is off, the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to display a lost pattern. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 18A) and the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 18B). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later.

  FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a table summarizing the operation modes of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. FIG.

  When the common figure flag is ON, in the common figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the general figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. While the normal operation is set in the area, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the door member opening period management timer is stored in the electric support state (normal high probability state) and the non-electric support state (normal low probability state). Information indicating an open period of 5.8 seconds is set in the area. Therefore, the operation of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in the electric support state and the operation of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in the non-electric support state are the same, and the player sees the operation mode of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. It is not possible to determine whether or not the power support is in effect. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is used for opening / closing driving of the door member 2521 until 5.8 seconds set here or until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (here, 10 balls) is detected in the special figure starting port 230. A signal for holding the door member 2521 in an open state is output to the solenoid (332). In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the variable starting means (ordinary electric accessory 252) is opened only once (second state) during one operation period, so this 5.8 seconds. Corresponds to an example of the second period. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command electric utility release setting process in the command setting transmission process (step S1233). In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal operation in the command setting transmission process (step S1233).

  Further, in the processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door member opening period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the normal operation set in the setting area of the RAM 308 is maintained. In addition, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, information indicating a closing period of 0.5 seconds is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer in the electric support state (ordinary high probability state). In the support state (ordinary low probability state), information indicating a closing period of 60 seconds is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, 0.5 seconds corresponds to an example of the first period in the electric support state (general figure high probability state), and in the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state). 60 seconds corresponds to an example of the first period. Therefore, in the first period, the non-electric support state is longer than the electric support state. As described above, the electric support state here is an example of a specific state, and the non-electric support state is an example of a non-specific state. Compared to the non-specific state (non-electric support state), the specific state (electric support state) is more likely to cause the variable starting means (usually the electric accessory 252) to enter the second state (open state). The rate of entry of game balls into the starting opening 230) is high. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs a signal for holding the door member 2521 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2521 until the closing period set here elapses. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command electric utility article closing setting process in the command setting transmission process (step S1233).

  Then, in the process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing at which the door member closing period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal operation non-operation processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S1233).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the normal operation period is the first operation time (6.3 seconds here) in the electric support state (normal high probability state), and the non-electric support state ( In the usual low probability state), the second operation period (here 65.8 seconds) is longer than the first operation period. The RAM 308 is provided with an operation period timer for measuring the lapse of these operation periods (periods during normal operation), the normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and the operation period timer is stored in the storage area of the operation period timer. Information indicating a predetermined period may be set. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the operation period is started based on the fact that the winning condition corresponding to an example of the first predetermined condition is established. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the variable starting means (ordinary electric accessory 252) is in the second state (open state) only once during one operation period. It may be a mode in which (open state) is made a plurality of times. For example, the open state is maintained for 1 second simultaneously with the start of the operation period, the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the open state is maintained for 1.8 seconds, and the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period ( For example, the open state may be maintained for 2 seconds, and the closed state may be maintained for 0.5 seconds in the electric support state and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state. In this case, 2 seconds for maintaining the final second state (open state) corresponds to an example of the second period. Further, in the non-electric support state, 60 seconds for maintaining the closed state at the end of one operation period is the longest period longer than the period for maintaining the closed state (0.5 seconds in this example). It is.

  In this way, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs opening / closing control of the door member 2521 corresponds to an example of variable start control means that controls the universal electric accessory 252 that is variable start means.

  Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S1223.

  Subsequently, in step S1223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. First, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the usual figure variable game is being performed or whether the opening and closing control of the ordinary figure electric accessory 252 is being performed (the state of the usual figure is in operation). If it is also performed on one side, the general drawing related lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if neither is performed, it is determined whether or not the number of pending custom-variable games is 1 or more. If it is above, the random number value for one set which is the start information stored in the past in the RAM 308 (general winning random number value and random number value for determining the normal variation period) is extracted. The starting information (a set of random values) that is still stored in the holding storage unit is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, when the start information stored in the past is taken out from the general-purpose hold storage unit and the start-up information is stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit, the Nth oldest start information is stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit as N−1. This is the second oldest starting information. Also, 1 is subtracted from the usual pending number stored in the RAM 308. The main control unit 300, which performs processing for extracting one set of random values (a normal winning random number and a normal changing period determining random value) from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308, includes start information acquisition means (second start This corresponds to an example of information acquisition means).

  Next, a normal / unusual determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a normal-use determination table.

  FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a normal probability determination low probability table, and FIG. 20C is a diagram showing a general probability determination high probability table.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), whether or not the normal time is determined is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 20B, and if the time reduction flag is on (electric support). If it is in a state), the normal determination is performed using the high probability table shown in FIG. The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the general figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The usual Atari probability is 1/60 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 20B, and 1 / 1.00003 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 20C, which is a considerably high probability. In the general figure winning, the non-electric support state is the main figure starting prize opening 251, and in the electric support state, the right-handed is urged and the door member 2521 of the general figure electric accessory 252 is easy to open. The figure start gate 253 becomes the main. Therefore, the low probability table shown in FIG. 20 (b) is a table used at the time of winning the normal figure start winning opening 251 and the high probability table shown in FIG. 20 (c) is a table used at the time of winning the normal figure start gate 253. It can be said. Here, deriving “winning” or “losing” corresponds to the normal-win / no-go determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the normal-win / no-win determination processing here is the second win / fail determination means. It corresponds to an example. In addition, the success / failure determination result of “win” corresponds to an example of a specific second determination result.

  When the execution of the normal figure determination process is completed, the normal figure change period in the normal figure change stop display is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a normal change period determination table.

  FIG. 21A is a diagram showing a low probability per unit table for determining a normal variation period, and FIG. 21B is a diagram showing a low probability lose table for determining a normal variation period. FIG. 21C is a diagram showing a high probability per unit table for determining a normal variation period, and FIG. 21D is a diagram showing a high probability loss table for determining a normal variation period.

  Even in the determination of the normal fluctuation period, the time reduction flag is referred to, and whether or not the current control state is the electric support state is determined. If the hourly flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), the normal time fluctuation period is determined using the table at the low probability shown in FIG. 21A and FIG. If is turned on (if it is in the electric support state), the normal fluctuation period is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. 21 (c) and FIG. 21 (d). Further, based on the result of the determination of whether or not the normal figure is correct, if it is a loss, the normal change period is determined using the table at the time of the loss shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and (d). The normal change period is determined using the table at the time of hit shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and (c). Further, the normal fluctuation period is determined on the basis of a random number value for determining a normal fluctuation period in the start information extracted from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). In addition, the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the normal fluctuation period is the timing of acquiring the start information, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the normal fluctuation. In addition, in the non-electric support state, if the result of determining whether or not the normal signal is lost, the normal time fluctuation period is determined based on the number of suspensions at that time. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, one set of random values from the common figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM 308 (normal figure winning random number value and random number value for determining the normal figure variation period) From the relationship of subtracting 1 from the number of holdings at the timing of taking out, the minimum value of the usual number of holding balls here is 0, and the maximum value is 3. As shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the random number value for determining the normal time period falls within the range of 0 to 59000, if the number of hold of the normal time is three, the normal time fluctuation period is 3 seconds. When it is ˜2, it becomes a fluctuation period of 10 seconds. When the random number value for determining the normal change period is equal to or greater than 59001, it becomes a common normal change period regardless of the number of holds in the normal figure. Moreover, in the electric support state, even if the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is lost, the common normal figure change period is set regardless of the number of hold of the normal figure.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21C and FIG. 21D, in the electric support state, the normal fluctuation period is 1.5, regardless of whether the normal signal win / fail determination result is win or miss. A very short variation period of seconds. The usual figure change period in this electric support state is shorter than the opening period of the door member 2521 of the later figure electric accessory 252 described later. Moreover, the usual figure change period in the electric support state is shorter than the usual figure change period in the non-electric support state.

  In addition, each table of FIGS. 21A to 21D shows the effects of the ordinary symbol decoration pattern on the ornamental symbol display device 208 determined according to the length of the ordinary symbol variation period. The information indicating the normal time change time determined here is included in the normal time change start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as will be described later. The sub-control unit 400 specifically determines the effect mode of the general-purpose decorative symbol shown here based on the information indicating the normal time change time. Normal reach and super reach are included in the production form of the usual decorative pattern. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 16) are displayed in a stopped manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is displayed. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed, that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (a symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the combination of predetermined jackpot symbols (FIG. This is a state where the decorative combination shown in (b) is stopped and displayed. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.). In addition, there is also an aspect called special variation in the effect form of the decorative design. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. When simply referred to as reach, it means a variation pattern of decorative symbols including normal reach, super reach and special variation. This reach is the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the normal / failure determination in the processing related to the normal map becomes a specific second determination / failure determination result (a predetermined result with a high player advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not to reach is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  When the determination of the normal map change period is completed, the general map related lottery process (step S1223) ends.

  The pachinko machine 100 in the second applicable form has one type of special figure. In the main controller timer interrupt process in the second applicable form, the special figure state update process (step S1225) is performed, and then the special figure state update process (step S1229) is executed.

  In the special drawing related lottery process (step S1229), the lottery (first win / fail determination) is executed, the special figure to be stopped is determined, and the fluctuation period (first fluctuation period) in the special symbol fluctuation stop display is determined. . The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes this special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a first win / fail determination unit.

  In the special drawing-related lottery process (step S1229), if a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied (for example, if the special figure variation display is not being displayed, the stop display is not being performed, and the special figure is not being operated), the special map in the RAM 308 is displayed. Start information stored in the start information storage area (a special figure winning random value, a special figure determining random value, and a special figure changing time determining random value) is acquired, and a special figure winning / failing determination (first winning / failing determination) process is acquired. I do. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure determination table. It should be noted that the symbol variation display execution condition that is a condition for starting the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the same as the above-described success / failure determination condition.

  FIG. 22A is a diagram showing a special figure success / failure determination low probability table, and FIG. 22B is a diagram showing a special figure success / failure determination high probability table.

  In the special figure success / failure determination process, the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the special figure probability change state. If the probability variation flag is turned off (if the special figure low probability state), the special figure is judged using the low probability table shown in FIG. 22A, and the probability variation flag is turned on (the special figure high probability). State), whether or not the special figure is determined is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. The special figure success / failure determination is performed based on the special figure winning random number value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, when the specified number of times is reached (at the time of the limiter), the pachinko machine 100 shifts to an uncertain change state (special figure low probability state). In this case, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the special symbol winning / non-judgment determination is won with a 12.5% probability of winning without a short time, and with the probability of 12.5%, the next special symbol stop display To win a jackpot with a short time until the special symbol change stop display is made 100 times. Note that, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit result with 25% establishment as shown in the special figure success / failure determination table of FIG. In the probability variation state, as shown in the special figure success / failure determination table in FIG. This special jackpot determination result of “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific first determination result.

  When the execution of the special figure success / failure determination process is completed, a special figure determination process for determining a stop symbol form of the special figure is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table.

  FIG. 22C is a diagram showing a big hit special figure determination table. In the jackpot special figure determination table shown in FIG. 22C, the number of times until the limiter is reached is also shown.

  In this special figure determination process, the special figure determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308 is performed. Further, the special figure stop symbol form is determined based on the gaming state when the start information used when obtaining the special figure determination result is obtained. That is, if the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit at the time of the release of the electric figure of the special figure (at the time of the initial common figure), the special figure A to the special figure with a probability of 96% based on the random number for special figure determination A special figure of P (with big change and a big hit symbol with a short time until the next big hit) is decided, and a special figure Q to a special figure T (no big change and with a short time of 100 times) with a probability of 4% ). In addition, when the number of times to reach the limiter is determined as any one of the special figures A to P, the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and the maximum number of times of jackpot with probability variation is obtained. (11 times) -1 times = 10 times. On the other hand, when the special figure is selected from any of the special figures Q to T, the maximum number of wins per jackpot with probability change is 11 times. Even if the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit when the limiter has not been reached (during the consecutive day), the special figure A to the special figure P (with certainty and with a probability of 96%) based on the special figure determination random value. Decided to be one of the special charts in the jackpot symbol with a short time until the next jackpot), with a probability of 4%, any of the special charts Q to T (the jackpot symbol with no time change and 100 times the short-term) The special figure is decided. However, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined as one of the special figures from A to P, it means that the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and it is subtracted once. When any of the special drawings in FIGS. Q to T is determined, the number is reset and the prescribed number of times 11 is set again. When the result of the special figure determination is a big hit when the limiter is reached, the special figure A to the special figure H, the special figure Q, and the special figure R have a probability of 53.3% based on the random number value for special figure determination. (Special jackpot design with no time variation and 100 times of time-saving) Decided to one of the special maps, with a probability of 4% Special maps I-P, S, T A special figure is selected from among the jackpot symbols without). In this case, the number of times until the limiter is reached is reset when it is determined as one of the special figures A to H, special figure Q, and special figure R, and the prescribed number of times is reset to 11 times. Is done. If any of the special maps I to P, S, T is determined, the number of times is zero.

  In other words, the number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be acquired between the transition to the non-electric support state and the non-electric support state is 11, and the non-probable change to the non-probable change state (special figure low probability state). When the big hit is pulled, 11 limiter times are set, and when the probable big hit is drawn, the limiter number is 10 times. In addition, when the non-probable big hit is drawn during the retreat, the number of limiters is reset, the prescribed number of times is set again, and a time reduction of 100 times is given. In other words, since the fluctuation of one special figure is allowed in the short time after the uncertain large hit, hitting at this time adds a ranger to resetting the limiter count. Furthermore, when the limiter arrives, even if a probability variation symbol is displayed, it is treated as a non-probability variation big hit, but if a time reduction is given at this time, a real villa will be added as will be described in detail later.

  When the execution of the special figure determining process is completed, the special figure fluctuation period in the special figure symbol symbol change stop display is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure change period determination table.

  FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a special figure fluctuation period during normal high probability, and FIG. 23 (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a special chart variable period during low probability, FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a typical high-probability special-figure variation period determination lose table, and FIG. 10D is a diagram showing a general-low-probability special map variation period determination lose table.

  In the determination of the special figure fluctuation period, the table shown in FIG. 23 is used based on the result of the determination of whether or not the special figure is appropriate and the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) or the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state). To determine the special figure fluctuation period. Further, the special figure change period is determined based on a special figure change period decision random value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Note that the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the special figure variation period is the timing at which the start information is acquired, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation. As shown in the table of FIG. 23 (a), in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, when the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special figure fluctuation period is considerably high. The fluctuation period is a predetermined short period (here, 1 second). This predetermined short period is shorter than the opening period (5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 and while the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is opened once, In the meantime, the result of the special figure success / failure determination based on winning the special figure starting port 230 is often reported in the electric support state. In the electric support state, a fluctuation period of 120 seconds and a fluctuation period of 360 seconds are also prepared. The probability of a predetermined short period is higher than the probability of a long period such as 120 seconds or 360 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in the table of FIG. 23 (b), when the special figure determination result is a big hit in the non-electric support state, the special figure fluctuation period is a uniform fluctuation period of a predetermined period (here 60 seconds). become.

  Further, as shown in the table of FIG. 23C, when the special figure determination result is lost in the electric support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 10 seconds. As shown in the table, when the special figure determination result is lost in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the fluctuation time of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds in the non-electric support state. In addition, only when the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special symbol variation stop display period for notifying the special figure success / failure determination result is changed, and the bonus game is produced. During the special game state, the special figure determination is performed at different intervals.

  The information representing the variation period of the special figure is included in the special symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 that receives the command receives the decoration. When the fluctuation period is 120 seconds, the symbol display device 208 displays the premium A jackpot effect during the fluctuation period. When the fluctuation period is 360 seconds, the premium B jackpot effect is displayed during the fluctuation period. Is displayed.

  When the determination of the special figure variation period is finished, the special figure related lottery process (step S1229) is finished.

<Sub-control unit side control processing>
Next, the first sub-control unit main process and the like executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 in the second applicable form are executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 in the first applicable form. The processing is basically the same as each process of the first sub-control unit shown in FIG. Further, the processing in the second sub-control unit 500 is basically the same as that in the first applicable form, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the game flow in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form will be described in detail.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a part of the game flow in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, and FIG. 25 is a diagram showing step by step the screen of the decorative symbol display device in the game flow shown in FIG. It is. In FIG. 25, time elapses in alphabetical order from (a) to (f), and the same applies to the subsequent drawings. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25, the fourth symbol 217 of the usual figure and the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. In these fourth symbols 217 and 218, the white circle represents the changing display, the black circle represents the stopped display, and the same applies to the subsequent drawings.

  When the game is started, it is a normal game state (a special low-probability figure low probability state). The player makes a left turn aiming at the normal start winning opening 251. Eventually, the universal figure starting prize opening 251 is won (step S501), and the universal figure display device 210 starts the symbol variation stop display. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a liquid crystal display panel, starts changing the symbol of the normal decorative symbol (step S502). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 is being stopped, but the regular symbol fourth symbol 217 is being displayed in a variable manner. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect using a normal decorative symbol may be performed (step S503). However, a reach effect is not performed, and the general symbol display device 210 causes a lost symbol (see FIG. 18A). ) Is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of three decorative symbols in which the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, disparity), and the process returns to step S501 ( Step S504).

  Even if the reach effect (step S503) as shown in FIG. 25B and FIG. 25D is performed, the symbol (see FIG. 18A) is always stopped and displayed on the universal display device 210. The combination of decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged is not necessarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the process may proceed to step S504. On the other hand, if the result of determining whether or not the common figure is correct, the symbol (see FIG. 18A) is stopped and displayed on the universal figure display device 210, and the decorative symbol display device is displayed as shown in FIG. In 208, a combination of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged is stopped and displayed (step S505), and the winning of the normal-game variable game is notified. As shown in FIG. 25 (d), the universal symbol display device 210 displays a stop, and at the same time, the fourth symbol 217 of the ornamental symbol display device 208 is also displayed as stopped. Along with the winning of the common figure variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to make a right-handed (step S506), and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 arranged in the right area of the game area 124 is displayed. The door member 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds) (step S507).

  Opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 makes it possible to win a special drawing start port 230, but if there is no win, the process returns to step S501 (step S508). A special figure win / no-go determination (special drawing lottery) is performed for one ball that has won a prize (step S509). When the special figure determination is made, as shown in FIGS. 25 (e) and 25 (f), a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S510). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol 217 of the ordinary diagram is being stopped and the fourth symbol 218 of the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is lost, the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the lost symbol (see FIG. 17A), and also displays the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. The image of the scene where the strike could not be taken is displayed (step S511). In this case, the probability that the special figure success / failure determination is lost is 75% because of the non-electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) (see FIG. 22A). On the other hand, if the special symbol win / fail determination result is a big hit, the special symbol display device 212 stops and displays one of the special symbols A to P, which is a big hit symbol (see FIG. 17A). As shown in FIG. 25 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image for notifying that the bonus game is started due to the strike (step S512). The probability that the special figure win / reject determination here is a big hit is 25% (see FIG. 22A). When winning the big win of the special figure, it always shifts from the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state) to the electric support state (general figure high probability state). As shown in FIGS. 25 (g) and 25 (h), the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying, and at the same time, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 of the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays stopped.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the game flow shown in FIG. 24, and FIG. 27 is a diagram showing step by step the screen of the decorative symbol display device when the initial hit is a big hit without any probability change.

  In the special figure variable game here, the probability of winning a jackpot with probability variation is 96%, and the probability of winning a jackpot without probability variation is 4% (see FIG. 22C). When winning the big hit without the probability change, a value of 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300, and as shown in FIG. Then, “remaining 11 times” is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be obtained before the transition to the non-electric support state (step S513). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “in the middle of one consecutive villa” from the fact that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 has been opened once (step S507 shown in FIG. 24). The On the other hand, when winning the jackpot with probability variation, a value of 10 is set in the probability variation counter (step S514).

  Since the control state has shifted to the electric support state, it is easy to win the normal determination, and the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is easy to open. For this reason, it is easy to determine whether or not the special figure is correct. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, if the special figure is determined to be in a non-probable change state, the winning combination is won with a probability of 25%. If you win, you win the jackpot with a very high probability. In the state where the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is more than 2 times, the probability of winning the jackpot with probability change and short time until next jackpot is 96%, The probability of winning a big hit with no time change and 100 time savings is 4% (see FIG. 22C). For example, when the remaining number of times is 11 and the winning combination with probability variation and the next big hit with time reduction is won, the probability variation counter is set to 10 values obtained by subtracting 1 from the 11 values set so far. As shown in FIG. 27B, “decided 10 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “during 2 consecutive villas”.

  On the other hand, if a winning big hit with no probability change and 100 time savings is won, the probability changing counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and a big hit with probability changing is acquired before the transition to the non-electric support state. The remaining number of times that can be increased. Although resetting the probability variation counter is advantageous to the player, it is performed only with a probability of 4% as described above.

  FIG. 27 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 during a big hit game when the remaining number of times is two. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (c), “remaining 2 times” and “during 10 consecutive resorts” are displayed, and “additional bonus when a strike is added” is also displayed. . When the remaining number of times becomes one, a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. The result of the special figure variable game that will be the big hit game here is a big hit with no probability change, but with a probability of 53.3%, it is a big hit with 100 time reductions, with a probability of 46.7% It is a big hit without time. If the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit without a short time, the bonus is ended (step S519), the state shifts to the non-electric support state, and also shifts to the non-probable change state, thereby entering the normal game state. . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27G, an image of a scene where the strike could not be taken is displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit with a time reduction of 100 times, it shifts to the non-probable change state, but the electric support state is extended until the special figure change stop display is performed 100 times. .

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, when the special figure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, as shown in FIG. Even so, the fluctuation period of the special figure is often a short period of 1 second. However, the probability of 500/65536 is 120 seconds and the probability of 35/65536 is 360 seconds. Therefore, even if the bonus is won without any change during the bonus, the special period may have a long period of 120 seconds or 360 seconds. It should be noted that the special figure may be changed for a long period only when a big win without a certain change is won during the bonus. Since the time is attached even in the non-probable change state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easy to open, and it is easy to determine whether or not a special figure is appropriate. If the fluctuation period of the special figure is a short period (here 1 second), the determination result of the special figure is immediately notified, and for one opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252, In many cases, the special figure variation game is performed only once. In other words, the number of times of opening the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is synchronized with the number of limiters of the probability change. However, if the fluctuation period of the special figure is long (120 seconds or 360 seconds in this case), the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened several times while the special figure fluctuation game is performed once. The payout can be earned by paying out based on the winning at the special chart starting port 230 (here, 7 balls / 1 winning).

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is short-term, the process returns to step S513, and “decided 11 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. The On the other hand, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is long, information indicating the fluctuation period of the special figure included in the special symbol fluctuation start command sent from the main control unit 300 (here, long-term information) ), The first sub-control unit 400 can open the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 several times during the period from the transition to the electric support state to the transition to the non-electric support state. The prediction calculation is performed. Here, the prediction calculation is performed based on the fact that the one opening period of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is 5.8 seconds. When the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (120 seconds in this case), the number of times is uniformly larger than the specified number of times. For example, the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is predicted to open 5 times in 120 seconds, and the remaining number of times (specific identification) is 16 times obtained by adding 5 times as the predicted number to 11 times as the specified number. It corresponds to an example of information). Further, when the variation period of the special figure is the second long period (360 seconds in this case) longer than the first long period, display with a predetermined symbol or the like (for example, ????) is performed uniformly. You may do it.

  Here, the predicted number of times is the number of times that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 can be opened before shifting to the non-electric support state. In many cases, the fluctuation period of the figure is a short period, and the special figure fluctuation game is often performed only once for one opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the predicted number of times as the number of remaining times on the decorative symbol display device 208 by regarding the number of times that the big change with probability variation can be obtained before the transition to the non-electric support state. (Step S520). As can be seen from this, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, if the extra chance is not taken into consideration, one special figure variable game and one general-purpose electric accessory 252 are released. Linked.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a modification of the extra chance shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 during a jackpot game in a state where the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is five. . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28A, a display such as “Addition of a big bonus when a big bonus chance cup-in is made” is made.

  FIG. 28C shows a screen that is displayed when “Large Bonus Opportunity” is false, and “Sorry” is displayed. That is, the “big bonus chance” shown in FIG. 6A is a screen that is displayed when a big win without a certainty is won during the bonus, and the remaining number of times must be reset. However, in FIG. 5C, the remaining number does not change and “5 remaining” is still displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 28B shows a screen that is displayed when the “big bonus chance” is true, and displays “congratulations”.

  FIG. 28D is a screen displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long period (for example, 360 seconds), what is the remaining number of times? ? ? It has become times.

  FIG. 28E is a screen displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (for example, 120 seconds), and the remaining number of times is 120 seconds to the prescribed number of 11 times. It is 16 times including 5 times that is the predicted number.

  As described above, during a bonus in the special game state, when a long production period (a special figure fluctuation period) is reached, an unusual production is performed. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the special figure is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is often opened once per special figure variable game. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), it is 12 times for the Premier A effect and 36 times for the Premier B effect. In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) is opened, but the number of game balls is increased by opening the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252. As for the number of winning balls, 3 balls are awarded when winning at the ordinary figure starting winning opening 251 and the ordinary figure starting gate 253, 4 balls when winning at the variable winning opening 234 (attacker), ) May be 7 balls when winning, and 10 balls when winning the general winning opening 226. Furthermore, a variable prize opening 234 (attacker) with a small number of prize balls is arranged downstream of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (special drawing start port) with many prize balls. Although it is conceivable to reverse the positional relationship between the ordinary electric accessory 252 and the variable winning opening 234, in this case, the variable winning opening 234 having a small number of winning balls is won first. In the second applicable form, during the bonus in the special game state, the game ball leaked to the entrance to the ordinary electric game object 252 can enter the variable prize opening 234 (Attacker), and the number of prize balls increases. Contribute to.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, in the electric support state, the interval for deriving the big hit with the special figure probability change (specific first success / failure determination result) (interval based on 1 second, 120 seconds, 360 seconds, respectively) Will be different, and the fun of the game will improve. In addition, the game characteristics of the second applicable form are a so-called limiter machine (there is an upper limit on the number of probability variation consecutive games), and a game ball is increased by a general electric accessory 252 (electric chew). In other words, since the time between jackpots of the special figure is different, the number of times of opening the electric chew during that time is different, so that it is possible to change the amount of game balls to be increased. This game characteristic is advantageous as the player fits. Moreover, by deriving the hit of the normal symbol with high probability and in a short time, the electric chew can be released frequently, and the electric chew contributes to the game characteristics of increasing the game ball. Further, in the electric support state, it is possible to provide a difference in the opening frequency of the electric chew by giving a change (1 second, 120 seconds, 360 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the special figure. In addition, the probability of deriving the special figure jackpot until reaching the limiter is made high, so that the opening frequency of the electric chew and the obtainable game ball based on the opening frequency can be changed by the fluctuation time of the special figure. it can. In addition, by resetting the limiter, it becomes possible to make the result of the special figure more interesting in the game characteristic in which the number of game balls is increased by using the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (electric chew). In addition, the long fluctuation time of the special figure itself is advantageous for the player in the special game state, but by enabling the long fluctuation time to be determined at the time of resetting the limiter, the special figure can be obtained even after the end of the fluctuation. It becomes possible to continue the special gaming state until the derivation for the prescribed number of times. That is, it is possible to simultaneously give two advantageous states for the player, that is, limiter reset and long-term fluctuation. Furthermore, the interest of the game in the special game state may be improved by notifying the current number of consecutive resorts and the remaining number of times until the limiter. In addition, when notification based on the number of times the electric chew is opened, it may be linked to the ball and the interest may be further improved. Furthermore, the long-term fluctuation of the special figure is equivalent to the one-time special figure for the limiter, and is equivalent to the short-term fluctuation. May increase. Since the gameability in the second applicable form is a limiter machine, the provision of a special gaming state more than the limiter number is not guaranteed at any timing, but a game ball obtained by long-term fluctuation is a normal special figure. It is possible to notify the player as if a special gaming state equal to or more than the limiter number is given by using the fact that there is more than one digestion (limiter subtraction). That is, it is possible to link the outgoing ball and the notification. Furthermore, by setting the notification content to the remaining number of times until the limiter, even if the notification exceeds the specified number of times, it is possible to link the balls, so the interest of the game may be improved.

  It should be noted that the special figure variation period may be long only when the bonus is won without change during the bonus. Alternatively, even in the case of losing, a long-term variation period of a special figure may be used. Is possible.

  In addition, in the second applicable form, the game board 200 surface configuration is such that when a right hand is made (during a special game state), a game ball is guided to both the general-purpose electric accessory 252 and the variable winning opening 234. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) may be arranged at a place where it is difficult to win a prize with the firing strength during the special gaming state. In this case, it is possible to make the attacker not open during the long fluctuation period (large bonus) of the special figure.

  Furthermore, in the second applicable form, the big hit probability at the time of low special figure is 1/4, and the number of short hours given after adding (after non-probable big hit) is 100 times. It is possible to increase the number of game balls by releasing the universal electric player 252 during this period by losing 3/4 special figure.

  Further, the determination of the long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may be made to completely correspond to the stop pattern of the special figure at 1: 1.

  In addition, the interval for deriving the big hit with special figure probability change (specific first success / failure determination result) can be varied depending on the period during the big hit game as well as the fluctuation time (effect time) of the special figure. For example, the interval can be made different by changing the time of the start effect or end effect of the big hit game or the effect of the interval between rounds. Also, the interval can be made different by changing the special display stop display period.

  An external output terminal board 190 for outputting game information in the pachinko machine 100 is also provided in the upper right part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form in the computer of the game store where the pachinko machine 100 is installed. . The channels 1 to 10 of the external output terminal board 190 in the second applicable form are also connected to an external hall computer or the like, and external terminal board signals are output from these channels. Hereinafter, description of the same signals (external terminal plate signals 1, 2, 7, 9) as the external terminal plate signals in the first applicable form will be omitted, and different signals will be described.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a time chart of external terminal plate signals output from channels 3 to 5 of the external output terminal plate 190 in the second applicable form.

  FIG. 29A is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 3 output from the channel 3 of the external output terminal board 190 in the second applicable form.

  The external terminal board signal 3 in the second applicable form is a signal that is output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 600 ms) after the symbol variation display on the universal display device 210 is stopped. That is, it is a signal indicating that the symbol display device 210 has stopped displaying the symbol form, and corresponds to an example of a third signal. The predetermined time (for example, 600 ms) here may also be a symbol fixed display period.

  FIG. 29B is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 4 output from the channel 4 of the external output terminal board 190 in the second applicable form.

  The external terminal board signal 4 in the second applicable form is output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) after the universal start prize sensor detects that the game ball has won the universal start prize opening 251. Signal. However, even in the second applicable form, the external terminal board signal 4 is output at the same time interval as the predetermined time so that the signal does not continue.

  FIG. 29C shows a time chart of the external terminal board signal 5 output from the channel 5 of the external output terminal board 190 in the second applicable form.

  The external terminal board signal 5 in the second applicable form is a signal that is output to the outside for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) after the normal start gate sensor detects that a game ball has won the normal start gate 253. is there. However, as with the external terminal board signal 4, the external terminal board signal 5 is also output at the same time interval as the predetermined time so that the signal does not continue.

  The external terminal board signal 4 and the external terminal board signal 5 in the second applicable form also correspond to an example of the second signal.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a time chart of external terminal plate signals output from the channel 6 and the channel 8 of the external output terminal plate 190 in the second applicable form.

  FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 6 output from the channel 6 of the external output terminal board 190 in the second applicable form.

  The external terminal board signal 6 in the second applicable form is output to the outside during the game per game (during the opening / closing operation of the door member 2521 of the general service electric accessory 252) in the short-time state (electric support state). Signal. That is, the external terminal board signal 6 in the second applicable form is a signal indicating that the game is in the short-time state (electric support state) and the normal game state. In the example shown in FIG. 30 (a), a special bonus with a short time is won, and after the big hit game is completed, the non-time-short state is changed to the short-time state, and the game is started after the shift to the short-time state. Then, the external terminal board signal 6 is output (see the leftmost dotted line), and when the game shifts to the non-time-short state before the game is finished per game, the external terminal board signal 6 is output at the time of the transition to the non-time-short state. Is canceled (see the second dotted line from the left). In addition, the external terminal board signal 6 is not output even when the game state is shifted to the normal game state in the non-time saving state, and the external terminal board signal 6 is output at the time of the transition to the shorter time state during the gaming state per universal figure (right From the second dotted line, the output of the external terminal board signal 6 is stopped (see the rightmost dotted line) when the gaming state is completed per normal figure even in the short time state. In the example shown in FIG. 30 (a), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol and the symbol variation display of the third special symbol are based on winning in the second special symbol start port 232.

  In the second applicable form, the hall computer uses the external terminal board signal 6 to make a normal electric motor because it is configured to win the game in a game state per normal figure during a short time when a ball is obtained. The number of times of opening the door member 2521 of 252 can be grasped.

  FIG. 30B is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 8 output from the channel 8 of the external output terminal board 190 in the second applicable form.

  The external terminal board signal 8 is a signal output to the outside during the big hit game of the special figure. That is, it is a signal indicating that it is a special hit game state. In the example shown in FIG. 30B, the timing of the dotted line shown on the left is the timing of the first hit of the special figure, and the timing of the dotted line shown on the right is the timing of the special figure big hit (per reset) at which the limiter count is reset. is there. The hall computer can grasp the number of big hits of the special figure using the external terminal board signal 8.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a time chart of the external terminal board signal 10 output from the channel 10 of the external output terminal board 190 in the second applicable form.

  The external terminal board signal 10 in the second applicable form is a signal that is output to the outside during the special symbol display of the predetermined time or longer, and is output during the special symbol display of the special symbol less than the predetermined time. Not. In other words, this is a signal indicating that the symbol variation display of the special diagram is being performed, which is output on condition that the variation time of the special diagram of 120 seconds or longer is selected. More specifically, it is output on the condition that the long variation time during which the variation of Premier A or the variation of Premier B is selected on the decorative symbol display device 208 is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the timing of the dotted line shown on the right side is the timing at which the special symbol variation display for a predetermined time or longer is started. The fact that the variation time of the special figure longer than the predetermined time is selected corresponds to an example of the predetermined condition being satisfied, and the external terminal board signal 10 in the second applicable form represents that the symbol variation is being displayed. It corresponds to an example of a signal.

  In addition, the external terminal board signal 10 is also output during the jackpot gaming state based on the initial hit of the special figure and during the jackpot gaming state based on the reset. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the dotted line timing shown on the left side is the initial hit timing of the special figure, and the dotted line timing shown in the middle is the reset timing.

  The external terminal board signal 10 in the second applicable form described above is a signal for counting the number of times that the door member 2521 of the universal electric accessory 252 is opened, and the hall computer uses this external terminal board signal. By counting the signals 10, it is possible to grasp whether the pachinko machine 100 is in operation or in a demonstration display effect (not in operation).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second applicable form, an opportunity that becomes a lump of prize balls based on the total number of times of output of the external terminal board signal 10 (for example, the number of first hits of the 11th limit, the number of times per reset, a plurality of times The number of times that a long variation time that can obtain a profit by the usual number of times is selected) can be grasped. These times may be displayed on the information display of the island facility.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the demonstration effect display.

  The liquid crystal display device which is the decorative symbol display device 208 has a light source as a backlight. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), this decorative symbol display device 208 uses a light source with a predetermined luminance in the decorative symbol variation display (corresponding to an example of a predetermined display effect) performed during the normal symbol variation display. The display effect is performed in a state where the display screen is clearly visible to the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 emits a light source with a predetermined luminance even in the display effect during the big hit game of the special figure, and the display screen is clearly visible to the player. Perform display effects.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form, the demonstration is based on the fact that the next symbol variation display does not start even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the termination of the symbol variation display of the ordinary diagram. A display effect is started. This demonstration display effect is prepared as an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the pachinko machine 100 is not operating. The decorative symbol display device 208 performs the demonstration display effect by reducing the light source to the predetermined luminance, that is, the luminance lower than the luminance during operation of the pachinko machine 100. In other words, the brightness of the decorative symbol display device 208 (display effect means) is higher during the variable display than during the non-fluctuating display of symbols except during the big hit game (during the second control state). In addition, the brightness of the decorative symbol display device 208 (display effect means) is greater during non-hit games (during the first control state) than during non-hit games (during the second control state), except during the variable display of symbols. high.

  The start condition of the demonstration display effect may be the only condition that the next symbol variation display does not start even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the normal symbol variation display ends, or the launching device 110 may It may be added on condition that no operation has been performed for a specific time (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, it may be added on condition that the next decorative symbol variation display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display is completed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The demonstration effect display may be started on the main control unit 300 or the sub-control unit side.

  The demonstration display effect described above is also performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 in the pachinko machine 100 in the first applicable form. In the pachinko machine 100 in the first applicable form, a special figure is used instead of the usual symbol variation display. Is used as at least one of the starting criteria.

  Whether the pachinko machine 100 of the first applicable form or the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form is used, the decorative symbol variation display or The light source that is the backlight is likely to be consumed during the big hit game period, that is, the display period with high luminance. The hall computer can determine whether the pachinko machine 100 is in operation or in a demonstration display effect (not in operation) by counting the external terminal board signals 10. The usage status of the backlight can be grasped in detail, and maintainability and recyclability can be improved.

  By the way, from the conventional external output terminal board, a symbol stop signal indicating that the symbol variation display of the special symbol has stopped and a winning signal indicating that the game ball has won the special symbol start opening are output. From these two signals, it is ascertained whether or not the game machine is in operation. However, when the symbol variation time is long, the symbol stop signal is not easily output. Therefore, even if the game machine is actually operating, the hall computer may recognize that it is not operating (for example, a demonstration display effect is being performed). Therefore, when the hall computer tries to grasp whether or not the game table is in operation by using signals other than the winning signal or the symbol stop signal output from the conventional external output terminal board, there are many types. The signal needs to be analyzed, the processing in the hall computer becomes complicated, and the processing load increases.

  On the other hand, both the pachinko machine 100 of the first applicable form and the pachinko machine 100 of the second applicable form are one type of external terminal board signal 10 that is a signal indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed. It is possible to accurately grasp whether or not the game table is in operation.

  In addition, during the jackpot game, since the special symbol variation display is not performed, a signal indicating that the symbol variation display is in progress is not output, but one to several other signals (for example, external terminal board signal 8 etc.) ) Improves the accuracy of determining whether or not the game machine is in operation.

  Furthermore, since the winning signal is output regardless of the number of holdings, the winning signal is output even if the holding is full. For this reason, it is necessary to manage the winning signal and the symbol stop signal in association with each other. However, the variation time of the symbols varies, and from the hall computer, the input timing of the symbol stop signal varies, Tends to be complicated.

  On the other hand, the external terminal board signal 10, which is a signal indicating that the symbol variation is being displayed, is displayed in the symbol variation display in both the pachinko machine 100 in the first applicable configuration and the pachinko device 100 in the second applicable configuration. Since it is input to the hall computer based on the start of the above, the association is easy to be performed.

  If the hall computer can accurately determine whether or not the game machine is in operation, the operation rate of the game machine can be calculated, which contributes to management as a game store. In some cases, maintenance and recyclability of the liquid crystal display device and the like can be improved.

  In the above description, as a signal indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed, a signal continuously output during the symbol variation display has been described as an example. However, a signal output at a predetermined time interval is described. Or a combination of a symbol variation start signal and a symbol variation stop signal.

  Further, here, an example in which the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a rotating game machine (slot machine).

  In the above description, “in a game machine that draws a profit amount to be granted to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, determination of success / failure), the symbol variation display is performed and the symbol variation display ends. Symbol display means (for example, the first special diagram display device 212 and the second special diagram display device 214) for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol mode representing the result of the lottery, and a plurality of types representing the game information on this game table Game information output means (for example, external output terminal board 190) for outputting a predetermined signal (for example, external terminal board signals 1 to 10) to the outside, and the game information output means (for example, external output terminal board) 190) is based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 is started). A signal (for example, external terminal board signal 10) indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed is output to the outside (for example, hall computer (690)) as one type of signal. A game table. Was explained.

  Here, the signal indicating that the symbol variation display is in progress may be a signal output intermittently in addition to the signal continuously output during symbol variation display, or the start of symbol variation. It may be a signal indicating the end (for example, symbol variation start signal and symbol variation stop signal).

  Further, in the description so far, “the game ball has won a predetermined starting area (for example, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232) and the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, A lottery means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for performing a lottery is provided, and the game information output means (for example, the external output terminal board 190) is based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the predetermined starting area. A second signal (for example, external terminal board signals 4 and 5) indicating that a game ball has won the predetermined starting area is output to the outside as one type of the plurality of types of predetermined signals, Based on the fact that the symbol display means has finished displaying the variation of the symbol and stopped and displayed the symbol mode, the symbol display unit stops and displays the symbol mode as one type of the plurality of predetermined signals. Octopus Third signal (e.g., the external terminal board signal 3) representative of the amusement machine, characterized in that and outputs to the outside. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a specific lottery result, the first control state in which the advantage for the player is the first advantage (for example, the loss control state) Control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300 of the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state to the second control state (for example, jackpot control state) that is a second advantage that is different from the first advantage. CPU 304), and the game information output means (for example, the external output terminal board 190) indicates that the control state is the second control state as one kind of signals among the plurality of kinds of predetermined signals. A game table characterized by outputting a fourth signal (for example, external terminal board signals 6 to 8) to the outside. Is also explained.

  The game information output means may output the fourth signal to the outside based on the fact that the control state has shifted to the second control state, and the lottery result is specified. It may be output to the outside based on the lottery result.

  In addition, in the description so far, “the game information output means (for example, the external output terminal board 190) has the fourth signal and the symbol variation display as one kind of signals among the plurality of kinds of predetermined signals. A game table, characterized in that a signal including a signal indicating that it is inside (for example, an external terminal board signal 6 of a modified example) is output to the outside. Is also explained.

  In other words, the game information output means may output the fourth signal to the outside in a form including a signal indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed. In other words, the game information output means may combine the fourth signal and the signal indicating that the symbol variation display is being performed into one and output it as one type of signal.

  In addition, a display effect unit that includes a light source and displays an effect using light emitted from the light source, the display effect unit includes a predetermined display effect corresponding to the symbol variation display, and the symbol variation A demonstration display effect is performed on the condition that the next symbol variation display is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the display is finished, and the predetermined display effect is displayed in the demonstration display. It may be displayed brighter than the effect.

  The demonstration display effect may be an effect that is performed only on the condition that the next symbol variation display is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the symbol variation display is completed. There may be an effect that is not performed unless other conditions are satisfied in addition to the start of the next symbol variation display even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variation display is completed. As another condition here, for example, if the embodiment includes a launching device that launches a game medium by being operated in the game area provided with the starting area, the launching apparatus was not operated for a specific time. The conditions that are established by this are raised. Further, the demonstration display effect may be an effect that is performed on at least one of the conditions that the next predetermined display effect is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined display effect ends. .

  Also, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls have won a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball type gaming machine that can be used by circulating the encapsulated ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area. The game value may be a predetermined number of game ball number data that can be launched into the game area.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix A)
A lottery means for performing a lottery of a profit amount to be given to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
A symbol display means for performing a symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol representing a lottery result by the lottery means after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner;
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Game information output means for outputting game information relating to the control of the game control means to the outside as a predetermined signal, and
The gaming table, wherein the game information output means outputs the predetermined signal during the symbol variation based on the symbol variation display being started by the symbol display unit.

(Appendix A)
In the game stand described in Appendix A,
The lottery means performs the lottery based on a game ball winning a predetermined starting area,
The game information output means outputs a predetermined second signal to the outside based on the winning of a game ball in the predetermined start area, and predetermined based on the symbol display means having stopped and displayed the symbol. A game table characterized in that the third signal is output to the outside.

(Appendix C)
In the game stand described in Appendix A or A,
Based on the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means being a specific lottery result, the first advantage and the advantage differ from the first control state in which the advantage for the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means for shifting the control state to the second control state that is the second advantage,
The game table, wherein the game information output means outputs a predetermined fourth signal to the outside when in the second control state.

(Appendix D)
In the game table described in Appendix C,
The gaming table, wherein the predetermined fourth signal is the predetermined signal.

(Appendix O)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a to d,
Display effect means for performing a predetermined display effect corresponding to the symbol variation display of the symbol display means,
The display effect means that a predetermined condition is satisfied that a predetermined time elapses without starting the next predetermined display effect after the predetermined display effect corresponding to the lottery result is completed. Based on the demonstration display,
The game table characterized in that the predetermined display effect is brighter than the demonstration display effect.

(Appendix F)
The game information output means outputs a predetermined signal during the symbol fluctuation display based on the specific fluctuation time based on the fact that the symbol display means starts the symbol fluctuation display based on the specific fluctuation time (for example, 120,000 ms or 360000 ms). May be output.

  Here, the specific variation time may be longer than other variation times.

(Supplementary note)
An auxiliary lottery means (for example, main control unit 300 for determining whether or not to make a normal decision) for lottery of a profit amount to be given to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined second start condition,
The control state transition means moves the predetermined start area (for example, the general electric accessory 252) based on the fact that the lottery result of the auxiliary lottery means is the second specific lottery result (for example, win). The first state (for example, the door member 2521 is closed) is changed to the second state (for example, the door member 2521 is opened) in which the game ball is easier to win than the first state,
During the symbol variation display based on the specific variation time, the predetermined start area may be more easily changed to the second state than during the symbol variation display based on the other variation time.

  In this case, the player's profit status may be grasped in detail.

  Next, a specific effect example will be described.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a time chart when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened and a game ball enters the special figure starting port 230, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a time chart when a game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 230 although the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened. In FIG. 33, time elapses from the left side to the right side of the figure.

  33 (a) and FIG. 33 (b), the top represents the fluctuation and stoppage of the usual figure, and the next is the opening of the door member 2521 (electric Chu) in the ordinary figure electric accessory 252. The second represents the change and stop of the special figure, and the bottom represents the change and stop of the effect image in the decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal).

  In this example, the gaming state (control state) is a non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). The general map display device 210 displays a variation of the normal diagram, and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the variation of the general diagram displays an effect corresponding to the variation of the normal map (predetermined effect, second effect) according to the result of the determination of whether or not the general map is correct Is equivalent to an example). Eventually, when the winning symbol of the usual figure is stopped and displayed (ordinary figure winning), the door member 2521 (electric Chu) of the ordinary figure electric accessory 252 opens for 5.8 seconds. In FIG. 33 (a), the special figure display device 212 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special figure before the game ball enters the special figure starting port 230 (electric chew prize) and the door member 2521 (electric chew) is closed. To do. Here, since it is a non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the special figure is 60 seconds (see FIGS. 23B and 23D), and the normal operation period is 65.8 seconds (FIG. 20 ( a)). In FIG. 33 (a), the special figure fluctuates until just before the operation period of the normal figure ends, and the special symbol corresponding to the special figure determination result is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the fluctuation of the special figure. A fluctuation corresponding effect (corresponding to an example of the first effect) is performed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 33 (b), the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 230 (electrical chew non-winning), and the door member 2521 (electrical chew) is closed. Therefore, the special figure display device 212 remains stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the special figure fluctuation corresponding effect in accordance with the fluctuation of the special figure. In addition, after the door member 2521 is closed, the normal operation period continues for 60 seconds (electric chew release completion waiting time). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 regulates the general drawing lottery during the normal operation period. For this reason, there is no change in the normal drawing. There will be no direct response to fluctuations. In other words, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a restricting unit that restricts the performance corresponding to the normal map fluctuation during the normal operation period. If the decoration pattern display device 208 does not perform the ordinary fluctuation response effect, the player cannot enjoy the effect, and only has to wait for the electric chew release end waiting time to elapse. There is a risk of lowering. In this applicable form, in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10 (a), it is determined whether or not a special effect start condition has been established, and after receiving a normal operation start command, a general diagram representing the last closure If no symbol variation start command has been received before receiving the electric accessory closing command, it is determined that the special effect start condition is satisfied, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is caused to execute a predetermined special effect. Control is performed. For this reason, even if the game ball does not enter the special figure starting port 230, the decoration design display device 208 changes the effect image of the special effect, and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. There is a case.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a predetermined special effect.

  34 (a) to FIG. 34 (c), the universal figure display device 210 variably displays, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variegated decorative symbol display as an effect corresponding to the universal figure variation. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 is being stopped, but the regular symbol fourth symbol 217 is being variably displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6B and FIG. 10C, a reach effect using a normal decorative symbol is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The same decorative design (here “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed in each of the display area 208a and the right design display area 208c, and the main character is swayed in the middle design display area 208b. In addition, the common symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 6D is stopped and displayed with the common symbol hitting symbol (see FIG. 18A), and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with the hitting symbol. A combination of three decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol in which three identical decorative symbols (here “decoration 7”) are arranged is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 6D, the fourth symbol 217 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed while the universal symbol display device 210 stops.

  In this way, when the general-purpose display device 210 stops and displays the winning symbol of the general-purpose figure (general-winning), the door member 2521 (electric Chu) of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for 5.8 seconds. However, as described with reference to FIG. 33B, the door member 2521 (electric chew) closes without the game ball entering the special figure starting port 230 (electric chew non-winning).

  Then, a predetermined special effect is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 from the same figure (e) to the same figure (g). The special effect here is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the same effect image as the image of the bowling chance game effect (special effect corresponding to the change in special figure) performed in accordance with the special symbol change stop display. While the special effect is being performed, the special symbol display device 212 remains stopped, and the special symbol fourth symbol 218 of the decorative symbol display device 208 also remains stopped. Also in this example, the control state (game state) is a non-electric support state, and at the same time as the electric chew release end waiting time of 60 seconds corresponding to an example of the first period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image of the scene where the strike could not be taken (an image corresponding to a loss). In this applicable form, the winning lamp 254 provided on the right side of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 emits light when there is a prize at the special drawing start port 230, and also emits light when the door member 2521 is closed. The game is performed by emitting the winning lamp 254 when the member 2521 is closed and displaying the same effect image as the effect image of the bowling chance game displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the special symbol change stop display. Even if there is no winning at the special figure starting port 230, the person has an illusion that there has been a winning at the special drawing starting point 230 and looks forward to the result of the bowling chance game displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In some cases, waiting for the 60-second waiting time for the end of the electric chew release to elapse, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. In other words, the predetermined special effect here corresponds to a fake effect (gaze effect) of the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure.

  Here, the predetermined special effect is an effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, but it is an effect corresponding to the usual figure fluctuation shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (d) (however, the effect corresponding to the lost pattern). May be. As described above, there is a case where the player's expectation can be enhanced by performing an effect according to the result of the determination as a predetermined special effect. It won't be confusing to the player.

  Subsequently, a modification of the example shown in FIG. 34 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 35, an example is shown from (a) to (e) in the figure, and an example in which a predetermined special effect is performed from (f) to (j) in the same figure.

  First, the universal symbol display device 210 variably displays from FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (b), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the universal symbol decoration shown in FIG. 18 (b) in accordance with the normal symbol variation stop display. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 is being stopped, but the regular symbol fourth symbol 217 is being variably displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5B, a reach effect using the general symbol decorative symbol is performed. In the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. (See (a)) is stopped and displayed. In this modified example, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the hit symbol of the normal symbol is the same decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. The symbol display area 208b is a combination in which the characters of the main character are stopped and displayed, and the combination is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. As described above, in this modified example, in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an ordinary map change effect (corresponding to an example of the second notification effect). As shown in FIG. 6C, the fourth symbol 217 of the normal symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed as stopped.

  Thus, when the general-purpose display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol of the general-purpose figure (general-winning), the door member 2521 (electricity Chu) of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened for a predetermined time even in this modified example. Here, as described with reference to FIG. 33 (a), the game ball enters the special figure starting port 230, and the special figure display device 212 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special figure. Again, this is a non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the special figure is 60 seconds (see FIGS. 23B and 23D), and the normal operation period is 65.8 seconds (FIG. 20A). reference). The effect displayed in accordance with the special symbol change stop display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is in accordance with the normal symbol change stop display shown in FIG. This is an effect related to the variation display of the decorative symbol performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 18 (d), the same special symbol decorative design as that shown in FIG. 18 (b) is used in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 4D, a reach effect using a special symbol decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 4D, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 is being variably displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 5E, the special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol hit symbol (see FIG. 17A), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the special symbol hit symbol. A combination of three decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol in which three identical decorative symbols (here “decoration 7”) are arranged is stopped and displayed. As described above, in FIG. 35D to FIG. 35E, the special symbol change effect (corresponding to an example of the first notification effect) is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also stopped.

  On the other hand, in the example in which the predetermined special effects from FIG. 35 (f) to FIG. 35 (j) are performed, the usual symbol variation stop display is performed as in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. The regular figure wins, and the door member 2521 (electricity Chu) of the universal figure electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time. Here, as described with reference to FIG. 33 (b), the door member 2521 (electric chew) closes without the game ball entering the special drawing start port 230 (electric chew non-winning).

Then, a predetermined special effect is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from FIG. The special effect in this modified example is an image imitating the effect image of the special symbol decoration symbol change stop display performed in accordance with the special symbol design change stop display (corresponding to the effect imitating the first notification effect). It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, a series of effects can be performed across the electric chew release, and the player's interest can be improved. Note that while the special effect is being performed, the special symbol display device 212 remains stopped, and the special symbol fourth symbol 218 of the decorative symbol display device 208 also remains stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6 (i), an effect imitating the reach effect using the special symbol decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6J, a display imitating a combination of the special symbol decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol lost symbol (here, “decoration 7”-“decoration 8”-“decoration”). 7)). Even in this modified example, the winning lamp 254 provided on the right side of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 emits light when there is a winning at the special drawing start port 230, and also emits light when the door member 2521 is closed. The effect image imitating the effect image of the special symbol decorative symbol change stop display performed in accordance with the light emission of the winning lamp 254 by the closing of the 2521 and the special symbol symbol change stop display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. With the display, even if there is no winning at the special figure starting port 230, the player has an illusion that there has been a winning at the special drawing starting port 230, and enjoys the result of the variable display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 In addition, there is a case where waiting for the 60 second electric chew release end waiting time to elapse can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. That is, the predetermined special effect in this modification also corresponds to a fake effect (gaze effect) of the special symbol stop display.

  As described above, there may be a case where a player's interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered by performing a predetermined special effect during the waiting time when the electric chew is released.

  Note that the main control unit 300 may determine that the special effect start condition is satisfied and, if satisfied, transmit a special effect command to the first sub-control unit 400. In this mode, it is not necessary for the first sub control unit 400 to determine whether the special effect start condition is satisfied in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10A, and transmission provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400. A special effect command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 may be set in the area based on the reception of the special effect command from the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 is configured to determine whether the special effect start condition is satisfied, the main unit 300 may be operated in addition to the case where the ball is closed without winning while the door member 2521 of the general electric component 252 is open. When the opening period of the door member 2521 of the accessory 252 elapses, it may be determined that the special effect start condition is satisfied by the fact that the special figure is not changing.

  Further, in the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state), the special figure variation time (60 seconds in the above example) is shorter than the normal operation period (in the above example, 65.8 seconds). For this reason, the special figure and the common figure do not change at the same time, so that the player may easily grasp the progress of the game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, the winning lamp 254 is provided in the vicinity of the ordinary electric role 252, so that the ordinary electric role 252 is difficult to see due to glare for a moment when the winning lamp 254 emits light. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to misunderstand that the special performance has begun by winning a prize at the special figure starting port 230 (electric chew prize).

  Furthermore, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of patterns during the electric chew release end waiting time. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to notice that it is a gas production.

  In addition, a demonstration effect may be performed as an effect of waiting time for the end of the electric chew release.

  Further, the predetermined special effect is not limited to the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be performed using other effect means (for example, various lamps 418 and the speaker 120).

  Furthermore, the general-purpose electric accessory 252 has a mode in which the door member 2521 opens and closes, but is not limited to this mode.

In the above description, “the rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) for performing the predetermined rendering, the first state where the entry of the game ball is difficult (for example, the closed state), and the entry of the game ball is the first state” Variable starting means (for example, the universal electric accessory 252) that can change the state to the second state (for example, the open state) that is easier, and the first predetermined condition (for example, the common figure is won) And the variable starter maintains the second state for a second period (e.g., 5.8 seconds) and then shifts to the first state and changes the first state to the first state. Variable start control means for controlling the state change of the variable start means (for example, 65.8 seconds) during an operation period (for example, 65.8 seconds) that is maintained and maintained for one period (for example, 60 seconds of waiting time for completion of electric chew release) , The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the game ball can be A first success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that performs a first success / failure determination (for example, special drawing lottery) when entering the starter, and a result of the first success / failure determination is a specific number. Game state transition that shifts the control state to a special game state (for example, during bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state when the result is a one-hit determination result (for example, a “big hit” special figure determination result) Means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), wherein the effecting means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) is configured so that the variable starting means ( For example, the ordinary electric accessory 252) maintains the second state (for example, open state) for the second period (for example, 5.8 seconds) and then shifts to the first state (for example, closed state). Until the variable start Based on the fact that the game ball has not entered the means, a predetermined special effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 34 and 35) during the first period (for example, the 60 second electric chew release end waiting time). A game stand characterized by performing. Is explained.

  Here, the operating period may be a period in which the variable starting means shifts from the first state to the second state simultaneously with the start and maintains the second state in the second period. The variable starting means may be a period in which the first state is shifted from the first state to the second state after maintaining the first state for a predetermined period, or the second state is maintained for the second period, or is started. Before the second period, the variable starting means shifts from the first state to the second state, maintains the second state for a predetermined period, and then shifts from the second state to the first state. It may be a period in which the state change is performed one or more times.

  In addition, in the description so far, “when a game ball enters a start area (for example, a general start start winning hole 251 or a general start start gate 253), start information (for example, a normal winning number and a normal change period) Start information deriving means for deriving a determination random number) (for example, a random value storage register corresponding to the normal start area of the random value generation circuit 318, a normal variable period determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and Combined with a main control unit 300 that performs random number processing) and second determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that makes a second determination (for example, lottery drawing) based on the start-up information. And a predetermined effect (for example, a normal fluctuation corresponding effect) according to a result of the second determination (for example, a normal map determination result) during the operation period, Display device 208) that restricts what is to be performed (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300), and the variable start control unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) determines whether or not the second determination is correct. The variable start means (during the operation period starting when the first predetermined condition is met) that the result is a specific second success / failure determination result (e.g., a “winning” universal success / failure determination result). For example, it controls the state change of the general-purpose electric accessory 252), and the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), as the predetermined special effect, results of the first determination of success / failure (for example, , A first effect (for example, a special map fluctuation-corresponding effect) according to the special figure success / failure determination result) and a second effect (for example, a normal figure success / failure determination result) , Performances corresponding to ordinary maps Amusement machine which is characterized in that either of the effect of). Is also explained.

  In addition, in the description so far, “the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) has lost the first determination result (for example, the special symbol determination result) as the predetermined special effect. A game stand characterized by performing any one of an effect for notifying that the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a result of the normal / failure determination) is lost. Is also explained.

  In addition, in the description so far, “the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) notifies the result of the second determination of correctness (for example, the determination result of the normal figure determination) performed by the second correctness determination means. The second notification effect (for example, the common figure fluctuation response effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)) is performed, and the variable start means (for example, the general electric tool) is started after the operation period is started. 252) until the transition to the first state (for example, the closed state) after the second state (for example, the open state) is maintained for the second period (for example, 5.8 seconds). When a game ball enters the starting means, the effect is to notify the result of the first winning / failing determination (for example, the special figure winning / failing determination result) performed by the one hit / fail determining means, and is related to the second notification effect. The first notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (d) to FIG. 35 (e)) If the game ball does not enter the variable starting means, the predetermined special effect is given during the first period (for example, 60 seconds of waiting time for the end of the electric chew release). A game table characterized by performing an effect imitating the first notification effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 35 (i) to (j)). Is also explained.

  Hereinafter, the case where the effect means is an image display device that displays an image will be described as an example. As the first notification effect related to the second notification effect, for example, in the case where the second notification effect is an effect of performing a variable display of a decorative symbol, the first notification effect is also an effect of performing a variable display of a decorative symbol. If the second notification effect is an effect in which a predetermined character appears, the first notification effect is also an effect in which the predetermined character appears, or the second notification effect is a predetermined background screen. If the display is an effect for displaying the above, the first notification effect is also an effect for displaying the predetermined background screen. Further, the first notification effect may be an effect of displaying a story developed from the second notification effect.

  Further, in the description so far, “a light emitting unit (for example, a winning lamp 254) that emits light when a game ball enters the variable starting unit” is provided, and the light emitting unit (for example, a winning lamp 254) includes the variable starting unit. A gaming table that emits light even when (for example, a general electric accessory 252) changes state from the second state (for example, open state) to the first state (for example, closed state). Is also explained.

Further, in the above description, “the normal game state (for example, the normal state) and the normal game state in which the game ball can be increased by winning the game ball to a predetermined variable starting means (for example, the general electric accessory 252). In a gaming machine that takes any one of a plurality of gaming states including a special gaming state (for example, during bonus) that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state, the game ball is in a starting region (for example, The start information deriving means (for example, the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4) for deriving the start information (for example, the normal winning random number value) when entering the general start winning port 251 and the general start gate 253). And a random number value storage register corresponding to the normal start area and the main control unit 300 for performing random number processing) and a second determination of whether or not (normal figure lottery) is performed based on the start information. Judgment result (common figure) The first success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for deriving the failure determination result and the first success / failure based on the game ball having entered the variable starting means (ordinary electric accessory 252). First determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for performing determination (special drawing lottery) and deriving a first determination result (special drawing determination result), and displaying the variation of the symbol First symbol display means (for example, special figure display device 212) that stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the result of the first winning / failing judgment, and the first symbol displaying means has a specific first judgment result (with special figure probability change) Variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234) that is released after the symbol corresponding to the big win is stopped and displayed, and the variable starting means has a second determination result that is determined as a result of the second determination. Results (for example, per common map The game ball is changed from a first state (for example, a closed state) in which it is difficult to win a game ball to a second state (for example, an open state) in which winning of the game ball is easier than the first state, During the special gaming state, it is easier to change to the second state than during the normal gaming state until the first determination result of the specified number of times (for example, 11 times) is derived by the first winning / failing determining unit. The first success / failure judging means is
A gaming table, wherein the first winning / failing determination is performed at different intervals during the special gaming state. Is explained.

  Here, the first symbol display means performs a symbol variation display (short variation display) over a short period of time equal to or less than a period during which the variable starting means maintains the second state during the special gaming state. The symbol variation display (long variation display) may be performed with a predetermined probability over a longer period than the short period.

  The special gaming state is a state until the specific first determination result is derived the predetermined number of times by the first win / fail determination unit, and the symbol display unit performs a variable display and a stop display of the symbol. A state and a state in which the variable winning means is operating.

  Further, in the description so far, “a second symbol display means (for example, the universal symbol display device 210) for stopping and displaying a symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure after displaying the variation of the symbol; A second effect period determining means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for determining a second variation period (for example, a normal pattern changing period) that is a period of the symbol variation display in the symbol display means; The success / failure determination means derives the specific second success / failure determination result with higher probability during the special gaming state than during the normal gaming state, and the variable start means is the second symbol display means. Changes from the first state (for example, the closed state) to the second state (for example, the open state) after the symbol corresponding to the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed. Production period determining means In the special gaming state, the second variation period is more easily determined to be a short variation period (for example, 1.5 seconds) shorter than a predetermined period than in the normal gaming state. During the state, the second effect period determining means can easily determine the second fluctuation period as the short fluctuation period, so that the probability that the variable start means changes to the second state is increased. Amusement stand. Is also explained.

  The predetermined period mentioned here may be the shortest period of one or a plurality of second variable periods determined by the second effect period determining means in the normal gaming state, or the variable start in the second state. A period during which the second state is maintained by the means, or a variable display period during which the first symbol display means stops and displays a first result determination result different from the specific first result determination result. It may be.

  In addition, in the description so far, “first effect period determining means (for example, a main control unit) for determining a first variable period (for example, a special symbol variable period) that is a period of variable display of symbols in the first symbol display means. 300, 304), wherein the first effect period determining means determines the different first effect periods during the special game state, so that the first success / failure determination means performs during the special game state. A gaming table characterized in that the interval of the first determination is different. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the first success / failure determination means determines the specific first success / failure determination until the specified number of the first success / failure determination results is derived during the special gaming state. A gaming table characterized in that a result is derived with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state. Is also explained.

In addition, in the description so far, “a specified number counter (for example, a probability variation counter) that changes a count value each time the first success / failure determination unit derives the specific first / failure determination result during the special gaming state” The variable winning means stops and displays the symbol corresponding to a predetermined first success / failure determination result (for example, a special figure probability change big hit) which is different from the result of the specific first success / failure determination by the first symbol display means. The specified number counter is opened before the number of times that the first first determination unit has derived the specific first determination result reaches the predetermined number during the special gaming state. A game table, wherein when the first success / failure determination means derives the predetermined first / failure determination result, the count value is reset. Is also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the variable starting means can easily change to the second state during the special gaming state.

  The specified number counter may be configured to count up the number of times that the first determination result is derived until the specified number of times is reached, or a count value representing the specified number of times. May be counted down each time the first success / failure determination means derives the specific first / failure determination result.

  In addition, in the description so far, “first effect period determining means (for example, a main control unit) for determining a first variable period (for example, a special symbol variable period) that is a period of variable display of symbols in the first symbol display means. 300, and the variable winning means corresponds to a predetermined first success / failure determination result (for example, a big hit without special figure probability change) that is different from the result of the specific first success / failure determination by the first symbol display means. The second effect period determining means is configured to make the second variation period shorter during the special game state than during the normal game state, and shorter than the predetermined period. It is easy to determine a short fluctuation period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the first effect period determining means is based on the fact that the first success / failure determination means derives the predetermined first success / failure determination result. The first performance Amusement machine, characterized in that period, which determines a longer period than the short fluctuation period. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the information notifying means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) for notifying the information based on the prescribed number of times is provided, and the information notifying means is configured such that the first winning / failing determining means is in the special gaming state. Any of the remaining number of times until the specific first determination result is reached and the number of transitions based on the remaining number of times from the first state to the second state of the variable starting means. One of these (for example, the remaining 11 times) is reported as information based on the specified number of times. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the information notifying means is the number of times the first winning / failing determining means derives the specific first winning / failing determination result during the special gaming state, and the first of the variable starting means. Information that adds any one of the number of transitions based on the number of times of derivation from the state to the second state (for example, during two consecutive resorts) is reported as information based on the specified number of times. Amusement stand. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the variable winning means is released even after the first symbol display means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to a predetermined first success / failure determination result different from the result of the specific first success / failure determination. The first performance period determining means is configured to display the first variation period during the special gaming state and the period during which the variable starting means maintains the second state (for example, 5.8 seconds). In the following short period (for example, 1 second), the first success / failure determination unit determines the first first / failure determination result, and the first success / failure determination unit determines the predetermined first success / failure determination. When a long period longer than the short period (for example, 120 seconds, 360 seconds) is determined with a predetermined probability based on the result being derived, and the first presentation period determining means determines the long period The variable starting means is in front of the first state. It is characterized by comprising information notifying means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for notifying specific information (for example, remaining number of times) based on the predicted number of times that can be transferred to the second state over the long period of time. To play. Is also explained.

Further, in the description so far, “the information notifying unit is information indicating the number of times obtained by adding the predicted number to the specified number of times as the specific information when the first effect period determining unit determines the long period of time. A game stand that notifies (for example, remaining 16 times). Is also explained.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix A)
Notification means for performing a predetermined effect;
Variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which winning of a game ball is difficult and a second state in which winning of a game ball is easier than the first state;
An operating means for operating the variable winning means in a predetermined opening pattern when the first predetermined condition is satisfied;
First winning / failing determining means for performing a first winning / failing determination when a game ball enters the variable winning means;
A gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the first winning / failing determination result is a specific first winning / failing determination result;
A game machine equipped with
If the second predetermined condition in which the variable winning means changes to the first state without entering the game ball during the second state of the predetermined opening pattern is satisfied, the notifying means has a predetermined special effect. A game stand characterized by performing.

(Appendix B)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A,
Start information deriving means for deriving start information when a game ball enters the start area;
A second success / failure determination means for performing a second success / failure determination based on the start information;
Restriction means for restricting a predetermined effect according to the result of the second success / failure determination when the variable winning means is activated,
The first predetermined condition includes a case where the result of the second success / failure determination is a specific second success / failure determination result,
The notification means performs, as the predetermined special effect, a first predetermined effect according to the first result determination result or a second predetermined effect according to the second result determination result. A game table that features

(Appendix C)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix B,
The predetermined special performance includes a notification that the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination is out of sync.

(Appendix D)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix B,
The notification means performs the predetermined effect according to the second determination result, performs the first predetermined effect related to the predetermined special effect according to the first determination result, A gaming machine characterized in that when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first predetermined effect is performed as the predetermined special effect.

(Appendix E)
The game stand according to any one of appendices A to D,
A light emitting portion that emits light when a game ball is won in the variable winning means;
The light emitting unit emits light when the first state is changed to the second state.

  In addition, as the effect in the case of not winning a prize, an effect other than the effect with the highest expectation degree (for example, the effect with the lowest expectation degree) may be selected from among a plurality of effects with different expectation degrees.

  Subsequently, an embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  The pachinko machine of this embodiment is the pachinko machine 100 of the 2nd applicable form shown in FIG. 16, and is the pachinko machine of the game nature demonstrated using FIGS. 24-27. However, the fluctuation time of the special figure is different from the fluctuation time described so far. First, the game characteristics in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described once again. In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when the electric support is repeated, the big win with the electric support is repeatedly won and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 shown in FIG. For example, during the electric support state, a consecutive house is also established when a special jackpot with electric support of the special figure is won by one or more times. Special bonus jackpots are available with probability variation and non-probability variation jackpots, and it is easy to win the jackpot with probability variation, but with certainty between the transition to the non-electric support state and the transition to the non-electric support state. There is a limit (limiter) on the number of times that a big hit can be obtained. The pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine that earns a ball by making a game ball enter the ordinary electric accessory 252.

  When the game is started, it is a normal game state (a special low-probability figure low probability state). When the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 shown in FIG. 16 is opened, it is possible to win a special drawing start port 230, and a special drawing for the first ball that has entered the special drawing start port 230. Win / fail determination (special drawing lottery) is performed. In this case, the probability that the special figure success / failure determination is lost is 75% because of the non-electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) (see FIG. 22A). On the other hand, if the special symbol win / fail determination result is a big hit, the special symbol display device 212 stops and displays one of the special symbols A to P, which is a big hit symbol (see FIG. 17A). When winning the special figure jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state) will always shift to the electric support state (general figure high probability state). On the other hand, the probability of winning a jackpot with probability variation is 96%, and the probability of winning a jackpot without probability variation is 4% (see FIG. 22C). When winning the big hit with no probability change, the value 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300, and the process proceeds to step S513 in FIG. The control state after the big hit game here becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state.

  On the other hand, when winning a jackpot with probability variation, a value of 10 is set in the probability variation counter, and the process proceeds to step S514 in FIG. The control state after the big hit game here becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state.

  In addition, when winning a big hit without probability change, a value may not be set in the probability variation counter, and after that, when winning a big hit with probability change, a value of 10 may be set in the probability variation counter.

  In any case, if you win the big hit of the special figure, it will always shift to the electric support state (general figure high probability state) after the big hit game ends. The door member 2521 of the object 252 is easy to open. For this reason, it is easy to determine whether or not a special figure is appropriate. If the special figure is in the non-probable change state (special figure low probability state), you win a big hit with a probability of 25%, and if it is a probable change state (special figure high probability state), you win the big hit with a fairly high probability. To do. In the state where the remaining number of times (predetermined remaining number) that can win a jackpot with probability change before shifting to the non-electric support state is more than 2 times, the probability of winning the jackpot with probability change and with a short time until the next jackpot is It is 96%, and the probability of winning a big hit with no chance change and 100 time savings is 4% (see FIG. 22C). Further, the control state in which the specified remaining number of times is from 10 to 1 is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  On the other hand, if a winning big hit with no probability change and 100 time savings is won, the probability changing counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and a big hit with probability changing is acquired before the transition to the non-electric support state. The remaining number of times that can be increased. Although resetting the probability variation counter is advantageous to the player, it is performed only with a probability of 4% as described above. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability variation counter is reset (the state returned from step S518 to step S513 shown in FIG. 26) may be referred to as a limiter clear state.

  When the specified remaining number of times reaches a limit (a state where the limiter has been reached), a big hit with certainty cannot be obtained even if the big hit is won (see FIG. 17B). The big hit in this state is a big hit with a probability of 53.3% with no probability change and 100 time reductions, and a big hit with no probability change and no time reduction with a probability of 46.7%. When the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit without a short time, the bonus is ended, and the state shifts to the non-electric support state, and also shifts to the non-probable change state to enter the normal game state. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit with no probability change and 100 times a short time, it shifts to the non-probability change state, but the electric support state is not changed until the special figure variation stop display is performed 100 times. Extended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the control state is the normal game state which is the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, and the special figure low probability general figure high when proceeding to step S513 in FIG. There is a special state high probability normal state high probability state between the probability state and the specified remaining number of times from 10 to 1 (when the limiter is reached). Note that a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state may be prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, for example, the special figure high probability common figure high probability state is set as the “first game state (control state)”, and the probability variation counter in the “first game state (control state)” is used. Reset, that is, "first game" that was won for a specific big hit (here, a big hit without any probable change), then a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability that is "second gaming state (control state)" Transition to the state. On the other hand, in the “first gaming state (control state)”, when the big hit without a short time is won after reaching the limiter, the special figure low-probability diagram that is the “third gaming state (control state)” Transition to a low probability state.

  Whether the game state is the first game state, the second game state, or the third game state, there is a difference in the player's advantage in each game state. If it is a state, you may provide the 1st game state A, the 1st game state B .... For example, in the first gaming state A, the usual figure change time becomes an extremely shortened time and the opening time of the door member 2521 of the ordinary figure electric accessory 252 is very long. The time may be shortened and the opening time of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 may be lengthened. Further, even in the third gaming state, a third gaming state A, a third gaming state B,... May be provided. In this case, for example, in the third gaming state A, the opening time of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric role 252 is relatively short, and in the third gaming state B, the door of the ordinary electric role 252 is opened. The opening time of the member 2521 may be relatively long.

  One of the features of the game stand of this embodiment is that it is possible to earn a ball even between big hit games. In other words, it is possible to earn a ball even after the jackpot game is over until the next jackpot game is started. For example, in the second gaming state (the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state), the probability of not being a big hit is higher than the probability of a big hit, and the symbol variation display of the special figure of the loss is likely to increase. It should be noted that in a pachinko machine that is provided with a small hit, it is likely that there will be a lot of lost or small symbol change display. Therefore, by increasing the time of the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the lost symbol or the small hit symbol, the chance of opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is increased, and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 ( A game ball can be made to enter the special figure starting port 230) to earn an exit ball. As described above, in the present embodiment, in a state where the special figure has a low probability, the variation time of the loss is further lengthened so that the player can earn a ball.

  It should be noted that during the big hit game, a game characteristic may be adopted in which a game ball can be made to enter the variable winning opening 234 to sufficiently earn a ball. In other words, it may be a pachinko machine that can earn a ball during a big hit game or during a big hit game. However, since the jackpot game is provided with a limiter, it is easy to earn unlimited balls between jackpot games.

  Increase the time of the symbol fluctuation display to stop and display the lost symbol or the small hit symbol, that is, the long fluctuation time is, for example, longer than the time of the symbol fluctuation display to stop and display the big hit symbol, or the big hit game It may be longer than the inside time. When a plurality of times are prepared, the comparison may be performed in the longest time. For example, the longest time of the symbol variation display time for displaying the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is made longer than the longest time of the symbol variation display time for stopping the big hit symbol, or the big hit It may be longer than the longest time during the game. Also, each time during the big hit game may be shortened. During the big hit game, the big hit game start interval (for example, the big hit game start production time), the door member 2341 opening time of the variable winning opening 234, the waiting time for closing the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234, the big hit game end interval (for example, There is a big hit game end effect time), and by shortening each time, it is possible to increase the time ratio between the big hit games and earn a ball. Further, although the time of the big hit game start interval and / or the big hit game end interval remains a predetermined time (a fixed time), the opening time of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 and / or the closing waiting time is changed ( The overall time during the big hit game may be shortened.

  Further, not only in the second control state, but also in the first control state, the time for the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the lost symbol or the small hit symbol may be increased.

  Furthermore, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 may be easily opened only for a specific loss even during the same loss display time.

  In the time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the variation time of the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol pattern of the loss shown in FIG. It is good (you can make all of the changes that have a long fluctuation time), or you can decide by lottery with a part of the time that has a long fluctuation time. May be good). Alternatively, in a predetermined control state (for example, the second control state), all have a long variation time, and in a second predetermined control state (for example, the first control state), a part of May be determined by lottery with a long variation time, or may be all short variation times (there may be no loss of variation time). Hereinafter, a state in which there is no losing for which the variation time becomes long (a state in which there is only a lapse in which the variation time is short) is referred to as a first state, and a state in which there is only a lapse in which the variation time is long (a state in which there is no losing for which the variation time is short). May be referred to as a second state. Note that a state in which a variation in which the variation time is long and a variation in which the variation time is short (a state in which a long variation time is selected by lottery) is mixed is sometimes referred to as a third state.

  Next, a specific variation time of the special symbol design variation display will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a special chart variation time determination table in each control state. (A) is a special figure variation time determination table used in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (third gaming state), and (b) is a special figure low probability general figure. This is a table for determining the special figure change time used in the high probability state (second game state), and FIG. 10C shows the special figure high probability general figure high probability state (first game when the limiter is not reached). (D) is a special figure variation time determination table used in the state), and FIG. 6 (d) shows the special figure variation used in the special figure high probability general figure high probability state (first game state) when the limiter is reached. It is a table for time determination. Each of these tables is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, after deriving the result of determining whether or not the special figure is valid, determines the special symbol stop symbol, and then, based on the current control state and the special symbol special symbol, Determine the table.

  In the description here, in order to simplify the explanation, the hit type (stop symbol of the special figure), for the big hit type, three types of big hits A to C, and for the lost type, two of lost A and lost B It is a kind. The big hit A is a big hit with a probability change and with a short time until the next big hit, the big hit B is a big hit with no probability change and a time reduction of 100 times, and the big hit C is a big hit with no probability change and no short time. That is, the jackpots A to C are for convenience to explain whether or not there is a probability change or a time reduction (electric support). Loss A is the first loss symbol shown in FIG. 17A, and Loss B is the second loss symbol.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a variation time table. FIG. 11A is a diagram showing the table 101, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the table 111, FIG. 10C is a diagram showing the table 121, and FIG. These are figures which show the table 131, and the figure (e) is a figure which shows the table 141. FIG. Each of these tables is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when a specific losing symbol (in this case, losing B) is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (second gaming state), the losing B is stopped. The variation time of the symbol variation display to be displayed is determined using the table 141 shown in FIG. Here, the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time is acquired (the possible range is 0 to 255), and the fluctuation time is determined based on the acquired random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. In the table 141, only a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more is selected. That is, a difference is provided in the variation time based on the lottery result, but both are variation times of 60 seconds or more. On the other hand, when the loss A is stopped and displayed in the special figure low-probability high-probability state (second gaming state), the variation time of the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the loss A is as shown in FIG. It is determined using the table 131 shown in FIG. When the big hit A is stopped and displayed, the variation time is determined using the table 111 shown in FIG. In both the table 131 and the table 111, only a 1 second variation time (shortened variation time) is selected. Furthermore, when the big hit B is stopped and displayed, the variation time is determined using the table 121 shown in FIG. In the table 121, a fluctuation time of 1 second is selected with a probability of 50%, and a fluctuation time of 1.2 seconds is selected with a probability of 50%. If the fluctuation time of the table 141 used for a specific lose symbol is 60 seconds or more, the opportunity to open the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 can be obtained a plurality of times. As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the operation (opening / closing operation) period of the door member 2521 of the universal electric accessory 252 in the ordinary high probability state is 6.3 seconds, and the variation time is 60 seconds. If it is 300 seconds, it can be obtained up to 47 times. On the other hand, if the variation time is 1 second or 1.2 seconds, the opportunity to open the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 can be obtained only once even if good luck. For this reason, in the special symbol variation display in which a specific loss symbol (loss B) is stopped and displayed, the number of outgoing balls is larger than in the special symbol variation display in which the special symbol (loss A) is stopped and displayed. Can be expected. In addition, more balls can be expected than the special symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol (big hit A, B) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, although the small hit is not prepared here, even when the small hit is prepared, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed becomes a shortened variation time, and a specific lost symbol ( In the special symbol variation display in which the loss B) is stopped and displayed, more balls can be expected than in the special symbol variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, the table 111 and the table 131 shown in FIG. 37 (c) may be a table that provides a difference in the variation time according to the lottery result, like the table 121 shown in FIG. 37 (c). The table 121 shown in FIG. 37C may be a table that prescribes a uniform variation time like the table 111. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a lot continues for a predetermined number of times), a table may be provided that provides a difference in variation time according to the lottery result. Further, a long variation time (first variation time) and a short variation time (second variation time) may be selected according to the lottery result. The short variation time here may be a time (for example, 59 seconds) shorter than the shortest time (for example, 60 seconds) among the long variation times (hereinafter the same).

  As shown in FIG. 36A, in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (third game state), the table 101 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the table 101, only a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected. Therefore, even if any symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display for 60 seconds is performed. FIG. 37 (a) shows, for example, the case where the winning symbol is won in step S505 shown in FIG. 24, and the door member 2521 of the universal electric accessory 252 is opened in step S507, and the special symbol variation starts. This table is used for During the symbol variation display for 60 seconds, for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a battle effect. In this battle effect, since only the conclusion part of whether to win or lose last is different, even if any symbol is stopped and displayed, it is performed for the same number of seconds. The battle effect may be started from the start of the special symbol design change, or may be started at a timing such as the start of the normal design change or the opening of the door member 2521 of the general design electric accessory 252. When starting a battle production from the start of the usual figure change, enter the player by dividing the start from the start of the usual figure change to the stop as a 1st battle effect and the next special figure change start to stop as a 2nd battle production. Can do. In the table 101, only a variation time of less than 60 seconds may be selected, or a uniform variation time may be selected from a plurality of variation times without being uniformly set to 60 seconds. . Further, a long variation time (first variation time) and a short variation time (second variation time) may be selected according to the lottery result.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (first game state) when the limiter has not yet been reached, a specific loss symbol (here, loss B) is stopped and displayed. Even in this case, the table 131 shown in FIG. 37D is used, and a long variation time is not selected.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when a specific loss symbol (here, loss B) is stopped and displayed even in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (first game state) when the limiter is reached. In addition, a table 131 shown in FIG. 37 (d) is used, and a long variation time is not selected. The special figure fluctuation time determination table when the limiter arrives is the same as the special figure fluctuation time determination table when the limiter has not yet reached (FIG. 36C) except that the big hit B is replaced with the big hit C. That is, only a specific hit type (big hit B, lost A, B) is the same, but may be completely different.

  Internally, the jackpot A in FIG. 36C and the jackpot B in FIG. 36D are the same data. In addition, even when a specific losing symbol is stopped and displayed, a long variation time (first variation time) is always selected even if a long variation time (first variation time) is not selected. Alternatively, a long variation time (first variation time) and a short variation time (second variation time) may be selected according to the lottery result.

  In the variation time described above, the longest time corresponding to the jackpot success / failure determination result (first success / failure determination result) is 60 seconds, and the longest time corresponding to the loss / failure determination result (second success / failure determination result). The time is 300 seconds. In addition, the determination result may include up to symbol determination, and the longest variation time corresponding to the determination result of a specific symbol (losing B) is 300 seconds. In addition, the comparison may be made for each control state, and in a predetermined control state (special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state), the longest time corresponding to the big hit determination result (first determination result) is 1 2 seconds, and the longest time corresponding to the loss determination result (second determination result) is 300 seconds.

  In addition, here, the difference of the ball is given by the length of the symbol “variation” time. However, the length of time of the fluctuation variation (a kind of stop display), which is performed after the symbol variation display is completed, is confirmed. The time of display (definite stop), the time until the next symbol change can be started (until permitted) after the symbol stop display, that is, the timer time until the next symbol change start (below) A difference may be given to the ball by at least one of the times between the states such as the length of the symbol variation waiting time, or a combination (including all) as appropriate.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a first modification of the special figure variation time determination table in each control state. FIG. 6A is a special figure variation time determination table used in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (second gaming state).

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, a specific losing symbol (losing B) and a losing symbol (losing A) other than the losing symbol are prepared. In this modification, the variation time table is switched using a random number. That is, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (second gaming state), a dedicated random number different from the special figure variation time determination random value (the possible range is 0 to 0). 255), a lottery of the variable time table to be used is performed. Note that a random number value for determining the special figure variation time may be used instead of the dedicated random number.

  FIG. 38B shows a lottery table.

  In the lottery table shown in FIG. 38B, a table 131 (see FIG. 37D) in which only the shortened variation time is selected with a probability of 87.5% is used, and a long variation with a probability of 12.5% is used. A table 141 (see FIG. 37 (e)) in which only the time is selected is used. In the case of this example, the player does not know whether or not the stop symbol is a lost symbol based on the symbol variation time. However, if the symbol variation display is performed for a long time, even if it is detected that the losing symbol is stopped and displayed before the symbol is stopped, it is possible to get a ball, so the player is disappointed. On the contrary, the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a second modification of the special figure variation time determination table in each control state. (A) is a special figure variation time determination table used in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (third gaming state), and (b) is a special figure low probability general figure. This is a table for determining the special figure change time used in the high probability state (second game state), and FIG. 10C shows the special figure high probability general figure high probability state (first game when the limiter is not reached). (D) is a special figure variation time determination table used in the state), and FIG. 6 (d) shows the special figure variation used in the special figure high probability general figure high probability state (first game state) when the limiter is reached. It is a table for time determination. Each of these tables is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this second modification, a table set is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special figure. This table set defines, for example, a variable time table that is referred to after the jackpot A special game is over and until the start of the next jackpot game (basically). That is, the variation time table used between jackpot games is defined based on the number of symbol variation display (the number of variations). When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the table set is not switched, and in FIG. 39, all are indicated by “−”. However, the table set may be switched when a specific losing symbol (for example, losing B) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, although a small hit is not prepared in the second modification, a small hit may be prepared. The table set cannot be switched even when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the table set may be switched at a small hit or a specific hit. Further, the table set may be switched according to the combination with the state, or vice versa. For example, the table set may be switched if it is a small hit in the limiter reached state, and the table set may not be switched if the small hit in the limiter unreachable state, or vice versa.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a table set in the second modified example. This table set is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the table set A shown in FIG. 40 (a) returns to the normal gaming state which is the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state when the normal big hit (big hit C) is won when the limiter is reached. The table set A is a normal table set, and this table set is used after the big hit game of the big hit C. In the table set A, the table 01 is continuously used from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game. That is, information representing the table set is set in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, but after the table set A is set, the table 01 continues to be used no matter how many times it fluctuates thereafter.

  Further, the table set A shown in FIG. 40A may be used even in an initial state such as after power-on (after the RAM is cleared).

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing each table in the second modification.

  In the table 01 shown in FIG. 41A, 60 seconds, which is a long variation time, is selected as the variation time regardless of the type of success / failure (special drawing determination result).

  As shown in FIG. 39, the table set B shown in FIG. 40B is set in the RAM 308 when a specific winning symbol (here, big hit A) is stopped and displayed. In this table set B, the table 11 is continuously used from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game.

  In the table 11 shown in FIG. 41 (b), the variation time is uniformly selected to be 1 second, which is the shortened variation time, regardless of the success / failure type (special drawing determination result).

  The table set C shown in FIG. 40C is set in the RAM 308 when the second specific winning symbol (here, big hit B) is stopped and displayed, regardless of the control state, as shown in FIG. . After the big hit game of big hit B, the table 21 is used for the first symbol variation display, the table 22 is used for the second symbol variation display, the table 23 is used for the third symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol is displayed. The table 24 is used in the variable display, and the table 25 is continuously used in the fifth and subsequent symbol fluctuation displays.

  Note that, for example, the gaming state when selecting the table 24 (for example, with electric support) and the gaming state when selecting the table 25 (for example with no electric support) may be different.

  In the table 21 shown in FIG. 41 (c), if the success / failure type (special figure determination result) is other than a specific losing symbol (here, losing symbol B) (big hit A, B, losing A, or small hit symbol), the shortening A variable time of 1 second is always selected. On the other hand, if it is a specific losing symbol (losing B), a random number value for determining the special figure variation time is obtained (the possible range is 0 to 255), and the fluctuation is based on the acquired random number value for determining the special graph fluctuation time. A lottery of time will be held. The lottery results here each have a long variation time (first variation time) of 60 seconds or more, and the shortest 60 seconds among the long variation times is most likely to be selected. Note that lottery may be performed including not only a long variation time but also a short variation time.

  Also in the table 25 shown in FIG. 41 (d), if the success / failure type (special figure determination result) is other than a specific losing symbol (here, losing symbol B) (big hit A, B, losing A, or small hit symbol), shortening A variable time of 1 second is always selected. On the other hand, if it is a specific lose pattern (loss B), the variation time lottery is performed in the same manner as the table 21. All of the lottery results here have a long fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of 60 seconds or longer, and a longer fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation time of 300 seconds) out of the long fluctuation time compared to the table 21. It is easy to be selected. In FIG. 41, the table 24 to the table 24 are omitted. However, until the losing of the special figure continues for five times after the big hit game, the losing B is stopped and displayed as the losing continues. It becomes easier to acquire more balls. In other words, in the case of 5 symbols variation display immediately after the big hit game ends, when the loss B is stopped and displayed, the variation time of 60 seconds becomes difficult to be selected, and the longer variation time is easily selected even in the long variation time. It will become. In other words, it is set so that the selection rate of the timer with a long variation time increases each time a loss is pulled. In Table 21 to Table 25, the variation time (timer) is the same and the random number ranges are different, but a longer variation time may be added as the table number increases. For example, the table 21 is selected from 60 seconds and 120 seconds, the table 22 is selected from 120 seconds and 180 seconds, the table 23 is selected from 180 seconds and 240 seconds, and the table 24 is selected. , 240 seconds and 300 seconds may be selected. In the table 25, 300 seconds and 360 seconds may be selected.

  When selected from a plurality of variation times, the average value of the plurality of variation times may be a long variation time (first variation time) of 60 seconds or more, taking into account the selection probability. The expected value time may be a long fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) of 60 seconds or more. Furthermore, the shortest time among the plurality of fluctuation times may be longer than the long fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds), or the longest time may be a long fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds). .

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a modification of the table set A shown in FIG. In this modified example, a different variation time table is used in a state in which the bonus is ended and the state is returned to the normal gaming state (the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state).

  The table set A of the modified example shown in FIG. 42 (a) is used after the bonus is over and the game state returns to the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The table 02 is used for the symbol variation display for the first 20 times (first 20 times after the end of the big hit game) in the normal gaming state, and the table 01 shown in FIG. 41A is used for the symbol variation display for the 21st time and thereafter. .

  In the case of this example, the table 01 of the table set A may be selected in an initial state such as after power-on.

  FIG. 42B shows the table 02.

  In the table 02 shown in FIG. 42 (b), the variation time is uniformly selected as 10 seconds, which is a short variation time, regardless of the success / failure type (special figure determination result). For example, during the symbol change to display the big hit C, or during the big hit game of the big hit C, a battle effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character loses to the enemy and falls down once, and the main character returns to the bonus ( In the case of performing the effect of the state 1 (circled in FIG. 26), the main character remains in the collapsed state during the first 20 symbol variation displays. Then, from the 21st symbol change display, the stage returns to the initial stage of production, the hero fights again against the enemy, and when the hero wins, the bonus starts again (1 state surrounded by circles shown in FIG. 26).

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a table set in which the tables are switched at the specified remaining number of times.

  The table set shown in FIG. 43 is an example in which the variable time table is switched every time the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is reduced by one, that is, every time the big hit A with probability change is stopped and the big hit game is played. FIG. When the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is 11, the table 21 shown in FIG. 41 (c) is used, and when the specified number of times is 10, the specific losing symbol (losing B) is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when the table 22 is used, the variation time is likely to be longer than that of the table 21. When the number of times is nine, the variation time becomes longer than the table 22 when the specific losing symbol (losing B) is stopped and displayed. An easy table 23 is used. As described above, as the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) decreases, a table that is advantageous to the player, that is, a table that tends to acquire a lot of balls due to a long variation time. In other words, the change time table is switched when a predetermined condition including at least a requirement regarding the number of limiters or the number of remaining limiters is satisfied.

  In addition, not every time the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) decreases by one, the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is within the first remaining number range (for example, the remaining 90 to 81 times). The second table is used in the second remaining number range (for example, the remaining 80 times), and the third table is used in the third remaining number range (for example, the remaining 79 to 71 times). May be used.

  Although the pachinko machine described so far is a pachinko machine that does not hold a special figure, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine provided with a special figure hold.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a special figure variation time determination table that can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with special figure hold.

  In this example, up to four special figure holds can be stored. FIG. 44 (a) is a table for determining a variation time when a symbol other than a specific symbol for losing (here, “Loss A”) is stopped and displayed. Table 1 or Table 6 or Table 7 is a random number lottery. May be selected. At the time of determining the variation time, a special figure variation time determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 99) is acquired, and the variation time is determined based on the acquired special figure variation time determination random value. In any table shown in FIG. 44 (a), the random number range (winning value range) differs between the case where the number of holds is 0 or more and 2 or less and the case where the number of holds is 3 (full tank). Note that the timer number described in this table is a number representing the fluctuation time.

  FIG. 44 (b) is a table for determining a variation time when a specific losing symbol (in this case, losing B) is stopped and displayed. Table 2 is always selected. In Table 2 shown in FIG. 44 (b), a random number range (winning numerical value range) is defined uniformly regardless of the number of holds.

  Even if the special figure win probability is raised to some extent even if the special figure is in a low probability state, if the special figure is on hold when the limiter is reached, it can immediately return to the electric support state after the consecutive resort is over There is a case.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing another special figure variation time determination table that can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with special figure hold.

  In this example, a total of seven holds can be stored, including the hold in FIG. 1 and the hold in FIG. In addition, the gaming state includes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability variation gaming state), a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state (short-time gaming state), a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state (normal gaming state) ) Is prepared.

  The pachinko machine in this example is also provided with a small hit.

  Also, in the pachinko machine in this example, after the big hit game, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is maintained while the symbol variation stop display is performed for a predetermined first number of times (for example, 70 times), and then The special figure high probability normal figure low probability state is maintained for a predetermined second number of times (for example, four times) while the symbol variation stop display is performed, and then the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (so-called normal control). A mode (hereinafter referred to as ST mode) is adopted. The special figure status 1 is, for example, the status until the first 20th symbol variation display in the ST mode, and the special figure status 2 is, for example, the 21st to 40th in the ST mode. This is the status until the symbol variation display is performed.

  Further, in this example, a random number lottery is performed using a variation pattern table to determine a variation time.

  Here, the long fluctuation time of the special figure will be described again. The long fluctuation time of the special figure may be a time longer than the maximum total opening time (for example, 30 seconds × 16R = 480 seconds) of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker). When the maximum number of rounds of the pachinko machine is two, the longest loss time may be 30 seconds × 2R of 60 seconds or more. Alternatively, the long fluctuation time of the special figure may be equal to or longer than the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) in one round. When the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is 6 seconds and the maximum R number defined by the rules and internal regulations is 16, the long fluctuation time of the special figure is 6 seconds × 16 = 96. It may be more than a second. In addition, the long fluctuation time of special figure is more than the fluctuation time of ordinary figure (variation time per ordinary figure or fluctuation time of ordinary figure loss) in the case of special figure low probability low figure probability (third game state) It may be more than the fluctuation time of the usual figure (fluctuation time per ordinary figure, or the fluctuation time of ordinary figure loss) in the case of a special figure low probability high figure probability (second gaming state) Alternatively, it may be longer than the fluctuation time of the usual figure (fluctuation time per ordinary figure, or the fluctuation time of ordinary figure loss) in the case of the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability (first gaming state). Also, the long fluctuation time of the special figure may be equal to or longer than the big time fluctuation of the special figure or the special figure lose time in the case of the low probability of the special figure. It may be more than the fluctuation time of the special figure jackpot in the case of the special figure high probability, or the fluctuation time of the special figure loss, or the fluctuation of the special figure jackpot in the case of the high probability of the special figure high probability It may be greater than the time or the fluctuation time of the special figure loss.

  Also, the long fluctuation time of the special figure is the number of winning balls (for example, 15 balls) × maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10 counts) × maximum R number (for example, for example) of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) defined by the rules and internal regulations. It may be a time that does not exceed the time during which 16 rounds) (for example, 2400 shots) can be obtained. In addition, the long fluctuation time of the special figure is within one expected loss or within the expected number of balls specified in the rules and internal regulations from the average number of lost times and the loss fluctuation time until the next big hit determined from the loss probability. It may be time. For example, if the rules and internal regulations stipulate that the expected number of balls that can be earned at one opportunity is 10,000, the time must be within one loss, or from the average number of lost times and the fluctuation time of the loss. May be.

  Furthermore, a limiter may be provided so that a long fluctuation time does not continue continuously. For example, in FIGS. 41 (c) to (d), the selection rate of the timer having a long variation time is set to increase every time the loss is pulled. For example, if the loss continues for 10 times, A timer with a long variation time may be difficult to select or may not be selected.

  In addition, the longest fluctuation time of special figure losing may be longer than the longest fluctuation time per special figure, and the longest fluctuation time of special figure losing is longer than the longest fluctuation time of special figure losing. Also good.

  Further, in a certain state or only in a certain state), the longest fluctuation time of special figure loss may be longer than the longest fluctuation time per special figure. The certain state here may be, for example, a gaming state after a limiter clear (a special low-probability normal figure high-probability state) or a special low-probability normal figure low-probability state in a normal gaming state. Also good. Conversely, in other states, the longest variation time per special figure may be longer. The other state mentioned here may be a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state during a limiter operation, or may be a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state in a normal gaming state.

  Further, the long fluctuation time of the special figure may be longer than or equal to one opening time of the door member 2521 (electrical chew) of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. Moreover, it may be more than the time (opening waiting time) between the opening of the door member 2521 of the usual electric accessory 252, and may be below. Further, it may be longer than or less than the entire operation period for one hit of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. In addition, it may be equal to or longer than the electric chew operation start effect period, or may be equal to or longer than the electric chew operation end effect period.

  Further, the long fluctuation time of the special figure may be longer than or equal to one opening time at the variable winning opening 234 (attacker). Further, it may be greater than or less than the time (opening waiting time) between opening of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker). Further, it may be longer than or less than the entire operation period in the jackpot game. In addition, it may be longer than or equal to the jackpot game start effect period, or may be equal to or longer than the jackpot game end effect period.

  Further, the long fluctuation time of the special figure may be equal to or longer than the game ball firing interval, or may be equal to or longer than the longest fluctuation time in the normal figure fluctuation. .

  Further, the long variation time of the special symbol may be equal to or longer than the symbol fixed stop time of the special symbol, or may be equal to or longer than the symbol variation standby time.

  Furthermore, it may be more than the time from the start of normal symbol variation to the end of the electric chew operation, or may be more than the time appropriately combined with the time explained so far. It may be the following.

  Then, the specific example of the effect in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 46A is a diagram illustrating the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is five.

  The five times mentioned here may be the remaining five times including the jackpot.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (a) has a specified remaining number display area 2081 in the upper left, a consecutive times display area 2082 in the upper right, and a reserved number display area 2083 in the usual map from the left in the figure below. In addition, a hit / fail judgment result notification area 2084 for ordinary maps and a hit / decision result notification area 2085 for special drawings are provided. In the state shown in FIG. 46 (a), “3” is displayed in the holding number display area 2083 of the normal map, and a white circle icon representing the hit of the normal map is displayed in the normal determination result notification area 2084. Yes. In addition, the number “7” representing the big hit A with probability change is displayed in the special determination result determination result notification area 2085.

  In addition, Renso may be simply a single jackpot as a series of villas, but if it wins a jackpot with a short time when the probability variation counter is reset with the unit until reaching the limiter as a unit, it may be a second consecutive house .

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (a), an icon display 2086 corresponding to the number of winning prize balls is displayed on the lower left, and a point display 2087 corresponding to the number of winning prize balls is displayed on the lower right. ing. This point display 2087 may be a point display corresponding only to the number of outgoing balls (the number of prize balls) earned by entering a game ball into the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (special drawing start port 230). A point display corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained by adding game balls to the (variable prize opening 234) and earning them may be used. It should be noted that, regardless of whether it is an ordinary electric accessory 252 or an attacker (variable winning opening 234), the amount of balls that have been entered exceeding the maximum number of balls entered (so-called over winnings) may be added. However, it is not necessary to add, or only one of them may be added.

  Further, a state display area 2088 representing the current gaming state is provided in the lower center, and is displayed as “big hit” in this case, and it is informed that the big hit gaming state is present.

  In addition, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (a), there is a Tono-like character with a heel in both hands that appears when the specified remaining number of times (the number of remaining limiters) is 10 to 5. It is displayed.

  When the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is 4 to 1, other characters may be displayed. In addition, the same character may be displayed except when the prescribed remaining number is 11, or a character corresponding to the prescribed remaining number may be displayed. Furthermore, it is only necessary to change some display such as changing the background instead of making the character appear.

  FIG. 46B is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is 11 (MAX).

  The state in which the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is 11 times (MAX) is a state in which the process proceeds to step S513 in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 46B is a limiter clear state in which the probability variation counter is reset. In other words, when the winning combination without probability change is won, the specified remaining number of times display area 2081 becomes MAX display. In addition, even if it is not a limiter clear state, a fake MAX display may be performed. The timing at which the display of the specified remaining number display area 2081 is switched may be at the start or end of the big hit game with probability change, or at the same timing as the stop display of the big hit symbol with probability change. It may be in a definite display.

  In addition, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46B, a princess character that appears when the specified remaining number of times (remaining limiter number) is MAX display is displayed.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of effects in stages.

  The state shown in FIG. 47A is a limiter clear state and is in a non-hit game state. In addition, there are three suspensions of the ordinary figure, and the symbol fluctuation display of the ordinary figure and the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure are stopped and displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), one hold of the usual figure is consumed, and the usual symbol variation display is started. In the normal map, the determination display of the normal pattern is started, and the normal pattern decoration display 2084 is also displayed as the fourth symbol indicating that the normal pattern is changing. It is functioning.

  The state shown in FIG. 47 (c) is a state in which the normal symbol variation display is finished and the normal symbol hit is stopped, and a white circle representing the normal symbol is displayed in the hit / fail judgment result notification region 2084 for the normal symbol. The icon is displayed. As a result, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened, and the game ball enters the special figure starting port 230.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (d), the special symbol variation display is started, and in the special symbol success / failure determination result notification area 2085, the special symbol decorative symbol variation display has been started. The result notification area 2085 also functions as a fourth symbol indicating that the special symbol is being displayed.

  It should be noted that a predetermined display is performed at each timing such as start or stop of normal map change, start of opening or opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252, winning at a start opening or a winning opening (including an attacha), etc. It may be. In addition, since it can be determined whether or not the variation time is long when the game ball enters the special figure starting port 230, an effect may be performed at the time of starting the symbol fluctuation of the special figure or immediately after the start. For example, an effect may be performed with sound, a lamp, a decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal display), etc., before “later 120 minutes” to be described later is displayed.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 47 in stages.

In the special symbol variation display started in FIG. 47 (d), a specific symbol (here, a loss B which is a specific loss symbol) is stopped and displayed. For this reason, the symbol variation time becomes the first variation time. Immediately below the specified remaining number display area 2081 in the decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure fluctuation time display area 2089 representing information related to the fluctuation time of the special figure is provided, and the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. The time display area 2089 displays “120 remaining minutes” related to the remaining fluctuation time. The “remaining 120 minutes” is a display indicating that the remaining time of the symbol variation display of the special figure is 120 seconds. In the special figure fluctuation time display area 2089, an accurate remaining fluctuation time may be displayed, or a fake fluctuation time may be displayed. For example, information representing a longer time than the actual remaining fluctuation time may be displayed, or information representing a shorter time may be displayed. Also, the display subtraction timing related to the remaining fluctuation time may be a timing different from 1 second (for example, a longer timing or a shorter timing), and even if the subtraction timing is advanced or delayed. Good. For example, in the example of subtracting every 0.9 seconds, when 100 is subtracted on the display, since only 90 seconds have actually elapsed, the remaining 10 seconds are added to an additional notification (addition display) described later. Can be turned. Since this 10 seconds corresponds to “11.11...” On the display, the fraction can be used to absorb display switching timing and the like. When the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, information regarding the variation time may always be displayed, or only when it is the first variation time. In addition, when displaying only when it is the first variation time, even if it is the second variation time, it may be displayed as a false display.

  Further, the display mode of the MAX display in the specified remaining number display area 2081 is different from that before the start of the special symbol variation display by the first variation time. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the MAX display is not switched, that is, the display is not switched to the “remaining 10 times” display.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (e), an effect display is added instead of the pose of the princess character appearing in the MAX display. That is, a large aura image M is shown behind the princess character.

  It should be noted that the display timing of “120 remaining ticks” and the display timing of the aura image M may coincide with each other, or even if the display timing of “120 remaining ticks” is first and the display timing of the aura image M is later. Alternatively, on the contrary, the display timing of the aura image M may be first and the display timing of “120 remaining minutes” may be later. The remaining time switching display timing may be every “1”, every “10”, or a combination thereof. Further, instead of the aura image M, the background display or the like may be changed. For example, a red background may be blinked and an alert sound may be output.

  In the special symbol variation time display area 2089 shown in FIG. 48 (f), “remaining 10 ticks” indicating that the remaining time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is 10 seconds is displayed. In addition, the aura image M which was large at the time of “120 remaining minutes” is reduced in accordance with the remaining time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (g), the characters “+60 ticks” are displayed so as to cover the princess character. This is an extra notification that may be displayed when the display of the special figure fluctuation time display area 2089 reaches a predetermined remaining time. Here, “+60 ticks” is to notify that the remaining time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol has been added for 60 seconds. The effect by the additional notification is an effect that, when the symbol variation starts, a special variable variation time display area 2089 is displayed that indicates a variation time shorter than the actual variation time, and is added after the remaining time is reduced. Alternatively, it may be a fake effect that makes it appear as if the remaining time is added if the subtraction timing is advanced as described above and the remaining time decreases.

  In addition, you may perform the effect (for example, "-10 ticks") to subtract instead of the effect to add. Further, in the case where one of the effect to be subtracted and the effect to be added is performed, the subtraction value is preferably smaller than the addition value. Furthermore, it may be performed together with the output of sound effects.

  In the special symbol variation time display area 2089 shown in FIG. 48 (h), “remaining 70 ticks” indicating that the remaining time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is 70 seconds is displayed. That is, it is displayed that 60 seconds are added to the remaining 10 seconds. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (h), the large aura image M is displayed again behind the princess character.

  49 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 48 in stages.

  The state shown in FIG. 49 (i) is a state in which the display of the special figure change time display area 2089 has reached the predetermined remaining time again, and three question marks are displayed side by side in the special figure change time display area 2089. In addition, a display indicating that the remaining time of the symbol variation display of the special figure is unknown (hereinafter referred to as a question display) is made. Note that, in the special symbol success / failure determination result notification area 2085 shown in FIG. 49 (i), the special symbol variation display is still continued, and the player has not finished the special symbol variation display. You can see that clearly. Here, an additional notification may be performed again.

  Eventually, the variation time of the symbol variation display of the special figure started in FIG. 47 (d) is 300 seconds, and the result of the validity decision is displayed in the special decision determination result notification area 2085 shown in FIG. 49 (j). “-” Indicating that it was lost is displayed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure is finished.

  However, the question display is still performed in the special figure change time display area 2089 shown in FIG. In this example, even if the special symbol variation display by the first variation time is completed, the question display is continuously performed until the big hit game is started. Note that the question display may be turned off simultaneously with the end of the special symbol variation display according to the first variation time. A large aura image M is also displayed behind the princess character, but this aura image M may be erased simultaneously with the end of the special symbol variation display by the first variation time.

  In the state shown in FIG. 49 (k), the normal symbol variation display is started again, and the normal symbol variation display is started in the normal symbol success / failure determination result notification region 2084. In addition, the special symbol design fluctuation display is not performed. In addition, the question display is continued in the special figure change time display area 2089.

  After that, when the special symbol variation display is started again and the specific symbol (here, the specific loss symbol B) is displayed again, that is, the variation time is the first. In the case of the change time, “remaining XX mark” may be performed in the special figure change time display area 2089 instead of the question display. Alternatively, an additional notification such as “+ XXX” may be performed on the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or a display such as “Restoration” may be performed.

  Thereafter, the special symbol variation display of the special figure is started again, the big hit symbol with probability variation is stopped and displayed, and in the state shown in FIG. 49 (l), the big hit game is started. In the special figure determination result notification area 2085 shown in FIG. 49 (l), a number “7” representing the big hit A with probability change is displayed, and “medium big hit” is displayed in the status display area 2088. Has been. In the specified remaining number display area 2081, the display is switched from the MAX display to the “remaining 10 times” display. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a Tono-like character holding a heel in both hands is displayed. Furthermore, the special figure change time display area 2089 that has been displayed with the question so far has disappeared, and the question display has ended.

  At the same time or after the start of the special symbol display, the question display is displayed, and the special symbol stop display is displayed. In addition, the next special symbol display is started without displaying the question. Such a configuration may be used, or a configuration in which a question display is always performed may be used.

  In the above description, whether or not to shift to the probability change state after the big hit game is finished, that is, whether or not the probability change is attached, is determined by the determination of the stop symbol of the special figure (type of the hit symbol). In other words, a jackpot symbol with probability variation (special illustrations AP shown in FIG. 17A) and a jackpot symbol without probability variation (special symbols QT shown in FIG. 17A) are prepared, When a special figure is decided by lottery based on a random number for special figure determination, whether or not to shift to the probable state after the big hit game is decided depending on the presence or absence of the probability change associated with each special figure .

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of determining whether or not there is a probability change separately from the determination of the stop symbol of the special figure.

  FIG. 50A is a diagram showing the allocation of the 2R short-cut big hit symbol when the limiter is not reached, and FIG. 50B is a diagram showing the allocation of the 2R short-cut big hit symbol when the limiter is reached. In this example, a jackpot symbol 1 with 2R time shortening and a jackpot symbol 2 with 2R time shortening are prepared as the jackpot symbol with 2R time shortening.

  “Probability change” in the table indicates whether or not to shift to the probability change state after the big hit game, and the circle mark indicates that the probability change state (with probability change), and the cross mark does not shift to the probability change state. (No change in probability). The determination as to whether or not there is a probability change is performed separately from the symbol determination by lottery based on the value of a random number for probability change determination (possible range is 401 from 0 to 400). Here, the probability of winning with certainty is 95%, and the probability of not having certainty is 5%. This probability variation determining random number can be said to be a random number that makes sense before reaching the limiter. In FIG. 50A, whether or not certain probability variation is to be given is determined by the probability variation determining random number.

  The distribution shown in FIG. 50A is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (first game state), a special figure low probability general figure high probability state (second game state), or a special figure low probability common figure. In the low probability state (third gaming state) shown in FIG. The meaning of the special figure low probability and special figure high probability in the table is that the game state before the big hit game was in a special figure low probability state (non-probability variation state) or a special figure high probability state (probability variation state). The meaning of timeless operation and timeless operation indicates whether the gaming state before the big hit game was timeless non-operation (non-electric support state) or time-short operation (electric support state) . In this example, if it is in the special figure high probability state (probability variation state), it is always in the short-time operation (electric support state). In the column for time (non-electric support state), a symbol “−” indicating that such a state does not exist is written.

  Special Figure High Probability Normal Figure High Probability State (First Game State), Special Figure Low Probability Normal Figure High Probability State (Second Game State), or Special Figure Low Probability Normal Figure Low Probability State (Third Game State) However, if you win the transition to the probable change state, after the big hit symbol with 2R time reduction is stopped and the big hit game is played, the short time state (electric support state) may be until the next big hit It is indicated by a mark.

  Also, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (first gaming state), a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state (second gaming state), or a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state (third Even if it is in the gaming state), if the winning game is not selected for the transition to the probable change state, after the big hit symbol with 2R time is stopped and the big hit game is played, the time is shortened while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times. A state (electric support state) is indicated by a circle and (100).

  The determination of the symbol in this example is performed by lottery based on the value of the random number for symbol determination (possible range is 400 of 0 to 399). The random number range of the jackpot symbol 1 with the 2R time shortening is 0 to 259, and the random number range of the jackpot symbol 2 with the 2R time shortening is 260 to 399. It can be said that this symbol determining random number is a random number that makes sense when reaching the limiter. In FIG. 50A before reaching the limiter, the distribution is substantially determined by the probability variation determining random number. That is, the combination of 160400, which is obtained by multiplying “401”, which is a range that can be taken by the random number for determining probability variation, and “400”, which is the range that can be taken by the random number for design determination, is four of patterns 1 to 4 shown in FIG. Become a pattern.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 50B at the time of reaching the limiter, it is determined whether or not to provide the electric support by the design determining random number. That is, in this example, the probability change is determined by a dedicated random number, and the power support is determined by the symbol type. In other words, the presence / absence of electric support is associated with the stop symbol. On the other hand, the provision of power support may be determined by a dedicated random number, and the provision of probability variation may be determined by the symbol type. In any case, by not associating both with the stop symbol, but associating only one with the stop symbol and determining whether the other is given or not by lottery with a dedicated random number, the type of stop symbol is reduced and the amount of data Can be suppressed.

  The distribution shown in FIG. 50 (b) is a distribution in the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (first game state), and the probability change is not given, and the big hit symbol 1 with 2R time shortening is stopped and the big hit game is displayed. After the symbol is displayed, while the symbol variation display is performed 100 times, a short time state (electric support state) is indicated by a circle and (100), and the 2R short time jackpot symbol 2 is stopped and displayed. After the big hit game is played, it is indicated by a cross mark that it does not shift to the short time state (electric support state).

  Comparing FIG. 50 (a) and FIG. 50 (b), the ratio (distribution ratio) of symbols that are stopped and displayed is the same. That is, in FIG. 50B when the limiter is reached, the ratio at which the 2R short cut big hit symbol 1 is stopped and the ratio at which the 2R short cut big hit symbol 2 is stopped is 260: 140 = 26: 14. On the other hand, in FIG. 50 (a) before reaching the limiter, in the case of the probability change, the ratio that the 2R time-shortening big hit symbol 1 is stopped and displayed and the ratio that the 2R time-shortening big hit symbol 2 is stopped and displayed are 90060: 53340 = When the probability is 26:14 and there is no certain change, the ratio at which the 2R time-shortening jackpot symbol 1 is stopped and the ratio at which the 2R time-shortening jackpot symbol 2 is stopped is 5200: 2800 = 26: 14. This is the same as 50 (b). In this way, even if the probability change is determined by a dedicated random number, and the power support is determined by the symbol type, the ratio of the symbols to be stopped (assignment rate) is the same.

  According to the pachinko machine explained above, by making the fluctuation time of the loss longer than the fluctuation time of the hit, it will hit when the symbol stops by a certain time (conversely, it will be lost if it exceeds a certain time) There are cases where it is possible to provide special interests. In addition, there may be a case where the interval of the big hit symbol variation display can be increased. In addition, for example, it is possible to adjust the degree of advantage related to the ordinary figure by adjusting the fluctuation time of the special figure, and it may be possible to entertain by entwining different types of symbol fluctuations closely. Furthermore, in the pachinko machines described above, there are many players who are only interested in the general-purpose electric character 252 and the general-purpose symbol variation display. May be possible. In addition, the number of times the attacker (variable winning opening 234) related to the so-called jackpot game is opened is predetermined, but the opening of the general electric accessory 252 is the passing of a game ball to the general starting winning opening 251, etc. Because of the uncertainties associated with each other, the same profit cannot be obtained even in the same number of seconds, and a scene in which the player's skill can be demonstrated can be provided, resulting in an increase in interest. In addition, if it is difficult for the ball to enter the usual figure starting prize opening 251 or the maximum opening time of the ordinary figure electric accessory 252 is short, it is expected that the holding ball will decrease quickly, but the limiter clear Sometimes, a long symbol variation display is easily selected, and there are cases where it is possible to earn a required ball for the subsequent game. Also, by displaying the number of remaining limiters (specified remaining number display area 2081) and the display regarding the remaining fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time display area 2089), the role more than a mere counter is given to make it interesting and fun. There are cases where you can not. Furthermore, there may be a case where a ball feeling can be given more than the big hit probability. In some cases, it is possible to achieve a feeling of pitching without changing or even changing the jackpot probability.

  In addition, about the game machine in which special figure 2 is advantageous by 1 type 1 type simultaneous change machine, you may lengthen the time of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 at the time of electric support transfer. Moreover, you may lengthen only for a lose symbol. In addition, as a device for making it easier for a game ball to enter the ordinary figure start winning opening 251, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure is shortened, or the time from the stoppage of the ordinary figure until the opening of the ordinary figure starting winning opening 251 is shortened. The opening time of the general figure starting prize opening 251 is lengthened, or the opening time of the general figure starting prize opening 251 is the same, but the opening pattern is changed (for example, in a certain state, the opening for 0.1 seconds is specified 10 times) It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball). In addition, even during the symbol fluctuation display that stops and displays a specific lose symbol that allows the player to earn a ball, the effects such as the ramp and voice are the same as usual, and it is less plain than during a big hit game. is there. In addition, the shortest fluctuation time per special figure is shorter than the one-time opening time of the attacker, and the shortest fluctuation time of the special figure in a certain state may be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the normal figure in a normal state. Further, a two-dimensional code representing an address on the Internet to which game information or a privilege is given may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 using a long variation time.

In the above description, “a determination unit that can execute at least determination (eg, the CPU 304 of the main controller 300);
Display means (for example, special figure display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A selection means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of selecting at least a symbol variation time from among a plurality of symbol variation times;
Control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least starting the first gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state);
A game machine equipped with
The control means starts at least the first gaming state after a symbol form corresponding to a first success / failure determination result (for example, a big success / failure determination result) is stopped and displayed. Is possible,
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation times is a first symbol variation time,
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation times is a second symbol variation time,
The display means is capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display,
The display means is capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display,
At least a part of the first symbol variation display is a stop display of the first symbol aspect,
At least a part of the second symbol variation display is a stop display of the second symbol aspect,
The first symbol aspect is a symbol aspect (for example, jackpot A) corresponding to the first success / failure determination result,
The second symbol aspect is a symbol aspect (for example, loss B) corresponding to the second success / failure determination result,
The second determination result is different from the first determination result,
The first symbol variation display is executed over the first symbol variation time,
The second symbol variation display is executed over the second symbol variation time,
The first symbol variation time is the longest symbol variation time (for example, 60 seconds) corresponding to the first success / failure determination result (for example, the jackpot success / failure determination result),
The second symbol variation time is the longest symbol variation time (for example, 300 seconds) corresponding to the second success / failure determination result (for example, the failure determination result).
The second symbol variation time is a time longer than the first symbol variation time.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  The first symbol variation time is the longest symbol variation time among the symbol variation times that can be selected when the result of the success / failure determination is the first success / failure determination result, and the second symbol variation time. The variation time is the longest symbol variation time among the symbol variation times that can be selected when the result of the success / failure determination is the second success / failure determination result. The symbol variation time that can be selected here is one or a plurality of symbol variation times.

In addition, “the second result determination result is a loss,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the success / failure determination means is capable of at least executing the determination of success / failure when a determination result is true / failure.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the display means can execute at least the symbol variation display when the symbol variation display execution condition is satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the symbol variation time corresponding to the first success / failure determination result among the plurality of symbol variation times is only one,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “There are a plurality of symbol variation times corresponding to the first success / failure determination result among the plurality of symbol variation times,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the symbol variation time corresponding to the second determination result among the plurality of symbol variation times is only one,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.
In addition, “there are a plurality of symbol variation times corresponding to the second determination result among the plurality of symbol variation times,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A gaming machine as described above,
At least a part of the first symbol variation display is a “stop display of the first symbol aspect”,
At least a part of the second symbol variation display is a “stop display of the second symbol aspect”.
A game stand characterized by that.

  That is, the display means performs at least a stop display of the first symbol mode at the end of the first symbol variation display, and the display means displays the first symbol variation display at the end of the second symbol variation display. The stop display of the second symbol aspect is performed at least. You can also see.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The display means performs symbol stop of the first symbol mode over a first symbol stop period after at least displaying the first symbol mode stop at the end of the first symbol variation display. Display at least,
The display means stops the symbol of the second symbol aspect for a second symbol suspension period after at least the second symbol aspect is stopped at the end of the second symbol variation display. Display at least,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 2,
The display means performs at least the symbol stop display of the first symbol aspect over the first symbol stop period after the first symbol variation display,
The display means performs at least the symbol stop display of the second symbol aspect over the second symbol stop period after the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine according to appendix 2 or 3,
The stop indication is at least one of shaking fluctuation and fixed stop,
The symbol stop display is the final stop,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of each embodiment described above, each applicable mode, modification, or supplementary note, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, applicable modes, variations, You may apply to an appendix.

  Subsequently, characteristic items of the present invention will be described.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of a count display. FIG. 51 shows how the design 701 and the count display 703 of the effect button 136 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 change with the passage of time. In FIG. 51, time elapses from left to right in the figure. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the components having the same names.

  In each example of FIGS. 51A to 51D, a pattern 701 of the effect button 136, an arrow pattern 702 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, and a count display 703 are shown. The pattern 701 of the effect button 136 alternately displays a state before being pressed (projecting state) and a pressed state (down state) as shown in FIG. May be. That is, at least two pictures (for example, before operation and after operation) may be displayed alternately.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 51 displays the remaining time of the operation valid period in which the press of the effect button 136 is received, and the count display 703 at the start of the operation valid period is shown at the left end of each figure. In the center, a state in which the remaining time of the operation effective period is reduced is shown, and in the right end, a state when the operation effective period ends is shown.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 51A is a bar-type level display that changes continuously and has no outer frame. In the count display 703, at the start of the operation effective period, the level of the count display 703 is full, and the player is notified that the level gradually decreases and the remaining time decreases. As shown at the right end of FIG. 51 (a), when the operation valid period ends, the count display itself disappears.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 51B is also a bar-type level display that changes continuously, but has an outer frame 7031 and, as shown at the right end of FIG. Only the outer frame 7031 is shown.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 51 (c) is a block type level display and changes in units of blocks. An outer frame 7033 is displayed in each block 7032, but when the remaining time decreases and the block 7032 disappears, the outer frame 7033 also disappears. For this reason, as in the example of FIG. 51A, when the operation valid period ends, the count display itself disappears.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 51D is also a block type level display, but changes in units of blocks in the entire outer frame 7031. For this reason, as in the example of FIG. 51B, when the operation valid period ends, only the entire outer frame 7031 is shown.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing another example of the count display. FIG. 52 also shows that the design 701 and the count display 702 of the effect button 136 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 change with the passage of time, and time passes from the left to the right of the figure. To do.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 52A is also a block type level display, but the entire outer frame 7031 is provided with a partition line 7034 for partitioning each block. Even if the remaining time is reduced and the block 7032 disappears, the partition line 7034 remains. For this reason, as shown in the right end of FIG. 52A, when the operation effective period ends, the entire outer frame 7031 and the partition lines 7034 of the respective blocks remain.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 52B is a block type level display having the entire outer frame 7031 and the partition line 7034 as well as the count display 703 shown in FIG. 52A, but does not change in units of blocks. . Therefore, it can be considered that a scale (corresponding to the partition line 7034) is provided in the bar-type level display shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5C, the level decrease may stop temporarily between the scales. Further, as shown in FIG. 4D, when the level reduction stops once between the scales, a line 7035 representing the leading edge of the level may be displayed.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 52 (e) is a continuously changing bar type level display provided with the outer frame 7031 shown in FIG. 51 (b), but once the operation valid period ends, Only the outer frame 7031 is shown, but the outer frame 7031 eventually disappears, and finally, the design 701 of the effect button 136 and the design 702 of the arrow disappear. Note that the outer frame 7031, the design 701 of the effect button 136, and the arrow design 702 may disappear simultaneously, and the design 701 of the production button 136 and the arrow design 702 may disappear before the outer frame 7031.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 52 (f) is also a continuously changing bar type level display provided with an outer frame 7031 shown in FIG. 51 (b). In this example, the color of the bar 7036 is changed. Note that the bar 7036 may blink when the remaining time decreases.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing still another example of count display. 53 also shows that the design 701 and the count display 702 of the effect button 136 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 change with time, and time passes from the left to the right in the figure. To do.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 53A is a continuously changing arc-shaped level display provided with an outer frame 7031. As described above, the count display 703 is not limited to a linear shape such as the bar type shown in FIG. 51B, and may have any shape.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is a graphic type level display provided apart. That is, in FIG. 53 (b), four figures 7037 are arranged at intervals, and as shown at the left end of FIG. 53 (b), all four figures 7037 are displayed at the start of the operation effective period. Is the first color (lights up), but as the remaining time decreases, the graphic 7037 changes to the second color (lights off) one by one, as shown at the right end of FIG. 53 (b). In addition, when the operation valid period ends, all the four figures 7037 are changed to the second color. In the example shown in FIG. 53 (b), the outer frame 7038 of the graphic 7037 continues to be displayed even if it changes to the second color (it seems to be turned off). 7038 itself may disappear.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 53 (c) is an integer display by a countdown method. As shown at the left end of FIG. 53 (c), the number “4” is displayed at the start of the operation effective period. However, as the remaining time decreases, the integer decreases by one, and FIG. 53 (c) As shown at the right end of, when the operation valid period ends, the number “0” is displayed. An integer display by a count-up method may be used. Further, it may be a continuous display using decimal display (for example, “4,000” → “3: 999” → “3: 998”...), For example, display up to the second decimal point. , “4, 00” → “3, 95” → “3, 90”..., Only 0 or 5 may be displayed in the second digit. Alternatively, only 0 may be displayed in the second digit (“4, 00” → “3, 90” → “3, 80”...).

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 53 (d) is a direct display of the remaining time by a digital clock type. As shown at the left end of FIG. 53 (d), when the operation effective period starts, the remaining time of “4:00” representing 4 minutes is displayed, and when the remaining time starts to decrease, the remaining time is continuously displayed. Then, as shown in the right end of FIG. 53 (d), when the operation valid period ends, the remaining time of “0:00” representing 0 minutes is displayed. Note that the display may change when the remaining time is reduced by a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 1 minute). For example, even if “4:00” → “3:30” → “3:00”... Or “4:00” → “3:00” → “2:00”. Good.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of the count display different from the examples described so far. 53 also shows that the design 701 and the count display 702 of the effect button 136 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 change with time, and time passes from the left to the right in the figure. To do.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 54 (a) is a continuous display of remaining time by an analog clock type. The hand 7039 representing the remaining time rotates counterclockwise.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 54 (b) is a combination of the graphic type level display of FIG. 53 (b) and the integer display by the countdown method of FIG. 53 (c).

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 54 (c) is a first modification of the count display 703 shown in FIG. 54 (b), and the integer display temporarily disappears.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 54 (d) is a second modification of the count display 703 shown in FIG. 54 (b). The count display 703 shows a period in which the number of first color graphics 7037 and the number of integer displays are different. This is a display provided.

  As described above, the count display 703 may be a meter display (bar display, circular display), a time display (analog display, digital display), or a figure number display. May be.

  In addition, as scenes for accepting pressing of the effect button 136, for example, button operation effects, mode selection (normal game mode, jackpot mode, mode in probability change), or effect selection (button operation from a plurality of super reach) For example), selection of BGM, etc. (especially during a big hit game), and the like.

  Further, the count display 703 is not limited to the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period in which the press of the effect button 136 is received (display by countdown), and may be display by count up. For example, a display indicating how many remaining displays have changed due to the button operation in the button operation effect, a display of the remaining mission time, and a time until the start of the predetermined effect (for example, displayed every time pseudo continuous variation) Display, display of time after a specific jackpot, display of time in production, display of remaining time of input and output, display of time until start of demonstration production, ECO mode, and timing for launching game ball Examples include display of time, remaining change time, error notification remaining time, and time until return (loading). In addition, the number of power support times and the number of probability changes, the number of fluctuations until the mode transition, the display of the counter value related to the expectation of the internal state, the counter related to the expectation of the fluctuation (continuous notice, countdown notice) Etc.), the display of the counter value related to the expectation level after hitting, the display of the number of hit hits (one image per hit, one special image for 10 hits), and acquisition Display of the number of winning balls (the number of balls at the time of hitting or the number of accumulated balls), the number of enemy characters that have been destroyed, the number of friendly characters that have appeared, the number of effects (missions) that have been displayed, or the remaining number Display, display of the value of the remaining counter until level up, display of the number of entered balls, display of the number of remaining winning balls, display of the number of ARTs and the number of navigations may be used.

  FIG. 55A to FIG. 55C are diagrams showing specific examples of the count display shown in FIG. These figures also show how the design 701 and the count display 702 of the effect button 136 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 change over time. In these figures, time elapses from the top to the bottom of the figures.

In the example shown in FIG. 55A, after the first color figure 7037 becomes one, the first color figure 7037 is increased to four, and then the first color figure 7037 is one. Each time it changes to the second color. This example is an example in which the remaining time is added in the middle. In the example shown in FIG. 55 (b), after the figure 7037 of the first color becomes one, the figure 7037 and the outer frame 7038 are once. It disappears (all disappears), and then the first color figure 7037 is redisplayed in a state where it is increased to four. This example is also an example in which the remaining time is added on the way. When the number of the first color graphics 7037 increases to four, the second sub-control unit 500 performs the overwriting process on the four first color graphics 7037 and the outer frame 7038 for visual processing. The four first color graphics 7037 and the outer frame 7038 appear to be overwritten. A value is reset (overwritten) in a counter circuit described later.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55C, after the first color graphic 7037 remains, the outer frame 7038 of the second color graphic 7037 disappears, and then the first color graphic 7037 is changed. Increase to 4. This example is also an example in which the remaining time is added on the way. When the first color figure 7037 is increased to four, the drawing process of the second sub-control unit 500 overwrites the three first color figures 7037 and the outer frame 7038. The three first color graphics 7037 and the outer frame 7038 appear to be overwritten. That is, only necessary portions are overwritten. By doing this, flicker may be suppressed rather than overwriting everything.

  FIG. 55 (d) shows a level display that changes in units of blocks in the entire outer frame 7031, but a two-stage display of the front and back. For example, if there are 10 blocks each for the front level display and the back level display, the display shown at the top of FIG. 55 (d) indicates that both the front level display and the back level display are full. Indicates that the remaining time is 20. The second display from the top is that the front level display (dark color level display) is reduced by 5 blocks, the back level display (light color level display) is full, and the remaining time is 15. Indicates. The third display from the top indicates that all the level displays in the foreground disappear, the back level display (light color level display) is full, and the remaining time is 10. The second display from the bottom indicates that the level display in the foreground is completely lost, the level display at the back (light color level display) is reduced by 5 blocks, and the remaining time is 5. The display shown at the bottom indicates that all the level display in the foreground disappears, the level display in the back disappears, and the remaining time is zero.

  In the case of meter display, the count display 703 can be increased or decreased seamlessly (stepwise) or stepwise (increase / decrease at an appropriate timing). Further, in the case of time display, if it is analog, it may be an increase or decrease neglecting the scale, or an increase or decrease according to the scale. Further, in the case of displaying the number of figures, it may be an increase / decrease by a figure unit or a partial increase / decrease with respect to one figure.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the count display period.

  The first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, or the main control unit 300 is provided with a counter circuit (corresponding to an example of a counting unit) that counts a count value. This counter circuit corresponds to the counter timers 412 and 312 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 56A is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the count period of the counter circuit and the display period of the count display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Time passes from the left to the lower right of the figure (hereinafter the same).

  In FIG. 56 (a), as a counting period by the counter circuit, an internally counting period (hereinafter the same) is shown in the upper part. Moreover, the display period of the count display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown below the figure (a). In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a), the start timing of the display period of the count display (corresponding to the period of effect display) is delayed from the timing of starting the count internally. The end timing coincides with the timing at which the count ends internally. In this example, there is a case where an operation valid period, sometimes referred to as a back button or the like, is not displayed, but reacts when operated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 56 (b), the display period of the count display is generally delayed from the period of counting internally. That is, the start timing of the display period of the count display is delayed from the timing at which the count is internally started, and the end timing of the display period of the count display is also delayed from the timing at which the count is internally ended.

  The start timing of the display period of the count display may coincide with the timing of starting the count internally, and the end timing of the display period of the count display may also coincide with the timing of internally finishing the count. Alternatively, when it is known in advance that the count is to be started internally, the start timing of the display period of the count display may be earlier than the timing at which the count is started internally. In addition, when it is known in advance that the count is to be ended internally, the end timing of the display period of the count display may be earlier than the timing at which the count is internally ended.

  FIG. 56C to FIG. 56F are diagrams showing the relationship between the display period of the first count display and the display period of the count display after overwriting. The overwriting here is a resetting of values to the counter circuit, which may be added (for example, a set of 3 → 5 values) or added (for example, a set of 0 → 5 values). It may be new (for example, a set of 5 values).

  In the relationship shown in FIG. 56C, the display period of the first count display (first count display period) and the display period of the count display after overwriting (second count display period) are continuous. Further, the period length of the first count display period and the period length of the second count display period are the same.

  In the relationship shown in FIG. 56 (d), there is a slight gap between the first count display period and the second count display period. For example, a case where the mission effect is once failed and then revived after a short time corresponds to this relationship. In addition, when it revives, it can be regarded as addition, and when it newly starts, it can be regarded as new.

  In the relationship shown in FIG. 56 (e), as in the relationship shown in FIG. 56 (c), the first count display period and the second count display period are continuous. The period length of the second count display period is longer than the period length of the period. Note that the period length of the second count display period may be shorter than the period length of the first count display period. The same can be said for the period length in the relationship shown in FIG.

  In the relationship shown in FIG. 56 (f), the first count display period and the display period of the count display after the first overwriting (second count display period) are continuous, the second count display period, The display period of the count display after the second overwriting (third count display period) is also continuous. Thus, addition, addition, and new may be performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a relationship different from the relationship shown in FIG.

  FIG. 57A is a diagram showing a relationship when two types of count displays are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. The counter circuits represented by the two types of count displays may be different counter circuits or the same counter circuit. In the case of the same counter circuit, the examples shown in FIGS. 54 (b) to (d) apply as an example. Also, two types of count display may be performed for one effect. One of the two types of count displays may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (main display means), and the other may be displayed on the sub display means. Furthermore, the count display displayed simultaneously may be three or more types.

  In the example shown in FIG. 57, one count display (first count display period and second count display period) precedes the other count display (third count display period and fourth count display period). Starts and ends first. Note that one count display and the other count display may be started at the same time and may end simultaneously, or one count display may be started after the other count display and ended later. In addition, the display period length of one count display and the display period length of the other count display may be the same or different, and in this case, the end timing is various.

  In the example shown in FIG. 57, the third count display period overlaps a part of the first count display period and a part of the second count display period. And a part of the fourth count display period overlap. There are various ways of overlapping.

  FIG. 57B is a diagram showing a relationship in which the count display and other effects are executed in an overlapping manner. Another effect may be an effect in which a sound effect is output or an effect in which an effect image is displayed. The other effects shown in FIG. 57 (b) are started simultaneously with the start of the count display, but are ended in the middle of the second count display period. The other effects may end at the same time as the count display ends, or may be effects that are executed only at the beginning or end of each count display period. Furthermore, the performance may be performed only during a certain period (including all periods) within the first count display period, and only during a certain period (including all periods) within the second count display period. It may be an effect executed.

  FIG. 57 (c) is a diagram showing a relationship when there are a plurality of other effects. In this example, the other first effects and the other second effects are continuously performed. In this example, even if the first count display period ends and the second count display period starts, the other first effects continue, and even if the second count display period ends, The other second production continues. There may be three or more other effects.

  FIG. 57 (d) is a diagram showing a relationship in which another first effect and another second effect are performed in a partially overlapping manner. As described above, there are various combinations of one or more types of count display and one or more types of other effects.

  FIG. 58A is a diagram for explaining initial value setting and resetting in the count circuit.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 58 (a), when an initial value (here, a value representing 6) is set in the counter circuit, the count display 703 is displayed in 6 levels, and the count value of the counter circuit is decremented by 1. Then, the count display 703 is reduced by 1 level (here, it becomes 5 level display). Let Ta be the time from the initial value set in the counter circuit to 1 subtraction.

  When the count value of the counter circuit is subtracted to a value representing 2, the value representing 6 is reset (overwritten) in the counter circuit, and when the count value of the counter circuit is decremented by 1, the count display 703 displays 1 The level is reduced (here, 5 levels are displayed). Let Tb be the time from resetting to 1 subtraction in the counter circuit. Note that when the count value of the counter circuit is subtracted to a value representing 2, the value representing 4 may be added while keeping the count value as it is instead of overwriting.

  The case where the counter circuit is reset includes, for example, a case where the mission effect is temporarily failed and then restored after a short time. In the case of revival, since the revival effect is executed, even if the value is reset in the counter circuit, the counter circuit may not be driven immediately and may wait for the revival effect to end. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 58A, Tb may take longer than Ta. In addition, the revival effect tends to be longer than the opening effect when the initial value is set. For this reason as well, Tb tends to be longer in time than Ta.

  The time from subtracting 1 to subtracting 1 is the same between initial value setting and resetting, and is the same.

  FIG. 58B is a diagram illustrating an example in which a false count display is performed.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 58B, an initial value (a value representing 10 here) is set in the counter circuit (internal information is 10). However, the count display 703 only displays 6 levels. When the count value of the counter circuit is decremented by 1 (internal information is 9), the count display 703 is decremented by 1 level (here, it becomes a 5-level display).

  When the count value of the counter circuit is subtracted to a value representing 6 (internal information is 6), the count display 703 displays, for example, two levels. Here, the count value of the counter circuit is left as it is (internal information is 6), and the count display 703 is returned to the 6-level display. By doing this, it appears that the addition has been performed. When the count value of the counter circuit is changed from a value representing 6 to a value representing 5, the count display 703 is changed to a 5-level display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 58 (b), a false count display 703 is first performed, and the value of the internal information is returned halfway, and the display is switched to the true count display 703. That is, an example of the second control is executed.

  FIG. 58C is a table summarizing the types of button operation effects.

  In this embodiment, nine types of effects are facilitated as button operation effects. The button operation effect prompts a button operation (in this case, the press of the effect button 136) within an operation valid period for accepting the button operation, and when a success condition is satisfied, a successful effect (for example, a super reach effect or a predetermined character) Appearance, mission clear, etc.).

  The first button operation effect to the third button operation effect do not add (add) the operation effective period, and the fourth button operation effect to the ninth button operation effect add (add) the operation effective period. Done. That is, the first button operation effect to the third button operation effect has only the first count display period, but the fourth button operation effect to the ninth button operation effect has the first count display period. A second count display period may be added.

  “Success” in the “Summary” shown in FIG. 58 (c) means that an effect is started regardless of the presence or absence of a button operation within the operation effective period. That is, the effect is started even if the button operation is not performed within the operation effective period. The production start condition here is a requirement that is satisfied when the button operation is performed within the operation effective period, and a condition that is satisfied when the operation effective period elapses even if the button operation is not performed within the operation effective period. .

  “Success is possible” shown in FIG. 58 (c) means that if the button operation is performed within the operation effective period, the effect is started. The effect start condition here is a requirement that is satisfied when a button operation is performed within the operation effective period.

  The “failure” shown in FIG. 58 (c) means that the production is not started regardless of whether or not the button is operated within the operation valid period. Here, the production start condition does not have the condition itself, and is always not satisfied.

  In addition, in the seventh button operation effect to the ninth button operation effect, if the button operation is performed within the first count display period, the effect is started, and the second count display period is not started.

  Next, effects in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of a button operation effect.

  In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (a), an ordinary figure hold display area 2801 is prepared. In this usual figure hold display area 2801, the oldest ones are displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start information is stored in the usual figure hold storage unit (winning order).

  In addition, a digestion hold display area 2802 is provided at the left end of the effect display area 208d, in which a hold on which the normal symbol variation display is started, that is, a hold display representing the digested hold is shifted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (a), “decoration 6”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the usual decorative patterns of losing, is stopped and displayed. In this decorative symbol display device 208, three hold icons (hereinafter referred to as hold display) 291 to 293 representing the number of holds in the normal map are shown. Any hold display is a default display mode (no pattern and one gray color).

  In FIG. 59 (b), the normal symbol fluctuation display based on the hold 1 indicated by the first hold indication 291 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Has been started. Further, a state in which the first hold display 291 is shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2802 is shown. Note that a second hold display 292 shown in FIG. 59 (a) is displayed at the position where the first hold display 291 shown in FIG. 59 (a) was displayed. In the hold display (changed icon 290) shifted and displayed in the digest hold display area 2802, the display form changes to the notice display form of the character's face, and a notice effect is performed. The notice effect in the digestion hold display area 2802 is a kind of prefetch notice, but the notice target is the currently displayed symbol variation display (the symbol variation display). Note that the time during which the hold display is displayed in the digest hold display area 2802 is several seconds after the start of the symbol variation display, but it may be displayed before the symbol variation display ends or until the symbol variation display ends.

  The decorative symbol variation display started in FIG. 59 (b) develops into a super reach effect as shown in FIG. 59 (c). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (c), the letters “SP reach” are displayed as the start screen for the super reach effect. When the super reach production is started, the decorative symbol variation display moves to the right corner and is displayed in a small size, and the hold display and digestion hold display area 2802 that have been displayed so far are not visible.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the button operation effect is started in the super reach effect. In this button operation effect, a pattern 701 of the effect button 136, an arrow pattern 702 prompting the user to press the effect button 136, and the count display 703 described with reference to FIG. . In addition, a character display such as “Perform repeatedly” is added to the arrow pattern 702. The count display 703 shown in FIG. 59 (d) is a 10-level display. Further, a meter display 2803 whose level changes in accordance with a button operation (the number of operations in this case) appears at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The meter display 2803 shown in FIG. 59 (d) is a 0 level display (maximum 10 levels). This meter display 2803 is a kind of count display, and displays information related to the value of an internal counter circuit (a circuit that counts the number of times the effect button 136 is actually pressed). The meter display 2803 may be a level display according to the effect program regardless of the value of the counter circuit. In this example, the meter display 2803 appears at the same time as the count display 703, but may appear before the count display 703.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (e), the remaining period of the operation effective period is reduced, and the count display 703 is reduced to the two-level display, while the depressing operation of the effect button 136 is repeatedly performed. A display 2803 is a six-level display. The meter display 2803 may appear after the effect button 136 actually starts to be pressed.

  The count display 703 shown in FIG. 59 (f) is 0 level display, and the meter display 2803 is 7 level display. Here, the first count display period ends. In this example, the number of levels in the count display 703 is a true level number representing the value of the internal counter circuit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 59, even if the first count display period ends, the second count display period is not added (added), and as shown in FIG. 702, the character display such as “Let's hit repeatedly”, and the count display 703 are all disappeared, and only the meter display 2803 (here, the 7-level meter display 2803) that has not reached the 10th level remains. The word “sorry” is displayed. This example corresponds to an example of the first button operation effect shown in FIG. 58 (c), and the final number of levels on the meter display 2803 is a count circuit that counts the number of times the effect button 136 is actually pressed. The number of false levels may be different from the value, or a value representing the number of presses that cannot be pressed in the first count display period may be set to a value of 10 levels. Thus, the button operation effect ends, and the super reach effect ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 59 (h), “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of the usual decorative patterns of losing, is stopped and displayed. Note that the display of the hold display and the digest hold display area 2802 has been resumed.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a successful button operation effect, and FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the difference from the failure example shown in FIG. 59 will be mainly described.

  Also in this example, as shown in FIG. 60D, the button operation effect is started in the super reach effect. In this button operation effect, a character pattern 704 also appears. Then, when pressing of the effect button 136 is started or when the meter display 2803 reaches a predetermined level, an aura of light 705 is added behind the character pattern 704 (see FIG. 60E). If the push operation of the effect button 136 is further continued and the meter display 2803 level is increased, the light aura 705 is increased, and as shown in FIG. 60 (f), a part of the aura 705 is a part of the count display 703. It grows up to hide. The count display 703 shown in FIG. 60 (f) becomes 0 level display, and the first count display period ends. At the timing when the first count display period ends, the meter display 2803 does not reach the 10th level (here, 7th level), and the successful performance is not started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60, when the first count display period ends, the second count display period is added (added). As shown in FIG. 60 (g), the design 701 of the effect button 136 and the design 702 of the arrow. The character display such as “Let's hit repeatedly” and the count display 703 are all temporarily turned off, and the meter display 2803 and the character pattern 704 with the light aura 705 are left. Characters are displayed. Note that the design button 701 of the effect button 136, the arrow design 702, the character display such as “Let's hit repeatedly”, and the count display 703 are all once turned off, but continue to be displayed without erasing any one or more. Also good.

  Subsequently, the second count display period is started, and as shown in FIG. 60 (h), the design button 701 of the effect button 136, the arrow design 702, the character display such as “Let's hit repeatedly”, and the count display 703 are displayed again. Is done. The count display 703 displayed again here is a 7-level display. In FIG. 8F, the count display 703 is 0 level display, but before the 0 level display, the second count display period is added (added) and overwritten on the count display 703. It may be.

  Here, in the count display 703 in FIG. 60D, the true count value of the internal counter circuit is displayed, but in the count display 703 in FIG. 60H, the true count value of the internal counter circuit is displayed. A false count value different from that is displayed. That is, an example of the first control is executed. For example, in the figure (h), 5 seconds was added internally as the second count display period, but in the count display 703 in FIG. 60 (h), 7-level display corresponding to 7 seconds is performed, Produce that the player has gained some advantage. In addition, the countdown in the count display 703 in FIG. 60 (h) is counted down at a speed of less than 1 second (a speed at which 7 level is changed to 0 level in 5 seconds). Also, the count display 703 in FIG. 60 (h) is displayed in three levels corresponding to 3 seconds, and the countdown speed is counted down at a speed of 1 second or more (speed at which 3 levels are turned to 0 level in 5 seconds). You may do it.

  The meter display 2803 shown in FIG. 61 (i) reaches the 9th level, the light aura 705 becomes large, and a part of the count display 703 which advances the countdown is hidden by a part of the light aura 705.

  The meter display 2803 shown in FIG. 61 (j) reaches the 10th level (success level), the light aura 705 becomes larger and the count display 703 whose countdown progresses is more extensive than that in FIG. 61 (i). Hidden by the aura 705, the light aura 705 reaches the design 701 of the effect button 136 and the design 702 of the arrow. That is, in the added second count display period, the count display 703 is hidden in a wider area by the effect image, and the count display 703 is less visible than the first count display period. This example corresponds to an example of the fifth button operation effect or the sixth button operation effect shown in FIG. 58C, and the success condition is satisfied within the second count display period (here, the meter display 2803 is displayed). On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 61 (k), a family crest effect image 711 is displayed large as a success effect. As a successful effect, instead of displaying the effect image 711, an effect movable body (for example, a family crest movable body) may be operated. Eventually, the successful production will end, and the super reach production will also end.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (l), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the ornaments of the usual illustrations, is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208 that has finished the super reach production. Stop is displayed. Here again, the display of the hold display and the digest hold display area 2802 is resumed.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example corresponding to an example of the second button operation effect or the third button operation effect shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 will be mainly described.

  Also in this example, as shown in FIG. 62D, the button operation effect is started in the super reach effect, but the character pattern 704 does not appear. While the count display 703 shown in FIG. 62 (e) is reduced to a two-level display, the meter display 2803 is a six-level display and has not yet achieved success, but as shown in FIG. 62 (f), the count display 703 At the stage where the display 703 is at the remaining one level, the meter display 2803 reaches 10 levels (success level), and the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. Has been. Here, as a successful effect, the effect movable body (for example, a family crest movable body) may be operated instead of the display of the effect image 711.

  Thus, in this example, the second count display period is not added, and the success condition is satisfied within the first count display period (the meter display 2803 reaches 10 levels (success level)), and the success effect is achieved. Is started.

  FIG. 63 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIG. 62 will be mainly described.

  In this example, when the button operation effect is started, the character design 704 appears, and when the press of the effect button 136 is started, an aura of light 705 is added behind the character design 704 (FIG. 63). (See (e)). If the push operation of the effect button 136 is further continued and the meter display 2803 level is increased, the light aura 705 increases, and the light aura 705 reaches the pattern 701 of the effect button 136 and the image 702 of the arrow, and the count display 703 Part is obscured by part of the light aura 705. As a result, the count display 703 is difficult to see.

  Even in this modified example, the second count display period is not added, and as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the success condition is satisfied within the first count display period (the meter display 2803 becomes 10 levels (success level)). ) And a successful production is started as shown in FIG. 63 (g).

  FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating two examples as an additional display example of the remaining period in the button operation effect.

  In the additional display example shown on the left side, the count display 703 is reduced from the initial 10-level display shown in FIG. 64A to the 4-level display shown in FIG. 64B, as shown in FIG. In addition, in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “still still” are displayed. Subsequently, the second count display period is added (added), and the level of the count display 703 is increased to 15 level display as shown in FIG. That is, by adding (adding), the value is larger than the initial value shown in FIG.

  Here, a false count value different from the true count value of the internal counter circuit is displayed from the count display 703 in FIG. 64A, and the count display 703 in FIG. The count value is displayed. That is, an example of the third control is executed. For example, when one level of the count display 703 indicates 1 second, the count display shown in (a) of FIG. 7 (a) is displayed even though the counter circuit inside the timing in FIG. Reference numeral 703 denotes a 10-level display, which counts down at 1 level for 1 second. At the timing shown in FIG. Here, a count value of 10 seconds is added internally. However, in the count display 703 in FIG. 11H, a 15-level display corresponding to 15 seconds is performed, and it is produced that the player has gained some advantage. In addition, the countdown in the count display 703 in FIG. 60H is counted down at a speed of less than 1 second (a speed at which the 15th level is changed to the 0th level in 10 seconds).

  In the addition display example shown on the right side, when the second count display period is added (added), the count display 703 is increased in level to 8 level display as shown in FIG. The initial value is less than 10 levels. In this added (added) count display, the display mode is different from the display mode before adding (added). That is, the level display before the addition (addition) is displayed in a non-patterned and one-color display mode, but the level display after the addition (addition) is displayed in a display mode with a pattern. Note that the difference in the display mode is not limited to the pattern, but may be a difference in color or shading.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of numerical display different from the meter display described so far.

  Here, when the button operation effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), a character display of “Destroy 1000 bodies” is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a numerical value display 2804 whose numerical value changes according to the button operation (the number of operations in this case) appears. Since this numerical display 2804 appears after the character display is made, it appears after the start of the button operation effect, but may appear at the same time as the button operation effect, or may appear before the start of the button operation effect. Good. Here, the start of the button operation effect means that at least one of the image 701 of the effect button 136, the arrow 702 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, and the count display 703 is displayed. Or, it means that an opening effect for informing the start of the button operation effect is displayed. The numerical value display 2804 shown in FIG. 65 (b) is “1000 remaining units”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a numerical value display 2804 is displayed, and at the same time, a character “Let's hit repeatedly” is additionally displayed. This additional display of the characters is the same as the timing at which the numerical display 2804 is displayed, and an internal counter circuit that counts the number of times the effect button 136 is actually pressed together with the additional display of the characters “Let's hit repeatedly” Start counting. The numerical value display 2804 may be a numerical value display according to the effect program regardless of the value of the counter circuit. The numerical value display 2804 may appear at the same time as the start of the button operation effect, or may appear before the start of the button operation effect.

  The count display 703 shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B is a 10-level display, but the count display 703 shown in FIG. 65C is reduced to a 3-level display. In addition, the numerical display 2804 shown in FIG.

  In the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Note that the count display 703 at this time remains a three-level display. Further, the character display “addition of enemy” for notifying the addition to the numerical display 2804 is covered with the numerical display 2804 so that the numerical display 2804 is difficult to see.

  The numerical value display 2804 shown in FIG. 65 (e) has increased from “300 remaining” to “800 remaining”. However, the count display 703 has also been increased to an 8-level display compared to the 3-level display so far. That is, the remaining period is added (added), and the second count display period is started.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example different from the meter display and numerical display described so far.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, a pair of door images 712 that are opened and closed are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A pair of door images 712 in a completely closed state are displayed as background images on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5A, and the design 701 of the effect button 136 and the effect button 136 are pressed. An arrow pattern 702 and a count display 703 are displayed as a transparent image, and are slightly invisible. The pair of door images 712 in a completely closed state can be regarded as a kind of count display in which the degree of opening changes according to button operations (here, the number of operations). That is, the degree of opening is determined according to the count value of the internal counter circuit that counts the number of times the effect button 136 is actually pressed. Note that the pair of door images 712 may perform opening / closing display according to the effect program regardless of the value of the counter circuit.

  In FIG. 66 (b), when the effect button 136 is continuously hit, the pair of door images 712 that have been completely closed until now start to open. The portion between the pair of door images 712 is not transparently displayed, and the design 701 of the effect button 136, the arrow design 702, and the count display 703 are slightly visible. Note that the count display 703 is decreased by one level.

  In FIG. 66 (c), the degree of opening of the pair of door images 712 advances, and between the pair of door images 712, the design 701 of the effect button 136, the arrow design 702, and the entire count display 703 are displayed. It is easy to see. Note that the count display 703 is reduced by three levels.

  In FIG. 66 (d), the degree of opening of the pair of door images 712 further advances, and the count display 703 is reduced to the remaining three levels.

  In FIG. 66E, the count display 703 becomes 0 level, but the pair of door images 712 are not fully opened.

  In this example, the second count display period is not added, and in FIG. 66 (f), the pair of door images 712 that are partially opened returns to the completely closed state, and the word “sorry” is displayed. Yes. That is, in this example, the button operation effect fails and the success effect is not performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (g), “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of the usual decorative patterns of losing, are stopped and displayed. A hold display and digestion hold display area 2802 is displayed.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example in which the button operation effect that failed in FIG. 66 succeeds.

  In FIG. 67 (e), a second count display period is added, and the count display 703, which has been a 3-level display until then, has increased to an 8-level display. That is, the level has returned to the level of the count display 703 shown in FIG. 67A (the initial value level), and characters “extended” are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 67 (f), the count display 703 once increased decreases to the remaining three levels, but the pair of door images 712 are completely opened. That is, the pair of door images 712 are completely invisible, and the background screen is displayed without any pattern and one color (first display). The success effect here is an effect of displaying this patternless and one-color display (first display) as the background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (g), “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the ordinary figure, are stopped and displayed. As shown in 67 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the vehicle enters the mode in which the electric chew is opened (here, the Yoshimune mode).

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a button operation effect different from the button operation effects described so far. Hereinafter, the difference from what has been described so far will be mainly described.

  In FIG. 68 (c), the button operation effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 determines whether or not to develop the super reach by repeatedly pressing the effect button 136 as a button operation effect start notification. An announcement is made.

  In FIG. 68 (d), the design button 701 of the effect button 136, the arrow design 702, the character display “continue hitting”, and the count display 703 are displayed in the lower right, and the design 713 in which the reach cards are stacked is displayed. . In the pattern 713 in which the reach cards are stacked, only the front reach card is visible, and here, the reach card 713a of A reach is visible. Each reach card displays the degree of advantage for each reach player in the number of stars. Here, the reach of the reach card on the back side is a more advantageous reach for the player. By repeatedly striking the production button 136, the reach card displayed in front is destroyed and disappears.

  In FIG. 68 (e), the reach card 713a of A reach is destroyed and the reach card 713b of B reach appears. In FIG. 8 (f), the B reach reach card 713b is not destroyed and the B reach reach card 713b is in front even though the direct button 136 is repeatedly hit after the B reach reach card 713b is displayed in front. It shows how it continues to be displayed. The count display 703 shown in FIG. 5F is reduced to the remaining two levels.

  In the subsequent FIG. 68 (g), a second count display period is added, and the count display 703, which has been a 2-level display until then, has increased to an 8-level display. That is, the level returns to the level of the count display 703 shown in FIG. 68D (level of the initial value), and the characters “extension” are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 68 (h), the reach card 713b of B reach is finally defeated, and the reach card 713c of C reach appears. The execution of the success effect here is that the reach effect (here, the C reach effect) recorded on the reach card displayed when the count display 703 becomes 0 level is executed. Therefore, in this button operation effect, since any reach is performed, it is surely successful.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing two modifications of the example shown in FIG.

  In the first modification shown on the left side, the design button 701 of the effect button 136, the arrow design 702, the character display “Let's hit repeatedly”, and the count display 703 (hereinafter collectively referred to as a design such as a button). The display position changes depending on the type of reach card displayed in front. That is, when the A reach reach card 713a shown in FIG. 69 (a) is displayed in the foreground, the pattern such as a button is displayed in front of the B reach reach card 713b shown in FIG. 69 (b). It is displayed at a position lower than the picture such as a button. In the first modification, the relative positional relationship between the pattern such as a button and the reach card displayed in front is the same even if the type of reach card displayed in front changes.

  In the second modification shown on the right side, the relative positional relationship between the pattern such as a button and the reach card displayed in front changes depending on the type of reach card displayed in front. That is, when viewed from the distance between the reach card 713b and a pattern such as a button when the B reach reach card 713b is displayed in front as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69 (c), the reach of the A-reach reach card 713a and the reach card 713a is relatively wide. When the card 713c is displayed on the front side, the distance between the pattern such as a button and the reach card 713c is relatively narrow. In the second modified example, the display position of a pattern such as a button is the same even if the type of reach card displayed in front is changed.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a third modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In the third modified example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when the character “extended” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second count display period is added, the display of a pattern such as a button is displayed. The position changes. That is, during the first count display period, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the pattern such as the button is displayed relatively downward, and the characters “extension” are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the entire pattern such as buttons disappears.

  Then, when the second count display period is added, as shown in FIG. 70C, the pattern such as the button is displayed relatively upward.

  In the fourth modification, a fourth symbol 2805 is displayed on the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol 2805 informs that the usual symbol variation display is being performed by repeating blinking. During the first count display period shown in FIG. 70A, the fourth symbol 2805 is hidden by a pattern such as a button and cannot be seen at all. When the character display “extension” shown in FIG. 70B is displayed, the fourth symbol 2805 disappears together with a pattern such as a button. During the second count display period shown in FIG. 70 (c) and FIG. 70 (d), the fourth symbol 2805 is not hidden by a pattern such as a button and is visible.

  In addition, although it was the 4th pattern 2805 to hide by pictures, such as a button here, another display may be sufficient. Further, it may be visible during the first count display period and may be difficult to view during the second count display period.

  71 is a diagram showing a fourth modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In the fourth modification, after entering the reach state, the type of super reach is determined by operating the effect button 136.

  The display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (a) is equally divided into three parts, with the leftmost area being an A reach area, the center being a B reach area, and the rightmost being an X reach area. It has become. On the right side of each reach name, the player's advantage is displayed as the number of stars. An error (warning) message that prompts the user to remove the ball is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower left corner, a fourth symbol 2805 and a number indicating the number of reserved symbols (in this case, “3”). ]) Is displayed.

In addition, a design 701 of the effect button 136, an arrow design 702, and a count display 703 are displayed at the upper center of the decorative design display device 208, and “Determine destination with buttons” is displayed on them. Yes.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor 2806 surrounding the area moves at a high speed in the horizontal direction, and the A reach area, the B reach area, and the X reach area according to the timing when the effect button 136 is pressed. The cursor 2806 stops in any of the areas, and the type of super reach is determined. It should be noted that the type of super reach to be developed thereafter is determined internally (for example, determined by the first sub-control unit 400) before the button operation effect is started, and is determined in advance. The control for stopping the cursor 2806 is performed in the area.

  In addition, not only the movement of the cursor 2806 but also a mode in which three areas are blinked at a high speed one by one and any area is continuously blinked in accordance with the timing when the effect button 136 is pressed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71A, the cursor 2806 is stopped in the center B reach area, and the type of super reach is determined to be B reach.

  In FIG. 71 (c), the B reach area is expanded together with the cursor 2806, and it is difficult to see an error message for prompting the ball removal. In FIG. 4D, the B reach area extends to the entire screen.

  In FIG. 71 (e), the cursor 2806 once stopped in the B reach area, but the second count display period was added, the operation valid period was extended, and it was the A reach area so far. As the area changes to the X reach area, the former B reach area also changes to the X reach area. After all, all three areas are now the X reach area, and the X reach is confirmed. To do. As described above, when the second count display period is added, the selection target changes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (e), an error message that prompts the user to remove the ball is difficult to see due to the background image of the X reach area.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of another effect using the count display 703. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIG. 59 will be mainly described.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), first, a reach state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 72 (d), if a predetermined character appears within a predetermined time (here, within 10 seconds). It is told that it will develop into super reach. A count display 703 of a digital clock type is shown at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. At this start timing, the count display 703 is “00:00”. The effect here is not an effect of prompting button operation, and the count display 703 is a display for notifying the elapsed time.

  Even in the reach state, the decorative symbol variation display moves to the right corner and is displayed in a small size, and the hold display and digestion hold display area 2802 that have been displayed so far are not visible.

  The count display 703 here is a count-up method, and in the count display 703 shown in FIG. 5E, the count value is increased to “02:50”, and it is reported that two or five seconds have elapsed. . In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 5E, a design 721 of an old character different from a predetermined character (for example, a hero character) is displayed.

  In the count display 703 shown in FIG. 5F, it is reported that the count value has reached “10:00” and 10 seconds have passed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5F, the patterns 722 of three characters different from the predetermined character are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. In the center of the screen 208, the word “sorry” is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5G, the frame 703f of the count display 703 is displayed, but the count value is not displayed, and the bar (-) display. In this example, a predetermined character (for example, a hero character) does not appear and does not develop into super reach, and the decorative symbol variation display ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (h), “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of the usual decorative patterns of losing, is stopped and displayed. Note that the display of the hold display and the digest hold display area 2802 has been resumed.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a time rewind effect is performed in the effect described with reference to FIG. 72, and FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIG. 72 will be mainly described.

  Also in this example, as shown in FIG. 73 (d), in the reach state, if a predetermined character appears within a predetermined time (again within 10 seconds here), it will be said that it will be developed into a super reach. A count display 703 is shown.

  In the count display 703 shown in FIG. 5F, it is notified that the count value has reached “09:00:00” and 9 seconds have passed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 5F, a pattern 722 of three characters different from the predetermined character is displayed in a small size. Further, the word “rewind” is displayed in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the subsequent count display 703 shown in FIG. 5G, the count value returns to “03:00”, and it has been notified that only 3 seconds have passed since 9 seconds have passed. That is, an extra time of 6 seconds is given.

  In the count display 703 shown in FIG. 11H, it is reported that the count value has reached “07:00” and 7 seconds have passed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a pattern 723 of a predetermined character. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74 (i), the word “mission successful” is displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (i), the count-up in the count display 703 is stopped simultaneously with the appearance of a predetermined character, and “07:00” continues to be displayed. That is, when the mission is successful, the count display 703 stops counting. It should be noted that, instead of stopping when a predetermined character appears, it may be stopped simultaneously with the display of the character “Mission Success”. Note that the count display 703 in which the count is stopped is displayed in a mode (here, a color change) different from the mode during counting.

  Eventually, it evolved into super reach (FIG. 74 (j)), and thereafter, the decorative symbol variation display ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74 (k), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the normal figure, are stopped and displayed.

  In the above description, the variation display of the usual decorative pattern is described as an example. However, the variation display of the special symbol decorative pattern may be used (the same applies to the following).

  Subsequently, a modified example of the hold display and the decorative design will be described.

  FIG. 75A is a diagram showing a modified example of the hold display.

  In the hold display (hold icon), a picture that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136) may be displayed. Further, in the hold display (hold icon), a pattern that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136) and the operation valid period are displayed, but the count display 703 may be displayed. In the hold display 295 shown in FIG. 75 (a), a picture 701 of the effect button 136, an arrow picture 702, and a count display 703 are shown, and the period during which the hold display 295 is made (here, the count display 703). When the effect button 136 is pressed during the operation valid period displayed by the user, any one of the first aspect 296 of the prefetching notice, the second aspect 297 of the prefetching notice, and the third aspect 298 of the prefetching notice You may make it change to. The first embodiment 296 to the third embodiment 298 have different hit reliability, and the hit reliability is higher when the second embodiment 297 is changed than the first embodiment 296. It is higher if the third embodiment 298 is changed. The reliability can be regarded as an advantage for the player.

  FIG. 75 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of the decorative design.

  Also in the decorative design, a design that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136) may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative pattern, a picture that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136) and the operation valid period are displayed, but a count display 703 may be displayed. In the decorative design (here “decoration 2”) shown in FIG. 75B, a design 701 of the effect button 136, an arrow design 702, a character display of PUSH, and a count display 703 are shown.

  The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 75B is, for example, a decorative symbol that stops first (first stop). If the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period displayed by the count display 703, the decorative symbol is simulated. You may shift to continuous fluctuation. Or, it is a decoration symbol that stops first (first stop), and when the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period displayed by the count display 703 and succeeds, the decoration that stops next (second stop). The design is also a decorative design shown in FIG. 75 (b), and when the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period displayed by the count display 703 and is successful, the decoration is finally stopped (for example, temporarily stopped). The design is also a decorative design shown in FIG. 75 (b), and if the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period displayed by the count display 703 and the success is achieved, the winning is confirmed or the special super reach is reached. It may be possible to develop or shift to a special mode.

  76 to 78 are diagrams showing various count displays 703. In addition, the 4th symbol 2805 and the number showing the number of usual hold may be displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in each of FIGS. 76 to 78.

  FIG. 76 (a) shows an example of a pachinko machine in which a game state in which a left strike is made aiming at the left area of the game area 124 and a game state in which a right strike is aimed at the right area are prepared. In such a pachinko machine, there is a case where a warning is displayed when the player hits the right in a gaming state to be left-handed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76A, a count message 703 is displayed as well as a warning message such as “please return to the left” but a remaining period for displaying the warning message. In this pachinko machine, the normal start port is provided in the right region, and whether or not right-handed is performed is determined by the game ball passing through the general start port provided in the right region. Can be detected.

  76 (I) and FIG. 76 (II) are connected in time series, and a descriptive tutorial display of the game effect is shown in the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (I). Here, "Yoshimune is ...") is displayed. Further, on the right side of the tutorial display, a design 701 of an effect button 136, an arrow design 702, and a count display 703 are shown. That is, a button operation effect is performed. The button operation effect here is a continuation of the tutorial display if the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period indicated by the count display 703. In the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (II), the button operation effect is finished, and the continuation of the tutorial display (here, “I am Yatsushiro general”) is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (a), a special symbol variable symbol display is performed on the upper left, and a normal symbol variable symbol variable display area 2807 is provided at the lower center. . In the ordinary symbol variation display area 2807, the ornamental symbol variation display is performed during the symbol variation display of the universal symbol display device 210. In this variable display area 2807, a notice display for each map is also displayed. In addition, a character appears on the variable display area 2807, and a tutorial display (in this case, if the picture of a predetermined character is displayed in a stoppage in the variable display area 2807, the Yoshimune mode (Denchu is released). The count display 703 is displayed on the character. The count display 703 indicates the remaining time of the variation time of the normal symbol variation display. If the area at the lower center is an effect area related to the special figure (for example, an effect area related to the special pattern display of the special figure), the count display 703 displayed on the character is the special display. The remaining time of the variation time of the symbol variation display of the figure may be displayed, and if it is other production area, the remaining time of the production performed in that area is displayed. What may be. That is, the count display 703 may be used for displaying the remaining time of the effect.

  FIG. 76 (a) and FIG. 76 (i) are diagrams connected in time series. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Shows a pattern 701 of an effect button 136, an arrow pattern 702, and a count display 703. That is, a button operation effect is performed. The button operation effect here is an effect for performing a stage change, and on the count display 703, a character display such as “if you want to change the stage (stage change)” is made to prompt the user to press the effect button 136. . A stage change is allowed, for example, immediately after the start of symbol variation display. In the same figure (a), the stage button 136 is pressed and the stage change is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (a), the stage B effect is being executed. In the lower right, the button operation effect for changing the stage is continued. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period by the button operation effect here, the stage A is returned to or moved to another stage.

  A demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The demonstration screen is a customer waiting screen and is executed as one of demonstration demonstrations. This demonstration effect is an effect executed when the next symbol variation display does not start until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display ends. To explain in more detail, in the demonstration production, the display of the decorative symbols is displayed, the decorative symbols are simulated, the game table title is displayed, the predetermined characters are displayed, etc. Explanations are given, and lamp effects and sound effects are performed along with these effects. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a demo flag, and when the demo flag is set to ON, the first sub-control unit 400 sends a decorative symbol display device to the second sub-control unit 500. Instruct 208 to display a demonstration screen (demonstration screen), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the demonstration screen. The demonstration effect ends with a predetermined opportunity. For example, the process is terminated when there is a new winning at the special figure starting port (230, 231). As the demonstration performance ends, the demo flag is set off.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77 (a), it is informed that the demonstration effect is being executed with the character display “Waiting for customer” (during the demonstration), but it is not necessary to be the character display, and the background display etc. It only has to be understood that the demo is in progress. Or even if you don't know what the demo is, you can see how the symbols are stopped.

  On the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (a), a request display for displaying a screen related to the membership service is performed. That is, as a request display, a guide character (here “membership service is here”) displayed on the right end, a design 701 of the effect button 136, a design 702 of an arrow, and a count display 703 are shown. When the effect button 136 is pressed while the demo screen is displayed, the demo screen is switched to a screen related to the membership service. The count display 703 displays the remaining period of the period for accepting switching to the screen related to the membership service. When the remaining period of the count display 703 becomes 0, the request display disappears.

  FIG. 77B is a diagram showing another example of the request display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (b), a telop is displayed in the lower corner of the screen. This telop display is a display in which an image flows from the right to the left of the screen. In the telop display, characters that require guidance and operation (here, “menu display with button PUSH”) and a count display 703 are shown. The count display 703 here also displays the remaining period of the period for accepting switching to the menu screen, and when the remaining period of the count display 703 becomes 0, the telop display ends.

  FIG. 77 (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the count display 703 is displayed on the second display means 209 when the decorative symbol display device 208 is the first display means. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 77 (c) is an example of a sub display means having a smaller size than the decorative symbol display device 208, and is movable in the vicinity of the first display means (decorative symbol display device 208). Arranged to be possible. That is, the second display unit 209 is movable in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to cover a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 77 (c) has moved from the initial position and stopped at a position covering the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Some kind of display (for example, an error message prompting to remove the ball) is displayed at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but this display is hidden by the second display means 209 and becomes invisible. Yes. The second display unit 709 performs a character display that prompts an operation of a holding display, a count display 703, and an operation unit (chance button in this case) in front of the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The count display 703 here displays the remaining period of the operation effective period of the operation means, and disappears from the second display means 209 when the remaining period of the count display 703 becomes zero.

  FIG. 78A to FIG. 78H show different examples. FIG. 78A is a diagram showing a screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the power saving mode advanced from the demonstration screen. The power saving mode is a mode that is executed when the next symbol variation display does not start until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation display ends without going through the demonstration screen. There may be. In the example shown in FIG. 78 (a), the player returns to the normal mode in which the game can be played from the power saving mode by operating the operation means. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a count display 703 such as “2 seconds until return” is displayed. Note that amounts such as numerical values and levels represented by the count display so far have been added (added), but the time until return represented by the count display 703 is extended (added). Absent.

  FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram showing a screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 displayed after the power is turned on by the power switch operation or after the power is restored after the power interruption. On the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters indicating that loading is in progress are displayed, and the reading amount of programs and data is indicated by a count display 703. The count display 703 here is a numerical display of%, and is displayed as 33% in FIG. Note that the read count display 703 may increase or decrease all at once.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 78 (c) represents an experience value. Level display is performed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (c) (here, level 34). The level (black portion) of the count display 703 extends from the right side toward the left side, and when reaching the left end, the number of levels displayed on the level display increases by one level. For example, the experience value slightly increases when the normal reach effect is performed, the level slightly increases to the left side, increases considerably when the super reach effect is performed, and the level significantly increases to the left side.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 78 (d) represents the number of points. A count display 703 is shown on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The count display 703 here is a numerical display of the number of points (Pt), and is displayed as 28314Pt in FIG. The number of points here is obtained, for example, based on the incoming ball. For example, 10 points are awarded when entering a variable winning opening 234 (Attacker), 7 points are awarded when entering an electric chew, and 3 points are added when entering a general winning opening 226. The number of points may be the number of points obtained based on a prize ball. For example, it may be the number of prize balls acquired during the retreat. Here, when a game ball enters a 15-ball attacker, 15 is displayed instead of 14 of 15-1. That is, it is not net profit. Further, on the count display 703, a count display of the number of enemy characters destroyed during the retreat is also shown. This count display displays numbers related to effects during the big hit game.

  A big hit symbol (here, “777”) is displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. This display may be information indicating the profitability of the jackpot. In addition, the current big hit round number (10R in this case) is displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (d). Further, in the middle of the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (d), a display requesting the ball removal, which is displayed when the lower pan full tank error sensor is detected, is made.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 78 (e) is a level display displayed on the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the level is increased in accordance with the number of special symbol fluctuation display times or the number of normal symbol fluctuation display times. Also, a special special figure start port (a special figure start port that is harder to enter than other special figure start ports) is provided on the back of the stage 244 shown in FIG. Then you may make it level up. When the level of the count display 703 reaches level 5, special effects are executed.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 78 (f) represents the remaining period of the password input acceptance period. Note that the reception period may be extended when a predetermined operation is performed.

  A count display 703 shown in FIG. 78 (g) represents the remaining period of the two-dimensional code display period. Note that the display period may be extended when a predetermined operation is performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (h) shows three buttons and the like (the design button 701 of the effect button 136, the arrow symbol 702, and the count display 703). The values represented by the count display 703 are different from each other. As described above, a plurality of types of count displays 703 may be displayed at the same time, and each count display 703 may display different target count values.

  As described above, the count display may be displayed during the variation of the symbol, or may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, the count display is displayed while the symbol is not changing (for example, during a big hit game or in the case of continuous symbol change display, between the symbol change display and the next symbol change display (stop display)). It may be done. Further, it may be displayed during the demonstration production or in the power saving mode. Further, it may be displayed during various settings (for example, during setting on the membership system service screen, during selection of a character, etc., during volume or brightness setting).

  Further, the trigger for adding the second count display period, the third count display period, or the like may be a predetermined time or timing in addition to the operation of the operation means. Further, the initial value initially displayed on the count display may be a true value, or may be a false value from the beginning. Alternatively, the value after being added (overwritten value) may be a true value or a false value.

  The count of the internal counter circuit may be counted up or down not only according to the passage of time but also up or down according to the input of the operation means. In addition to counting up or down by 1 input, 2 or more counts may be counted up or down by 1 input, and the count value is updated (changed) according to the input. That's fine. The same applies to displays such as count display, meter display, and numerical display.

  Furthermore, there may be a plurality of displays that perform false display, and a counter circuit that internally counts false values may be provided. In this case, a counter circuit that counts the true value is operating behind the false display. One or more true values may be displayed, and one or more false values may be displayed.

  Also, there may be a plurality of internal counter circuits and a plurality of storage means for storing the count value. Also, a plurality of count value displays corresponding to a plurality of counter circuits may be performed, or a plurality of count value displays corresponding to a plurality of counter circuits may be performed.

  In addition, a pattern does not appear on the meter display during false count display (for example, countdown display), but a pattern may appear on the meter display during true count display. Specifically, an aspect in which a pattern gradually appears as the count progresses may be used.

  Next, display examples and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described. 79 and 80 are diagrams showing display examples and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (a), the decorative symbol change display is performed in the upper left area, and the fourth symbol 2805 and the number of reserved ordinary symbols are displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. A number representing is displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (b) is a pachinko machine that has a hold for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variable display is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. A special figure 1 hold display area 2808 is provided on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area 2809 is provided on the right side thereof. Furthermore, a variable display area 2807 is provided between the special figure 1 hold display area 2808 and the special figure 2 hold display area 2809. That is, the variable display area 2807 is provided in the center portion of the effect display area 208d.

  In both the special figure 1 hold display area 2808 and the special figure 2 hold display area 2809 shown in FIG. 79 (b), the hold display (hold icon) is closer to the variable display area 2807 (center side) as the old hold display is displayed. Is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold display area 2808 shown in FIG. 79 (b), a first special figure 1 hold display h11, a second special figure 1 hold display h12, and a third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed. In this example, on the upper right, while displaying the number of reserved special figures as a number (here, “3”), the number of special figures held is also notified based on the number of reserved displays. The default mode of the special figure 1 hold display is a gray circle. The first special figure 1 hold display is displayed on the left side of the general drawing effect area 283.

  A striking suggestion area 2811 for performing striking suggestion notification is provided at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the right side of FIG. In the hitting suggestion region 2811 shown in FIG. 79 (c), it is suggested that a right hit is made. Right-handed is suggested, for example, during probability change. In the hitting suggestion area 2811 shown in FIG. 79 (d), it is suggested that the left strike is performed. In the hitting suggestion area 2811 shown in FIG. 79 (e), it is warned that the left strike will return. For example, such a warning display is performed when the player hits the right in the gaming state to be left-handed. In the hitting suggestion area 2811 shown in FIG. 79 (f), it is suggested to aim at the attacker (variable winning opening 234). For example, in the case of a pachinko machine that produces an effect using the ball that entered the attacker at the beginning of the big hit round or at the time of a small hit, the hitting suggestion notification shown in FIG. Corresponds to a type of request display that prompts players to enter.

  FIG. 80 (I) and FIG. 80 (II) are connected in time series, and an explanatory tutorial display of game effects is performed below the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (I). ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (II), another tutorial display is performed on the tutorial display. In this way, conversational tutorial display may be performed.

  A fourth symbol 2805 is displayed on the upper right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (a), and a number (here, “3”) indicating the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side. Below that, a number (in this case, “4”) indicating the number of reservations in FIG. 2 is displayed. Below that, the number of times related to a state advantageous to the player (for example, the number of time reductions, the number of STs (the number of remaining fluctuations with probability variation with number of times)) is displayed. In the number display here, the remaining number is displayed as a number (“70 remaining times”).

  A digestion suspension display area 2802 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The hold display (fluctuation icon) that has moved to the digestion hold display area 2802 pops out of the digestion hold display area 2802, and a special effect display may be performed at the center. In the example shown in FIG. 80 (a), an animation display that changes to a thousand boxes is performed.

  FIG. 80A shows a determination button 135, a right selection button 1371, and a left selection button 1372 provided in the vicinity of the effect button 136 of the pachinko machine.

  FIG. 80 (i) and FIG. 80 (u) are connected in a time series. At the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is suggested that the right selection button 1371 is pressed, and when the right selection button 1371 is actually pressed, the screen is switched to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. At the right end of the display screen, it is suggested that the left selection button 1372 is pressed when a stage change is desired for the B stage.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (α) does not clearly indicate that the effect button 136 is pressed, but the effect button 136 is pressed because the pattern 701 and the count display 703 of the effect button 136 are displayed. This is a button operation effect that prompts the user. That is, even if it is not explicitly indicated, those that can be recognized by those skilled in the art or players as being prompted to operate the button are included in the button operation effect.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a configuration around the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81 (a), the decorative symbol is changed in the upper left area, and the fourth symbol 2805 and a number indicating the number of reserved common symbols are displayed on the upper right. ing.

  Above the decorative symbol display device 208, first effect moving means 2471 that can be moved up and down on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed. The first effect moving means 2471 shown in FIG. 81A is at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208 and does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second effect moving means 2472 that can be rotated on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed. The second effect moving means 2472 shown in FIG. 81 (a) is also in the initial position and does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Further, a third effect moving means 2473 that can be moved up and down on the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208. The third effect moving means 2473 is also in the initial position. Part of the third effect moving means 2473 overlaps part of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position. The third effect moving means 2473 may also be one that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position.

  FIG. 81 (b) is a diagram showing a state when three types of effect moving means are operated.

  The first effect moving means 2471 shown in FIG. 81 (b) is lowered and stopped slightly above the maximum movable position. The first effect moving means 2471 is entirely overlapped with the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol 2805, and the number representing the number of reserved ordinary symbols become invisible. Yes. The fourth symbol 2805 may be hidden for a moment, or the fourth symbol 2805 may not be hidden.

  The second effect movable means 2472 shown in FIG. 81 (b) rotates to the maximum movable position and partially overlaps the right side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the maximum movable position of the first effect moving means 2471 and the maximum moveable position of the second effect moving means 2472 interfere with each other, and the first effect moving means 2471 and the second effect moving means 2472 are simultaneously maximum movable. It is controlled not to move to the position.

  The third effect movable means 2473 shown in FIG. 81 (b) is raised to the maximum movable position and entirely overlaps the central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the maximum movable position of the first effect moving means 2471 and the maximum moveable position of the third effect moving means 2473 do not interfere with each other.

  It should be noted that when the effect button 136 is pressed, the first effect moving means 2471 may be always lowered from the initial position, or when the effect button 136 is pressed when the effect lottery is won, the first effect moving unit 2471 is lowered. It may be an embodiment.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden.

  Part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82A is hidden by closing the door members 2475 and 2476 arranged on the left and right. The door members 2475 and 2476 are provided with several windows, and a predetermined portion of the display screen can be visually recognized from the windows even in a closed state. In this example, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the fourth symbol 2805 and the number indicating the number of reservations are visible, but it is sufficient that at least the fourth symbol 2805 is visible. In addition, although some of the error (warning) messages that prompt the display of decorative symbols and the removal of the sphere are visible, they are difficult to visually recognize as a whole.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (c), when the accessory (door members 2475, 2476) is movable, it is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (here, a reduced display mode smaller than the window). Even when the object is movable, it may not be difficult to view.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the brightness of the first region S1 and the second region S2 is different depending on the arrangement interval of the light sources.

  This example is an example of so-called glass emission, and the glass is cut, and when light is applied from the side, a pattern or the like is displayed.

  The light emitting body L1 that irradiates the first region S1 has a small installation interval. For this reason, the amount of light entering the direction changing means increases, and the light emission becomes stronger. On the other hand, the light emitting body L2 that irradiates the second region S2 has a wide installation interval. For this reason, the light is dispersed, the amount of light entering the direction changing means is reduced, and the light emission is weakened.

  This glass light emission means is often arranged quite close to the player side, and serves as a means for hiding (making it difficult to see) various things such as the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating an example in which effects are visually or auditorily overlapped.

  In the example shown in FIG. 84A, a tutorial display is performed at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, when the effect button 136 is pressed, the next tutorial display is performed so as to overlap the tutorial display displayed so far. As a result, the previously displayed tutorial display is difficult to view.

  In the example shown in FIG. 84B, the light aura 705 (effect display) displayed behind the character pattern 704 is increased by long-pressing the effect button 136 (operating in a predetermined operation mode). Go. As a result, the light aura 705 overlaps an error (warning) message that prompts the user to remove the ball, making it difficult to visually recognize the error message. It should be noted that the button operation effect display (operation request display) consisting of the pattern 701 of the effect button 136 and the arrow pattern 702 does not cover the light aura 705, and the display of the button operation effect is well-viewed. The light aura 705 may be further enlarged to make it difficult to view even the display of the button operation effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 84 (c), the button operation effect display (operation request display) composed of the pattern 701 of the effect button 136 and the arrow pattern 702 overlaps with an error (warning) message that prompts the user to remove the ball. It has become difficult to see.

  In the example shown in FIG. 84 (d), with the error (warning) message that prompts the user to remove the ball, the speaker 120 also outputs a sound that prompts the user to remove the ball. A button operation effect display (operation request display) including a character display of “PUSH” is performed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated, the first effect moving means 2471 falls from the initial position, the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden, and the volume of the sound is higher than the sound prompting to remove the ball. A large production sound (here, “Jakeen”) is output from the speaker 120, and it is difficult to view the sound that prompts the user to remove the ball. Here, the effect sound may be output from the same speaker as the speaker outputting the sound for prompting the ball removal, or may be output from a different speaker.

  Then, it is the figure which showed notionally the method of concealing a certain thing.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing the relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means 2477.

  FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which the first display and the second display are displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 with an interval in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 85 shows an example (FIG. 85 (c), FIG. (F), FIG. (G)) in which there is one thing to be hidden (first display or second display), and two things to be hidden. An example (first display or second display) (FIG. 85D, FIG. 85E) is shown. Further, the order of hiding is shown in the time-series flow of FIGS. 85 (b) to 85 (h). In addition, it shows whether it is all hidden or partly hidden.

  86 and 87 are diagrams showing the relationship between the movable range of the shielding unit 2477 and the display position.

  86 and 87, the range between the dotted lines is the movable range of the shielding means 2477.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (c) and (d), the first display and the second display may all be included in the movable range of the shielding means 2477, or FIG. 86 (a) and FIG. 87. As shown in each drawing, at least one of the first display and the second display may be included in the movable range of the shielding means 2477, or as shown in FIG. 86 (b). In addition, only one of the first display and the second display may be included in the movable range of the shielding unit 2477. That is, the whole of the hidden objects (the first display and the second display here) may be hidden, or a part thereof may be hidden.

  Further, the display position of the first display and the display position of the second display do not need to be aligned, and are shifted as shown in FIGS. 86 (a), (b), and 87 (d). May be.

  Furthermore, the size of the first display and the size of the second display may be the same, or may be different as shown in FIG. 87 (a).

  Furthermore, what is hidden may be larger than what is hidden (here, the shielding means 2477), may be smaller, or may be the same size.

  Further, what is hidden is not limited to the movable means such as the shielding means 2477, but may be a light emitting means or other display. Furthermore, the movement of the movable means to be concealed may be the left-right direction, the diagonal direction, the rotation direction, or may be a shaking motion.

  In addition to the first display and the second display, the third display, the fourth display,... May be hidden.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating two examples of the first display and the second display in a plurality of variations. FIG. 88 shows an example in which two symbol variation displays are continuously performed.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 88, the first display is displayed at the same position and in the same size across multiple variations, but the second display disappears after one variation. The display position of the first display may change every time the change starts, or may change when a predetermined trigger (for example, start of reach production) during the change occurs, and the change ends. May vary from degree to degree. The same applies to the size of the first display.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 88, the first display is displayed at the same position at the same position across multiple variations, but the second display is the same at the same position every time the variation ends. Displayed in size. Therefore, in terms of the fluctuation unit, both the first display and the second display are displayed. Note that the timing at which the second display is displayed may be a change start timing, or may be a timing at which a predetermined trigger during the change occurs (for example, reach effect start timing). In addition, the display position of the second display may change with each change, and the size may change with each change.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a first example in which the display is hidden in time series.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left area, and the fourth symbol 2805 and a number representing the number of reserved items are displayed in the lower left. In addition, an error (warning) message for prompting a ball removal is displayed on the left side, and the background image (corresponding to the first effect display) is a duel scene between the main character on the left side and the enemy on the right side. Further, in the center of the screen, an operation request display including a pattern 701 of the effect button 136, an arrow pattern 702, and a character display such as “Let's feel a long press” is performed. This operation request display is in the forefront in terms of layers, is not disturbed by the background image, and has good visibility. Instead of requesting an operation mode such as a long press, an operation in an operation mode that is pressed once may be requested. Further, the operation request display may or may not disappear after the operation is accepted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated, the mode of the background image (first effect display) changes based on the button operation. In the background image shown in FIG. 89B, a light aura 705 appears behind the main character. The larger the aura 705, the higher the degree of expectation for winning. In FIG. 89 (b), the aura 705 is overlapped with the error message for removing the ball, and the message is difficult to see.

  By continuing the operation of the effect button 136, the size of the aura 705 is further increased in FIG. 89 (c). If the operation is stopped halfway, the size of the aura 705 remains the same, or the size of the aura 705 is gradually reduced.

  FIG. 89D shows a state in which the effect button 136 is continuously operated and the aura 705 is maximized. The larger the aura 705, the larger the range of the aura 705 that overlaps the error message, making it difficult to see. In this example, the error message can be visually recognized, but the error message may be blocked by the aura 705 so that the error message cannot be visually recognized. Further, only a part may be difficult to view or may not be visible, and some may or may not be visible, and there may or may not be a place that is not visible or difficult. .

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a second example in which the display is hidden in time series. In the following description, differences from the first example shown in FIG. 89 will be mainly described.

  As shown in FIGS. 90A to 90D, in this example, the operation request display is continuously displayed during the operation valid period of the button operation. Also in this example, the size of the aura 705 gradually increases as the operation of the effect button 136 is continued. Further, in this example, the operation request display is on the rear side of the aura 705 (corresponding to a part of the first effect display) in terms of layers, and a part of the operation request display is visually recognized by the aura 705. It has become difficult. Note that if the layer order is changed, the hero himself may be difficult to see due to the light aura 705.

  Further, the way of hiding (hiding) varies depending on the contents of the operation request display. For example, the operation request display related to the so-called production may be on the back side, and it is easy to hide, but the system operation request display (please pull out the ball, call the store clerk) may be on the front side. Yes, it is difficult to hide.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a third example in which the display is hidden in time series.

  In the example shown in FIG. 91, an aura 705 is hidden, and an error message (first display) and an operation request display (second display) are hidden. As can be seen particularly well in FIG. 91 (d), the second display (operation request display) is more difficult to see than the first display (error message).

  Note that the first display (error message) may be more difficult to visually recognize than the second display (operation request display), or both of the visual difficulty levels may be the same. When both the visual difficulty levels are the same, for example, both are drawn on the same layer. In the first place, the visual difficulty of the first display (error message) may not change. This includes the case where the first display (error message) does not become difficult to see.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating a fourth example in which the display is hidden.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92, what is hidden is a cut-in image 706, and what is hidden is an error message (first display) and an operation request display (second display). As the cut-in image 706 to be hidden, a plurality of cut-in images having different hit reliability (expectation) are prepared. For example, the cut-in image 706 shown in FIG. 92B is thick (large in size) and hides the entire error message (first display) and operation request display (second display). . On the other hand, the cut-in image 706 shown in FIG. 92 (c) is thin (small in size), does not hide the error message (first display), and is part of the operation request display (second display). Is hiding. In the cut-in image 706 shown in FIG. 92B and the cut-in image 706 shown in FIG. 92C, the reliability of the jackpot (expected degree) is higher in the former case. As described above, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition varies depending on the type of the cut-in image 706.

  If the cut-in image 706 is displayed and a part of the operation request display (second display) is hidden as shown in the flow of FIG. 92 (c) to FIG. 92 (d), then the operation request display ( The mode of deleting the second display) may be used. Alternatively, the operation request display (second display) may be turned off and the cut-in image 706 may be displayed.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a fifth example in which the display is hidden.

  At the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 (a), an operation request display including a character display such as a pattern 701 of an effect button 136, an arrow pattern 702, and “PUSH” is displayed.

  In FIG. 93 (b), the picture 701 of the effect button 136 is enlarged and displayed in the operation request display. Here, the size of the pattern 701 changes according to the degree of reliability (expectation). That is, the higher the hit reliability, the larger the size of the pattern 701. A part of the enlarged pattern 701 shown in FIG. 93B is transparently displayed. For example, a part of the face of the main character can be seen on the back side. On the other hand, the other parts are made impermeable, and for example, the part of the enemy's face and part of the left error message (first display) cannot be seen. That is, it is difficult to visually recognize the error message (first display).

  If the winning reliability is high, the pattern 701 does not necessarily have to be displayed in an enlarged manner. If the winning reliability is high, the pattern 701 is easily displayed in an enlarged manner, or is enlarged when the effect lottery is won. It may be displayed. Further, the entire pattern 701 may be displayed in an opaque manner.

  In the example shown in FIG. 93 (c), on the right side, a second operation request display (in this case, a character display "mode change with left / right keys") is made. This second operation request display is drawn on a layer in front of the pattern 701 and is not hidden by the enlarged pattern 701.

  It should be noted that even if the operation request display with the default size shown in FIG. 93A or the operation request display with the default size shown in FIG. The production is the same. However, the presentation after the presentation button 136 is pressed may be varied according to the size of the pattern 701. For example, after the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect moving means (object) moves, and the method of hiding by the effect moving means may be the same or different. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 81, when a plurality of types of effect moving means are provided, the movable effect moving means may be different depending on the size of the pattern 701. Alternatively, even if the movable effect moving means is the same, the movable pattern and the movable range may differ depending on the size of the pattern 701. Alternatively, the type of effect after the effect button 136 is pressed may be determined in advance by lottery. Furthermore, there may be a case where the effect is not executed even when the effect button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a sixth example in which the display is hidden.

  The example shown in FIG. 94 is an example during a big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In FIG. 6C, an error (warning) message prompting to remove the ball is displayed with a character display “please remove the ball” on the lower left side. In FIG. 6D, an effect relating to the true profit level of the jackpot is started as one of the effects during the jackpot game. In this figure (d), the character display which alert | reports that it is decided that the present big hit game is a 16 round big hit game by the effect | action movable body (here family crest object) operating is made. This character display does not hide the error message.

  In FIG. 9 (e), an operation request is displayed. This operation request display also does not hide the error message.

  In FIG. 5F, the family crest character 2478 falls from the initial position to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the depression of the effect button 136. A part of the error message prompting to remove the ball displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the crest member 2478 that has fallen, and the error message is difficult to view. On the other hand, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, but this big hit symbol is not hidden by the falling crest character 2478, and is highly visible.

  In FIG. 5G, the family crest member 2478 is retracted to the initial position, and the error message becomes good again.

In the above description,
“Counting means (for example, counter timer 412) capable of at least performing counting;
Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, a count display 703),
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display includes at least a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means,
The second display includes at least a display corresponding to a value different from the count value of the counting means,
The display means is capable of displaying at least the first display after displaying the second display (for example, FIG. 58 (b)),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Note that there may be one or more counting means. Moreover, the display means may be one or plural.

In addition, “at least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display includes at least a display corresponding to a value different from the count value of the counting means,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display after displaying the third display (for example, FIG. 64 (d)),
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Note that there may be more than the first display to the third display.

In addition, “the count value is a value that can change over time,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the count value may be a value updated in response to an input, for example, a value updated in response to an operation input.

In addition, "operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate,
An operation reception control means for receiving an operation of the operation means performed within an operation valid period;
With
The counting means is capable of at least counting the passage of the operation effective period;
The first display includes at least a display relating to the passage of the operation validity period.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “Starting area where game balls can enter at least,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
With
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The establishment requirement of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “it is provided with a determination unit for determining whether or not the determination is correct,
The symbol display means, after performing the symbol variation display, stops and displays a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “comprising a control means capable of executing at least the control of the symbol display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the control means is capable of at least executing a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the control means is capable of at least performing control for increasing the number of times the operation of the symbol display means is held when the holding condition is established,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description, “counting means (for example, counter timer 412) that can at least execute counting,
Effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display;
Effect display control means (for example, sub-control units 400 and 500) capable of controlling at least the effect display means;
A game machine equipped with
The effect display is a display including at least a count display (for example, a count display 703) regarding the count value of the counting means,
The effect display control means is capable of executing at least the first control,
The first control is a control for changing the count display from a display representing the count value of the counting means to a display representing a value different from the count value (for example, FIG. 60 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

“Counting means (for example, counter timer 412) that can at least execute counting,
Effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display;
Effect display control means (for example, sub-control units 400 and 500) capable of controlling at least the effect display means;
A game machine equipped with
The effect display is a display including at least a count display (for example, a count display 703) regarding the count value of the counting means,
The effect display control means is capable of executing at least a second control,
The second control is a control for changing the count display from a display representing a value different from the count value of the counting means to a display representing the count value (for example, FIG. 58 (b)).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

“Counting means (for example, counter timer 412) that can at least execute counting,
Effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display;
Effect display control means (for example, sub-control units 400 and 500) capable of controlling at least the effect display means;
A game machine equipped with
The effect display is a display including at least a count display (for example, a count display 703) regarding the count value of the counting means,
The effect display control means can execute at least a third control,
The third control is a control for changing the count display from a display representing a first value different from the count value of the counting means to a display representing a second value different from the count value (for example, FIG. 64 (d)).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “operation means (for example, a production button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate,
An operation reception control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that receives the operation of the operation unit performed within the operation valid period;
With
The counting means is capable of at least counting the passage of the operation effective period;
The count display is a display related to the passage of the operation effective period (for example, display of the remaining period).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “a start area where game balls can enter at least (for example, a normal start gate 253 and a special start port 230),
A symbol display means (for example, a general symbol display device 210 or a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
With
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The establishment requirement of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “comprising a determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of at least determining whether or not determination is possible,
The symbol display means, after performing the symbol variation display, stops and displays a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “comprising control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of at least executing control of the symbol display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the control means is capable of executing at least a control for holding the operation of the symbol display means (for example, a general-purpose hold control or a special-purpose hold control) when a holding condition is established. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the control means controls to increase the number of times the operation of the symbol display means is held when the holding condition is established (for example, winning acceptance processing S217, FIG. 7 shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 19). S1217) is at least executable.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the gaming table may be a slot machine.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix I)
Counting means capable of at least performing counting;
Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display;
Control means capable of controlling at least the display means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display includes at least a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means,
The second display includes at least a display corresponding to a value different from the count value of the counting means,
The control means is capable of executing at least a first control,
The first control includes at least a control of displaying the first display on the display unit after the second display is displayed on the display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix II)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix I,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display includes at least a display corresponding to a value different from the count value of the counting means,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The control means is capable of executing at least a second control,
The second control includes at least a control of displaying the first display on the display unit after the second display is displayed on the display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix III)
A game machine according to appendix I or II,
The count value is a value that can change over time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix IV)
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix I to Appendix III,
Operation means provided at least in a position where the player can operate;
An operation reception control means for receiving an operation of the operation means performed within an operation valid period;
With
The counting means is capable of at least counting the passage of the operation effective period;
The first display includes at least a display relating to the passage of the operation validity period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix V)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendix I to appendix IV,
A starting area where game balls can enter at least;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
With
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The establishment requirement of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix VI)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix V,
It is provided with a determination unit for determining whether or not the determination is correct,
The symbol display means, after performing the symbol variation display, stops and displays a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix VII)
A gaming machine according to Appendix V or VI,
Comprising control means capable of executing at least control of the symbol display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix VIII)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix VII,
The control means is capable of executing at least a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix IX)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix VIII,
The establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix X)
A gaming machine according to appendix VIII or IX,
The control means is capable of executing at least control for increasing the number of times that the operation of the symbol display means is held when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix XI)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix I to appendix X,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of each embodiment described above, each applicable mode, modification, or supplementary note, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, applicable modes, variations, You may apply to an appendix.

  Next, a gaming table to which the technical idea of the present invention can be applied will be further described. In the following description, the items described so far will be omitted, and the description will focus on the points where the technical features of the present invention are applied. Note that components having the same names as those used up to now are denoted by the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a variable putty set selection table used when selecting a variable time pattern table (hereinafter referred to as “variable putty” for short) stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this embodiment, 22 types of jackpot symbols are prepared as special chart jackpot symbols. These 22 types of jackpot symbols are all two rounds of jackpot symbols. Of these, 5 types are with certainty and the remaining 17 types are without certainty. Also in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there is a limit (limiter) on the number of times that a big hit with certain change can be obtained between the transition to the non-electric support state and the transition to the non-electric support state. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation counter that counts the number of times that a big hit with probability variation can be obtained. When the non-electric support state is shifted to the electrical support state, a specified number of times is set in this probability variation counter. Then, every time a jackpot with probability variation is obtained, the probability variation counter is decremented by one. The state in which the specified number of times is set in the probability variation counter is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (control state A). When the limiter is set and the specified number of times has not been reached (when the limiter has not been reached), that is, until the number of jackpots with probability change after shifting to the electric support state reaches the specified number of times, the game is in the middle of a villa (in bonus) . During the retreat, it is in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (control state B). When the specified number of times is reached (reaching the limiter), the electric support state is changed to the non-electric support state and the non-probable change state is changed. That is, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state which is a normal state is obtained.

  The jackpot probability in this embodiment is 100% in the probability variation state and 25% in the non-probability variation state. However, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state may be less than 100%.

  The top 2R specific time short symbol 1 shown in the variable putty set selection table shown in FIG. 95 is selected when the value of the probability variable counter is the remaining one time (the limiter state “arrival” in the table shown in FIG. 95). Then, it becomes a big hit design without 2R probability change electric support. When 2R specific short symbols 2 to 4 are selected when the value of the probability variation counter is in the remaining one state (limiter state “arrival”), it becomes a big hit symbol with 2R probability unchanged electric support, and the specification of the probability variation counter The number of times is reset while the symbol change stop display with a special figure is performed 100 times. On the other hand, when the 2R specified short time symbols 1 to 5 are selected when the value of the probability variation counter is in the remaining 11 to 2 times (the limiter state “not reached” in the table shown in FIG. 95), It becomes a big hit symbol with support, and the probability variation counter is decremented by 1.

  In addition, 2R normal time short symbols 1 to 17 are big hit symbols with no probability change, and regardless of the value of the probability change counter, they all become big hit symbols with 2R probability-free power support, and the probability variable counter is reset to the specified number of times. It is given as long as the symbol variation stop display is performed 100 times.

  In the selection table shown in FIG. 95, a random number range is defined for each jackpot symbol, but FIG. 95 shows the size of the random number range. The jackpot symbol determination random number used here is a random number in the range of 0 to 1799, and the selection probability of 2R specific time short symbol 1 is 50%. Moreover, the total selection probability of 2R specific time short symbols 2 to 5 is 40%. Furthermore, the total selection probability of 2R normal time short symbols 1 to 17 is 10%.

  From the selection probability, if the probability variation counter value is in the remaining 11 to 2 times, the total selection probability is 90% (50% + 40%), so one of the 2R specified short-time symbols 1 to 5 during probability variation. 2R normal time short symbols 1 to 17 in which the probability variation counter is reset to the specified number of times, which is advantageous to the player, are selected only with a probability of 10%. However, in the state where the value of the probability variation counter remains, the jackpot symbol (2R specified short time symbol 2-4, 2R normal time short symbol 1-17 with which the probability variable counter is reset to the specified number of times with a selection probability of 50%. ) Is selected and the remaining 50% selection probability falls to the normal state (bonus ends) 2R specific time short symbol 1 is selected.

  In the selection table shown in FIG. 95, the number of symbols prepared for each jackpot symbol is also described. The number of symbols referred to here corresponds to the number of stop symbol patterns of the special symbol display device 212.

  Furthermore, in the selection table shown in FIG. 95, the control state at the time of selection (whether it is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state, a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state, The variable putty set to be selected according to The numbers in the table are the numbers of variable putty sets. In this example, 22 types of variable putty sets are prepared. In the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, when the 2R specific time short symbol 1 is to be stopped and displayed, when the value of the probability variation counter is in the remaining one state (limiter state “arrival”), the number 22 When a variable putty set is selected and the value of the probability variable counter is in the remaining 11 to 2 states (limiter state “not reached”), the 21st variable putty set is selected.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing a part of the variable putty set.

  The odd putty set is selected by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the special figure related lottery processing S1229 shown in FIG. 19, and is used from the special figure variation display started after the big hit game is finished. That is, the odd putty set is switched (updated) in the selection table shown in FIG. 95 when a big hit is made, and the correct putty used in the next symbol fluctuation display is specified every time the result of the determination is lost. Become. Here, the degree of success / failure determination result may be a degree of losing as a result of the determination of success / failure, a degree of use of a variable putty set, or the display of the variability display of losing starts. It may be performed each time, or it may be performed every time the display of the symbol change of the loss is finished. The change of the putty is selected, for example, in the special drawing related lottery process S1229 shown in FIG. 19, and is performed immediately before the change time is determined.

  In the odd putty set shown in FIG. 96 (a), only the symbol change display for 100 misses is specified, but the number of time reductions is 100 times, and from the 101st time, the state is in a non-time reduction state (ordinary low probability state). Transition. Further, in this embodiment, a big hit is always made in the probability variation state, and the special diagram is lost only in the non-probability variation state (special diagram low probability state). For this reason, from the 101st time, a default variable putty in the normal state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability) is set. Here, the default variable putty in the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability) is No. 22 variable putty, no matter how many times the pattern change display of losing continues, the variable putty is not changed, The variable putty X continues to be used. In addition, the default variable putty in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability) is the 21st variable putty, and no matter how many times the pattern change display of losing continues, the variable putty is not changed. Putty A continues to be used.

  For example, if the 18th odd putty set is selected in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, the odd putty B will be selected in the first lose pattern change display at the end of the big hit game, and the second lose pattern change In the display, the odd putty D is selected, in the third loss pattern change display, the odd putty Z is selected, in the 99th lose pattern change display, the odd putty A is selected and in the 100th lose pattern change. In the variable display, the variable putty Z is selected, and thereafter, the variable putty X continues to be used until it hits a big hit. The state using the modified putty B corresponds to an example of the first state, and the state using the modified putty D corresponds to an example of the second state.

  On the other hand, in the special figure high probability state, the special figure is always a big hit as described above, and when the big hit, the changed putty is changed, so that only the first putty changed putty is used.

  It should be noted that the variation time of the variation that is a big hit is determined using a previously set variable putty set or a default variable putty set corresponding to the control state.

  FIG. 96 (b) is a table showing the relationship between the timer number and the fluctuation time of the special figure.

  In timer number 1, the fluctuation time is 1 second, which is a super shortening fluctuation, and in timer 3 or more, it is a long fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more, which is called freeze. That is, there are a plurality of types of freezes (here, four types of freezes). The pachinko machine of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that earns a ball by making a game ball enter the electric figure 252, and a special figure variation for a long time of 60 seconds or more is performed in the electric support state. You can expect to earn a lot of balls by letting a game ball enter the electric Chu.

  In addition, you may add the timer which makes fluctuation time 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds. Alternatively, a timer exceeding 300 seconds may be added.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the contents of some variable putty.

  When the variable time is selected using the variable putty, a special figure variable time determining random number is used. The special figure variation time determination random number is a random number having a range of 0 to 255. Each variable putty has a random number range that is divided into big hits and loses. FIG. 97 shows the size of the random number range.

  In the variable putty X, which is the default variable putty in the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability), the timer 3 is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of whether it is a big hit or lost, and the probability variable state (special In the default variable putty A (the figure high probability normal figure high probability), the super short timer 1 is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss. On the other hand, in the odd putty Z, the super-short timer 1 is selected with a probability of 100% if it is a big hit, but if it is lost, the timer 6 with the longest freeze is selected with a probability of 100%.

  In the variable putty set 18 shown in FIG. 96, if it loses once, 60 seconds of freeze is selected in the second loss, and timer 6 (300 seconds) of the longest freeze is selected in the third loss. In the present embodiment, a variable putty set is provided in which a symbol variation display that is more advantageous to the player, that is, a symbol variation display with a long variation time is more easily performed as the number of loses increases.

  In the present embodiment, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the lost symbol fluctuation display tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state. In addition, in the non-probability change state, the fluctuation time of the lost symbol change display tends to be longer than in the probability change state. That is, in the special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state, the fluctuation time of the symbol variation display of the loss tends to be longer than that in the special figure high-probability normal figure high-probability state. In addition, in the special figure low-probability normal figure high-probability state, the variation time of the symbol variation display of the loss tends to be longer than in the special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state.

  FIG. 98 and FIG. 99 are flowcharts showing the operations of the normal map change display, the electric Chu, the special map change display, and the attacker. In FIGS. 98 and 99, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  In FIG. 98 (a), in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, the normal figure fluctuation display is performed and the normal figure is hit, and while the electric chew is opened, a short special figure fluctuation display is performed. Win a jackpot. The big hit here is a big hit with 2R probability-variable electric support, and the probability variation counter is reset to a specified number of times. And before the electric Chu closes, the attacker opens twice. Even in the second map change display, the map is per map, and while the electric chew is open, a short special map change display is performed, but the special figure losing symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 98 (b), the normal map change display is performed to reach the normal map, and a relatively long special map change display is started while the electric chew is open. This long special figure fluctuation display continues until the second electric chew release period, and after a second electric chew release is started, the special figure losing symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 98 (c), in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, the normal figure fluctuation display is performed and the normal figure is hit, and while the electric chew is open, the very long special figure fluctuation display ( Freeze) is started. The very long special figure fluctuation display continues even during the second electric-chu release period, and even after the second electric-chu release period ends, the very long special figure fluctuation display still continues.

  FIG. 99 (a) shows a continuation of FIG. 98 (c). Again, the normal map change display is performed, the normal map is reached, and the electric Chu opens for the third time. The display is still continued, and ends during the fourth electric-chu release period, and the special symbol losing symbol is stopped and displayed. As shown in this example, when a long-time special symbol change is performed, it can be expected that a game ball is made to enter the electric chew to earn a considerable amount of balls.

  In FIG. 99 (b), in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, the normal figure fluctuation display is performed and the normal figure is hit, and while the electric chew is open, a short special figure fluctuation display is performed. Win a jackpot. The big hit here is a big hit with 2R probability variation electric support, and the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by one. And before the electric Chu closes, the attacker opens twice. In the second time of the normal fluctuation display, it will be per common figure, and while the electric Chu is open, a short special figure fluctuation display will be performed, and here also the big hit with the electric support with 2R probability variation will be won, The value is further subtracted by 1. And before the electric Chu closes, the attacker opens twice.

  FIG. 100A is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the present embodiment.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (a) has a specified remaining number display area 2081 in the upper left, a holding number display area 2083 in the normal map, a hit / fail judgment result notification area 2084 in the normal map, and the presence / absence of the special map. A determination result notification area 2085 is provided. In the state shown in FIG. 100A, “MAX” is displayed in the specified remaining number display area 2081, the value of the probability variation counter is 11 times, and the control state is the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state.

  In addition, “3” is displayed in the hold number display area 2083 of the normal map, and a white circle icon indicating the hit of the normal map is displayed in the normal determination result notification area 2084 of the normal map. Further, in the special figure determination result notification area 2085, a number “7” representing a big hit with a certain probability is displayed.

  In addition, at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208, four small-sized first special figure pseudo hold display areas 4010 are arranged in a vertical line. Large-sized second special figure pseudo hold display areas 4020 are arranged in a horizontal row. In the present embodiment, the operation of the special symbol variation display is not suspended. That is, there is no special figure hold memory, but for special effects, a special figure pseudo hold is displayed. This display is an effect icon, and is hereinafter referred to as a special figure pseudo hold display G.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable putty set shown in FIG. 96 (a) is selected, if the lossy symbol variation display continues, the variable putty is updated in units of symbol variation display. For this reason, at the time when the odd putty set is selected, it is possible to know which odd putty is used in the number of symbol fluctuation display. Information representing the variable putty set selected by the main control unit 300 is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 that controls the effect. The ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 also stores data representing the variable putty set shown in FIG. 96 (a), and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the number of times based on the information from the main control unit 300. In the symbol variation display, it can be seen which variation putty is used.

  FIG. 100B is a diagram showing a display mode of the special figure pseudo hold display.

  As a display form of the special figure pseudo hold display G, a default display form, a modified form of the default display form, and a display form of a pattern of a plurality of types of characters are prepared.

  The default display mode is a circular figure with no pattern and one color (here, gray). The deformation mode of the default display mode is a circular figure with a pattern, as will be described later. As a display mode of a plurality of kinds of character patterns, a display mode (display mode A) of a character pattern of an old character, a display mode (display mode B) of a pattern of a spider character, and the like shown in FIG. The display mode (display mode C) of the design of the character of No. and the display mode (display mode D) of the pattern of the Bancho are prepared. The display mode shown below in FIG. 100 (b) is more advantageous for the player. In other words, the special symbol pseudo hold display G indicates how advantageous (expected) symbol variation display of the special symbol to be started in the future will be for the player. As you can see, when a long-time special symbol display is performed, it is expected that a game ball can enter the electric chew and earn a significant amount of the ball. It indicates the possibility of being In other words, the special figure pseudo hold display G is a notice display regarding the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure to be started in the future. More specifically, it is a display for notifying the appearance of long-term fluctuation (freeze) of the special figure and the length of the freeze time. When the special-pseudo pseudo-hold display of the display mode D appears, the player can know how long the long-time change (freeze) takes place and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the deformation | transformation aspect of a default display aspect may prepare several types according to a player's advantage, and may prepare the aspect corresponding to display aspect AD.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (a), the special figure pseudo hold display G corresponding to the latest four fluctuations is displayed in a large second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 arranged side by side. Is done. Of the special figure pseudo hold display displayed in the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, the symbol change of the special figure is performed earlier as it is displayed on the left side. That is, the special figure pseudo hold display G displayed in the leftmost second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 represents the next fluctuation. In the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 of small size arranged in the vertical example, a special figure pseudo hold display G corresponding to the next four fluctuations corresponding to the latest four fluctuations is displayed. Of the special figure pseudo-holding display G displayed in the first special figure pseudo-holding display area 4010, the symbol displayed on the lower side is changed more quickly.

  The special figure pseudo hold display G shifts at the timing when the special figure symbol display is started. That is, the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 is shifted to the left and the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 is shifted to the lower side. The special figure pseudo hold display G displayed in the lowermost first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 is shifted and displayed in the rightmost second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020. In FIG. 100A, the direction of the shift display is indicated by a gray arrow.

  In the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, a special figure pseudo hold display G is displayed in a default display form or a modified form of the default display form, and in the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, The special figure pseudo hold display G is displayed in any one of the display modes A to D shown in FIG. When the special figure pseudo hold display G of the default display mode displayed in the lowermost first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 is shifted and displayed in the rightmost second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, The display mode changes to one of the display modes A to D.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether to change to any one of the display modes A to D by lottery.

  FIG. 100C is a diagram illustrating a lottery table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 and used for lottery of display modes.

  When this lottery is performed, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a dedicated random number (possible range is 0 to 255). In the lottery table shown in FIG. 100C, a random number range is defined for each variable putty set. In FIG. 100C, the size of the random number range is shown. In FIG. 100 (c), the size of the random number range is shown. For example, when information representing the first variable putty set is sent from the main control unit 300 to the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, the probability of 112/256 in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. Then, the table data in the uppermost column in FIG. 100 (c) is selected. In this table data, the special figure pseudo hold display G corresponding to the first special map fluctuation display is displayed in the display mode A, and the special figure pseudo hold display G corresponding to the second special map fluctuation display is also displayed in the display mode A. Display,... Are defined for 100 variations. The RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter that counts how many times the symbol variation display of the special symbol has been performed after selecting the table data (how many variations have occurred). Note that the main control unit 300 may transmit to the first sub-control unit 400 how many times the symbol variation display of the special figure has been selected (how many variations have occurred) after selecting the variable putty set. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 displays the special display pseudo hold display G of the default display mode displayed in the lowermost first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 as the second right special map pseudo hold. When the shift display is performed in the display area 4020, based on the table data selected here and the number of changes, the special figure pseudo hold display G is displayed in any one of the display forms A to D. The display mode of is changed.

  Instead of such table data, the display mode may be determined by lottery every time a special symbol variation display is started. In addition, the reliability of the display mode of the special figure pseudo hold display G may be 100% (all true) or less than 100% (may be false).

  In the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the display mode according to the variable putty used after eight fluctuations in the uppermost first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 every time the variable putty is changed. A special figure pseudo hold display G of default or modified mode is displayed. In addition, whenever the odd putty is changed, the right special display pseudo-holding display area 4020 on the right end displays a special figure of the display mode (any one of the display modes A to D) corresponding to the changed putty used after four changes. A pseudo hold display G is displayed.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100A, the variable display area 4030 is also provided on the left side of the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020. In the fluctuation display area 4030, the special figure pseudo hold display G displayed in the leftmost second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 is shifted and displayed when the special figure symbol display is started. A display relating to the variation time of the symbol variation display (design variation display) of the started special symbol is performed. The display related to the fluctuation time here is the display of the value representing the fluctuation time, the question mark, the surprise mark, the character “mystery” as described later, the X mark indicating that it is not freeze, and the freeze. It may be a “rush” that represents what happened. The display of the value representing the variation time may be a true value representing the variation time of the selected timer number, or may be a false value different from the variation time of the selected timer number. . Here, a value indicating 60 seconds of “+60 ticks” is displayed in a star-shaped mark.

  The number of first special figure pseudo hold display areas 4010 and the number of second special figure pseudo hold display areas 4020 are examples, and may be more or less than four, respectively. Moreover, you may abbreviate | omit the small 1st special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 located in a line in the vertical example. Further, from the stage of displaying in the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, the special figure pseudo hold display G may be displayed in any one of the display forms A to D. Also, the special figure pseudo hold display G may be displayed in the default display mode even in the large second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 arranged side by side. That is, even when the display is shifted from the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 to the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, it may be changed to any one of the display forms A to D. It may be good or it may not change. Further, the display mode may be changed in the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, or the display mode may be changed in the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020. For example, the display mode A may be changed from the default display mode, or the display mode A may be changed from the display mode A. The timing of this change may be during symbol variation or during shift movement. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (a), other displays are also performed, but other displays are omitted for clarity of the figure.

  Next, specific effects in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner how the probability variation counter is reset to the specified number of times during consecutive days.

  In the specified remaining number display area 2081 provided at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (a), “remaining 5 times” is shown, and it is notified that the limiter reaches 5 times. In addition, “3” is displayed in the usual-pending number display area 2083 in the upper right, and it is also notified that the number of usual-pending holds is three. Further, a white circle icon representing a normal figure is displayed in the success / failure determination result notification area 2084, and it is notified that the special figure is being displayed in the symbol variation in the special determination result determination / notification area 2085. In the center of the decorative design display device 208, a design of the Tono-sama character is displayed. The control state is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

  In the special figure success / failure determination result notification area 2085 shown in FIG. 101 (b), the special symbol design change display is terminated, and a number “S” representing a big hit without any probability change is displayed. In other words, it is notified that the big hit that will cause the limiter to be released has been won.

  In FIG. 101 (c), a family crest character 2478 as an example of the effect moving means falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pattern of the Tono-sama character that has been displayed so far cannot be seen. It should be noted that the family crest character 2478 may be dropped before the “S” number representing the big hit without probability change is displayed in the success / failure determination result notification area 2085 or may be dropped simultaneously with the display.

  In addition, “MAX” is displayed in the specified remaining number display area 2081 shown in FIG. 101 (c), the value of the probability variation counter is 11 times, and the control state shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. ing. Here, the variable putty set used from the next symbol variation display is changed, and information representing the new variable putty set is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 101 (d) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. On the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (d), four small-sized first special figure pseudo hold display areas 4010 are displayed side by side in a vertical row, and at the bottom are four large sizes. The second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 is displayed side by side in a horizontal row, and the fluctuation display area 4030 is also displayed on the left side. However, neither the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 nor the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 shows the special figure pseudo hold display G. This is because the first sub-control unit 400 waits for an interrupt process of the effect control process (step S309), waits for an instruction command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the drawing process of the second sub-control unit 500. This is a delay in display due to a time lag caused by waiting for processing.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 101 in stages.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a), the time lag is eliminated and a special figure pseudo hold display is displayed. That is, in the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, special figure pseudo hold displays G11, G13, and G14 in three default display modes (patternless display modes) are displayed. In the special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, a special figure pseudo hold display G12 in a modified form (display form with a pattern) of the default display form is displayed. The special figure pseudo hold display G12 in a modified form (display form with a pattern) in the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 is advantageous to the player when the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 is shifted and displayed. It is a display mode for notifying that there is a possibility of changing to a different display mode. However, the reliability for changing to an advantageous display mode may be 100% (true notice) or less than 100% (false notice). In addition, a special figure pseudo hold display G21 according to the display mode A is displayed at the left end in the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, and a special figure pseudo hold display G22 according to the display mode B is displayed second from the left. The special figure pseudo hold display G23 according to the display mode C is displayed second from the right, and the special figure pseudo hold display G21 according to the display mode A is displayed at the right end. Note that the special symbol display has not yet started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (b), the special symbol pseudo-holding of the display mode A, which is displayed at the left end in the second special-figure pseudo-holding display area 4010, is started. The display G21 is shifted and displayed in the variable display area 4030. In the change display area 4030, a question mark is displayed in a star-shaped mark. In addition, the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 and the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 are also shifted and displayed from the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 to the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4010. The special figure pseudo hold display G11 that has been shifted and displayed in the area 4020 and has been the default display mode until then is changed to the special figure pseudo hold display G14 according to the display mode A. In addition, the special figure pseudo hold display according to the deformation mode (display mode with a pattern) is shifted and displayed in the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 from the bottom. It should be noted that the number displayed in the usual figure hold number display area 2083 is “2”, and the symbol change display for the next ordinary figure is also started.

  The question mark displayed in the star-shaped mark in the fluctuation display area 4030 immediately changes to a cross. This change timing may be simultaneously with the end of the symbol variation of the special figure.

  In the fluctuation display area 4030 shown in FIG. 102 (c), a cross is displayed to notify that the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure is not frozen. Here, the symbol variation display of the special figure is one second of the ultrashort variation. In the special determination result notification area 2085 shown in FIG. 102 (c), “8” Chinese numerals representing a loss are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (d), the stop display of the “8” Chinese numerals indicating the special figure loss continues, and the star mark itself disappears from the variable display area 4030. ing.

  103 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102 in stages.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (a), the second symbol variation display of the special symbol is started, and the special feature of the display mode B displayed at the left end in the second special diagram pseudo hold display area 4010 is displayed. The pseudo-pending display G21 is shifted and displayed in the fluctuation display area 4030. In the fluctuation display area 4030, a surprise mark is displayed in a star-shaped mark. In addition, the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 and the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 are also shifted and displayed from the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 to the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4010. The special figure pseudo hold display G11, which has been shifted in the area 4020 and has been in a deformed form (display form with a pattern), has changed to the special figure pseudo hold display G14 according to the most advantageous display form D. It should be noted that the number displayed in the usual figure hold number display area 2083 is “1”, and the symbol change display for the next ordinary figure is also started.

  In the fluctuation display area 4030 shown in FIG. 103 (b), a cross is displayed to notify that the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure is not frozen. The symbol variation display of the special figure here is 10 seconds. In the special determination result notifying area 2085 shown in FIG. 102 (c), “6” Chinese numerals representing the loss are displayed. In addition, a picture of a princess character appears in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a balloon “Next may be frozen?” Is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (c), the special symbol display of the third special symbol is started, and the special symbol of the display mode C displayed at the left end in the second special symbol pseudo hold display area 4010 is displayed. The pseudo-pending display G21 is shifted and displayed in the fluctuation display area 4030. In the fluctuation display area 4030, “mystery” is displayed in a star mark. In addition, shift display is also performed in each of the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 and the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020. It should be noted that the number displayed in the usual-pending number-of-holds display area 2083 is “0”, and the symbol change display for the next usual figure is also started.

  104 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 103 in stages.

  FIG. 104 (a) shows a state during the symbol variation display of the third special symbol, and the symbol variation display of the special symbol is a variation of 60 seconds that is frozen. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (a), a value for 60 seconds of “+60 ticks” is displayed on the pattern of the princess character displayed at the center of the screen. Further, in the fluctuation display area 4030, “entry” is displayed in a star-shaped mark.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (b), the display in the variable display area 4030 disappears. Instead, a numerical display of the remaining 59 minutes is added below the specified remaining number display area 2081 at the upper left. The symbol variation display of the special figure continues. The numerical display additionally displayed is a display representing the remaining time of the symbol variation display of the special figure. The area for displaying the remaining time of the symbol variation display of the special figure is hereinafter referred to as a remaining time display area 2086, and the numerical value displayed in the remaining time display area 2086 decreases with time. Go.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner a situation where a jackpot with probability variation is won in a state where the specified number of times is set in the probability variation counter. The following description will focus on the differences from the example shown in FIG.

  In the specified remaining number display area 2081 provided at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (a), “MAX” is displayed, and it is notified that the limit has been reached 11 times. In addition, in the special figure success / failure determination result notification area 2085, the “8” Chinese numerals representing the loss are displayed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. The control state here is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. Note that a pattern of a princess character is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 105 (b), the special symbol pseudo-holding display G21 of the display mode A, which has been displayed at the left end in the second special-figure pseudo-holding display area 4010, is started. A shift display is performed in an area 4030. In the variable display area 4030, “pinch” is displayed in a star mark. This “pinch” display suggests that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot with a probability variation in which the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by one, and corresponds to a kind of a normal notice effect or a prefetch notice effect.

  In the special figure success / failure determination result notification area 2085 shown in FIG. 105 (c), the special symbol variation display is terminated, and a number "7" representing a big hit with probability variation is displayed, as shown in FIG. In the prescribed remaining number display area 2081, the display that has been “MAX” so far is the display of “remaining 10 times”. Further, the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, the eight special figure pseudo hold display, and the fluctuation display area 4030 which have been displayed so far disappear. Yes. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the pattern of the princess character is the pattern of the Tono-sama character. The switching timing from the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (c) to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (d) may be during the big hit game or the big hit game ends. It may be later. Also, instead of switching at a stretch, the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 disappears, and then the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 disappears, etc. There may be. Further, the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 and the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 may be left, and only the special figure pseudo hold display may disappear.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of an extra effect in stages.

  The state shown in FIG. 106 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 103 (c) except that the numbers displayed in the reserved number display area 2083 of the ordinary map are the same. The display has started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b), all the displays such as the special figure pseudo hold display are temporarily turned off, and the character display of “special effect” is made. The special effect here is equivalent to an extra effect. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (c), a display that makes an image of the addition (addition) of 150 seconds “+150 ticks” instead of the character display of “special effect” is made.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d), the display of the specified remaining number display area 2081, the reserved number display area 2083 of the normal map, the determination result notification area 2084, and the determination result notification area 2085 of the special figure is restored. In addition, a remaining time display area 2086 is added below the specified remaining number of times display area 2081, the numerical value display for the remaining 149 seconds is not performed, and the special symbol variation display is continued. In addition, the design of the samurai character has appeared. The effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d) is one type of freeze-only effect. During the execution of the freeze-only effect here, the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, and the special figure pseudo hold display remain off, but the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 remains. The figure pseudo hold display area 4010 and the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 may remain, and only the special figure pseudo hold display may disappear. The freeze-only effect may be changed depending on the length of the freeze time (in this embodiment, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 150 seconds, or 300 seconds). Here, a freeze-only effect with a freeze time of 150 seconds is executed.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of staged production failure step by step. Hereinafter, a description will be given focusing on differences from the example shown in FIG.

  Even in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (b), all the displays such as the special figure pseudo hold display disappear once and the character display of “special effect” is made, but the decoration shown in FIG. 107 (c). In the symbol display device 208, the character display of “sorry” is performed, which is an example of the failure of the scooping effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d), the display once disappeared is restored except for the display in the variable display area 4030, and a special figure pseudo hold display or the like is displayed. Instead of returning at once, the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 is restored, then the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 is restored, and so on in stages. It may be a mode of going.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a modification of the extra effect shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 108, the timer 5 (150 seconds) shown in FIG. 108 is selected. At the start of the symbol variation display, the remaining time display area 2086 in the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “60 remaining time”. Is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (a), the special symbol variation display continues, and the remaining time display area 2086 displays “29 remaining time”.

  In this example, when the numerical display in the remaining time display area 2086 is less than “30 remaining minutes”, an extra effect is started. Here, the duel scene of the main character and the enemy role is displayed, and after the ten-second duel, the main character's spear wins.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (b), the main character's kite wins and a display of “+90” is displayed. Next, although not shown in the figure, the numerical value display in the remaining time display area 2086 becomes “the remaining 109 ticks”, and it appears as if the variable time is added (added), and the interest of the game may be improved.

  In this way, in FIG. 108, a value representing the remaining time of the fluctuation time is initially displayed in a small amount, and an additional effect is performed when the value is later returned to the correct value.

  The extra effect may be performed in a plurality of times during the one-time freeze symbol variation display. For example, “+30 ticks” may appear three times. On the contrary, first, a large number of values indicating the remaining time of the fluctuation time may be displayed, and when returning to the correct value later, a subtraction effect (for example, “−90 ticks”) may be performed. Furthermore, while the value representing the remaining time of the fluctuation time is displayed correctly at first, the numerical display in the remaining time display area 2086 can be reduced at an early timing, and an additional effect can be performed. The numerical display in the area 2086 can be decreased at a later timing to produce a subtraction effect.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a fake extra effect.

  Even in the example shown in FIG. 109, when the superimposing effect is started, the duel scene of the protagonist and the enemy role is displayed. In this example, the enemy character escapes after the duel of 10 seconds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (b), a hero who has escaped to an enemy role is displayed. The numerical value display in the remaining time display area 2086 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “19 remaining minutes”, and thereafter, it decreases one by one with the passage of time.

  110 is a diagram showing an example in which a big bonus effect is executed as a special effect in stages, FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 110, and FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. is there.

  The state shown in FIG. 110 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 103 (c) except that the numbers displayed in the reserved number display area 2083 of the ordinary map are the same except for the change in the special symbol. The display has started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (b), all the displays such as the special figure pseudo hold display are temporarily turned off, and the character display of “special effect” is made. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (c), “BIG BONUS” is displayed instead of “special effect”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (a), a big bonus effect screen is displayed, and a remaining time display area 2086 and the like are also displayed. Has been.

  In the big bonus effect, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the symbol matching effect may be started when the numerical display in the remaining time display area 2086 falls below “10 remaining time”. Here, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), “7-7-7” is aligned at the timing of “3 remaining minutes”, and as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the “remaining time display area 2086” shows “remaining time”. 149 ”is displayed, and the addition (addition) of the variation time is performed.

  In the second big bonus effect, the symbol matching effect is not started, and “time remaining 0” is displayed in the remaining time display area 2086 shown in FIG. 112 (b). As shown in FIG. 112 (c), The disappeared display is restored except for the display in the fluctuation display area 4030, and a special figure pseudo hold display or the like is displayed. It should be noted that a letter “F” indicating freeze / lost is displayed in the determination result notification area 2085. In the end, here, the longest-frozen timer 6 (300 seconds) is the symbol variation display.

  It should be noted that the amount of one-time addition may be reduced, and the addition may be performed a plurality of times with success in the design matching effect. For example, if the amount of one time addition is set to 30, in the case of the timer 6 of 300 seconds, it is possible to add five consecutive resorts, and the entertainment of the game may be further improved. Further, even in the design matching effect, an effect may be performed in which the added amount is reduced when an even number is aligned, and the added amount is increased when an odd number is aligned. Furthermore, when the symbols are arranged, an effect display such as a big hit may be performed and added.

  FIG. 113A and FIG. 113B are diagrams showing examples in which the background display is different.

  For example, when the selected putty set is advantageous for the player, the normal background display shown in FIG. 113 (a) may be varied as shown in FIG. 113 (b). The case where it is advantageous here is a case where there is a special figure pseudo hold display of a display mode (for example, display mode D) advantageous for the player among the last four special figure pseudo hold displays. In this case, there are cases in which the last four variable putty includes a variable putty for which a freeze fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more can be selected. In addition, even if all of the latest four special figure pseudo hold display modes are the same, the background display may or may not change to the background display of FIG. For example, if the execution of the background display change is lottery, for example, even if there is a special figure pseudo hold display of the display mode D, the background shown in FIG. It is. The background display is an example, and the idea here may be reflected in other effects.

  FIG. 113 (c) is a diagram showing a state when the symbol variation display of the special figure is performed 98 times after the strange putty set is selected.

  That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (c) is the one when the special figure is lost 98 times after the odd putty set is selected, and the determination result notification area shown in FIG. 113 (c). In 2085, “6” Chinese numerals representing the loss are displayed. No first special figure pseudo hold display is displayed in the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 is leftmost. The special figure pseudo hold display G21 of the display mode A is displayed, and the special figure pseudo hold display G22 of the display mode different from usual is displayed second from the left. This different display mode (in this case, “end” is displayed in a star-shaped mark) is a display mode that means the end of the variable putty set. That is, the second special figure pseudo hold display G22 from the left corresponds to the 100th symbol variation display, and from the 101st, the variable putty set becomes the default variable putty X in the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability). Switch.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the promotion effect using the special figure pseudo hold display.

  In the special figure success / failure determination result notification area 2085 shown in FIG. 114 (a), “8” Chinese numerals representing a loss are displayed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure is stopped. Further, in the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, from the left, the special figure pseudo hold display G21 of the display mode B, the special figure pseudo hold display G22 of the display mode C, and the special figure pseudo hold display G23 of the display mode A are displayed. The special figure pseudo hold display G24 of the display mode A is displayed. Also, at the bottom of the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, a special figure pseudo hold display G11 in a deformed form (display form with a pattern) is displayed.

  In FIG. 114 (b), the special symbol variation display of the special diagram is started, and the special diagram pseudo hold display G 21 of the display mode B moves to the variation display region 4030. Also, the modified special figure pseudo hold display G11 displayed at the bottom of the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 moves to the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, and the display mode changes. To do. The promotion effect is executed in synchronization with the change in the display mode. Here, the special figure pseudo hold display G23, 24 which was the display mode A in FIG. 114 (b) is the special figure pseudo hold display of the display mode D in which the advantage is increased in FIG. It changes to G22,23. That is, when the fifth special figure pseudo hold display is hot that can be expected to freeze, and moves to the fourth display area (second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 on the right end) where it becomes clear In addition, promotion promotion is performed. In addition, the timing of this promotion effect is various, may be during the symbol variation display, may be the timing when the symbol variation display ends, or is the timing when the symbol variation display of the ordinary diagram is stopped Alternatively, the timing at which the electric chew is released may be used. The promotion effect may also be performed in the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010. Furthermore, a demote presentation (change to an unfavorable display mode) may be performed.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010, the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020, and the special figure pseudo hold display are displayed even during execution of the freeze-only effect. 116 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115.

  In the example shown in FIG. 115, a special effect is started in FIG. 11B, and a display of “+150 ticks” of 150 seconds added (addition) is made in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (d), the display once disappeared is restored except for the display in the variable display area 4030, and a special figure pseudo hold display or the like is displayed. Also has a special figure pseudo hold display. However, the display mode of the special map pseudo hold display that is re-displayed is a dedicated display mode, unlike the display mode before the start of the special effect (see FIG. 5A). The special figure pseudo hold display areas G10 to G14 of the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 are hexagonal display modes, and the special figure pseudo hold display areas G21 to G24 of the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 are: It is a picture of the character of a Minowa that imitates a cactus. Here, only the second special figure pseudo hold display G23 from the right is a display form with a pattern that is different from the other special figure pseudo hold displays G21, G22, and G24. This display mode with a pattern corresponds to the display mode D and is a display mode indicating that it is advantageous to the player.

  The timing at which the special figure pseudo hold display is redisplayed may be the same as the timing at which other display such as the specified remaining number display area 2081 is restored, or may be earlier than the restoration timing. Or later. Further, after the special figure pseudo hold display in the first special figure pseudo hold display area 4010 is first redisplayed, the special figure pseudo hold display in the second special figure pseudo hold display area 4020 may be redisplayed. Well, the opposite may be the case. Or you may redisplay one by one in order from the upstream of the gray arrow shown to Fig.100 (a), and may redisplay one by one in reverse order.

  In the remaining time display area 2086 shown in FIG. 116 (a), “140 remaining time” is displayed, and 10 time has elapsed since the special-pseudo pseudo hold display is displayed again. Here, every time this 10 minutes elapses, the special figure pseudo hold display is shifted and displayed. That is, instead of each time the symbol variation display is started, when a predetermined time elapses during the freeze, the special-pseudo pseudo hold display shift display is performed. Therefore, although it is really one outlier change, it seems to the player that a plurality of special figure pseudo-holdings are consumed. In FIG. 116 (b), the special figure pseudo hold display G23 that has been displayed second from the right so far is shifted and displayed as the second special figure pseudo hold display G22 from the left. In the fluctuation display area 4030, no star mark is displayed, and only a cross is displayed.

  In the remaining time display area 2086 shown in FIG. 116 (c), “120 remaining hours” is displayed, and a special figure pseudo-holding display with a pattern shown in FIG. 116 (b) (G22 in FIG. 116 (b)). Is shifted and displayed in the fluctuation display area 4030. In the fluctuation display area 4030, “30” is displayed in a star-shaped mark. In this example, the special figure pseudo hold display of the display mode with the pattern is a display for notifying that the addition is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (d), a display that gives an image of an addition (addition) of 30 seconds of “+30 ticks” is made, and the numerical display displayed in the remaining time display area 2086 is “150 ticks remaining”. Therefore, the addition of 30 minutes is performed.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a modification of this embodiment.

  FIG. 117 (a) is a table showing timer types selected at the time of big hit, and FIG. 117 (b) is a table showing timer types selected at the time of loss. The longest fluctuation time at the time of big hit is 180 seconds, and the longest fluctuation time at the time of losing is 120 seconds. Note that the longest fluctuation time at the time of losing may be 180 seconds or 180 seconds or more.

  Also in this modification, the variable putty is selected according to the variable putty set.

  FIG. 117C is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold display in the modification.

  In this modification, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are prepared, and the special figure hold is stored in each, and the hold display shown in FIG. 117 (c) represents the true special figure hold. . The hold display (hold icon) shown on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (c) represents the hold in FIG. In addition, on the right side, the hold display of special figure 2 is shown, but here it is a white circle display, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 0. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (c), the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol is performed. Furthermore, on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol 2089 that is lit gray during the symbol variation display is also displayed.

  Of the four hold displays h11 to h14 of FIG. 117 (c) shown in FIG. 117 (c), the third hold display 13 from the left is the display form in which the characters “celebration” are displayed in a star shape. It is. The other hold displays h11, h12, h14 are default display modes. The star-shaped hold display h13 is a hold display that suggests that the symbol variation display of the timer 19 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is performed. That is, it corresponds to a jackpot look-ahead notice. Here, the reliability of the jackpot may be 100% (big hit confirmed) or less than 100% (including false). Therefore, the star-shaped hold display h13 notifies that the symbol variation display advantageous to the player is started before the symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 117 (d) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 when the star-shaped hold display h13 is digested and the symbol variation display based on the hold represented by the hold display h13 is being performed. In this decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and one default hold display h11 of the special symbol 1 is displayed. This hold display h11 is a display in which the hold display h14 at the right end shown in FIG.

  FIG. 117 (e) is a diagram showing a state where a special effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (d), and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed small in the upper right. Special effects here include, for example, super reach effects. After this special effect, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the strange putty set is updated to a new strange putty set.

  In addition, even if it develops into a special effect, the losing symbol may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the star-shaped hold display h13 is a false pre-reading notice.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of variable putty sets are prepared. In the first control state, a variable putty set that is more advantageous than the second control state is easily selected. Furthermore, an aspect in which an advantageous variable putty set is selected only in the first control state may be employed. The first control state mentioned here may be a non-probable change state, an electric support state, or a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (for example, limiter release) State). The second control state may be a probabilistic state, a non-electric support state, a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, or a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal State).

  Further, in the non-limiter release state (the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state or the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state), the variable putty set at the time of the big hit may not be updated. Further, although the variable putty set is updated in the non-limiter release state, an advantageous variable putty set may not be selected.

  In addition, the variable putty set may be different between the stop display of the jackpot symbol without probability change in the normal state (so-called limiter release symbol) and the stop display of the jackpot symbol without probability change in the short time state (electric support state). .

  In addition, when the number of consecutive loses exceeds a predetermined number, the subsequent symbol variation display may be an advantageous symbol variation display (for example, a symbol variation display with a long variation time), which is disadvantageous at all. It may be a symbol variation display.

  In addition, the number of special figure pseudo hold indications may be the same as the number of hold of the usual figure, or may be more or less than the number of hold of the usual figure. Further, even if the different putty set is different, the display mode of the special figure pseudo hold display does not change, but as shown in FIG. 113 (b), a part of the background display may be different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, it is per 100% of the special figure at the time of probability change, but in the case of the pachinko machine that may be lost even at the time of probability change, the variable putty may not be changed even at the time of probability change. Alternatively, the change putty may be changed according to the change putty set, but the player's advantage may not be changed. Note that in the case of the probability variation per 100%, the special diagram may be hit with a probability of 10% or more when the probability variation is not. Furthermore, it may be possible to hit 100% with a normal probability at the time of electric support.

  Also, in this embodiment, freeze (long variation) is performed with the symbol variation display of loss, but it is also possible to perform freeze (long variation) with big hit symbol variation display, or freeze (long variation) with small symbol variation display. ) May be performed.

  Further, when the electric support state shifts to the non-electric support state in the limiter release state, the special figure pseudo hold display is displayed in a different display form (in the star-shaped mark shown in FIG. 113 (c)). May be displayed in such a manner that “end” is displayed on the screen. In addition, even when an advantageous variable putty set can be selected (when the limiter is released or when the limiter is reached), the special figure pseudo hold display is different from the usual display mode (for example, “Toku” is displayed in a star-shaped mark. Display mode).

  Furthermore, the timing at which the variable putty changes (the advantage state changes) may be the timing at which the control state (normal state, certain change state, short time state (electric support state)) changes. On the other hand, the period during which the odd putty does not change (the advantage state does not change) may be a predetermined period after the small hit game, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation display periods after the big hit game, In the case of specific loss, the odd putty may not be changed.

  Also, when the odd putty changes, the longest loss variation time itself changes, the longest loss variation selection rate changes, the shortest loss variation time itself changes, or the shortest loss variation selection rate changes. Or you may. On the other hand, when the change putty changes, the longest loss fluctuation time itself changes, but the selection ratio of the longest loss fluctuation does not need to change. Moreover, even if the odd putty changes, the variation time of the jackpot need not be changed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, there is no special figure hold, a limiter machine equipped with a probability variation counter and earned by electric Chu, but other pachinko machines in this embodiment are also in the present embodiment Technical ideas can be applied. In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the number of prize balls for electric Chu is larger than the number of prize balls for attackers. This can be adjusted by the number of winning balls for one winning, as well as by the difference in the opening time and the number of times of opening between the electric Chu and the attacker. Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure is longer in the longest variation time than the longest variation time per hit, and the type of the variation time in the loss than the number of types of variation times per hit There are more numbers. Furthermore, the special figure loss time in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state (for example, the limiter release state) is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure loss time in the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). The longest fluctuation time of the special figure in the probabilistic state is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure in the probabilistic state, and the longest fluctuation time of the special figure in the non-probable state is longer. The longest fluctuation time of the special figure in the electric support state is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the loss time.

In the above description,
“Attempt determination means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a determination of success / failure (for example, drawing of a special figure);
A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234 (attacker)) capable of at least performing a big hit operation (for example, an opening operation);
A notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least notification;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol variation display is capable of at least executing a symbol pattern stop display corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display.
The variable winning means can start the jackpot operation after a first symbol mode (for example, a jackpot symbol mode) is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit,
The first symbol aspect is a symbol aspect corresponding to a jackpot in the result of the success / failure determination,
The symbol variation display can start the symbol variation display in the first state,
The symbol variation display cannot start the symbol variation display in the second state,
The first state is one of a plurality of types of non-hit states,
The second state is a jackpot state,
The jackpot state is a state including at least a state where the jackpot operation is performed,
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a first non-hit state (for example, a normal state (non-electric support state),
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a second non-hit state (for example, electric support state),
The second non-hit state is an advantageous state over the first non-hit state,
The second non-hit state is a state that can be shifted after the big hit state,
The second non-hit state is a state including at least a power support state,
The symbol display means is capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display (for example, a short variation symbol variation display) corresponding to a first symbol variation display mode (for example, a state using the variable putty B). ,
The symbol display means can execute at least a second symbol variation display (for example, a long variation symbol variation display) corresponding to a second symbol variation display mode (for example, a state using the variable putty D). ,
The first symbol variation display mode is at least one of a plurality of types of symbol variation display modes (for example, a state using the variable putty A to Z),
The second symbol variation display mode is at least one of the plural types of symbol variation display modes,
The second symbol variation display is more advantageous to the player than the first symbol variation display, and the notification means executes the first notification before the execution of the second symbol variation display is started. It is possible (for example, can be notified by the display mode of the special figure pseudo hold display G),
The first notification at least suggests that the second symbol variation display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Since the first notification at least suggests that the second symbol variation display is performed, there is a false suggestion that is notified even if the second symbol variation display is not performed. However, it is also possible to notify at least the time when the second symbol variation display is performed (for example, after what variation is performed).

In addition, “the second symbol variation display mode is more easily determined than the first symbol variation display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, "We have a starting area where game balls can enter at least,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The establishment requirement of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “comprising a symbol display control means capable of executing at least the control of the symbol display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the symbol display control means is capable of at least executing a control to suspend the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the establishment requirement of the hold condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the symbol display control means is capable of at least executing a control for increasing the number of times the operation of the symbol display means is suspended when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description, “whether or not determination means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (for example, special drawing lottery);
Control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of starting at least a first control state (for example, a normal state (non-electric support state));
A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A variation time determining means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of determining at least the variation time of the symbol variation display; a state changing means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of changing at least the state of the variation time determining means;
Effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display;
A game machine equipped with
The control means is capable of at least starting a second control state (for example, a power support state),
The second control state is a more advantageous control state for the player than the first control state,
The variation time determination means has a longer variation time in the second state (the state using the variable putty D) than in the first state (for example, the state using the variable putty B). Is easy to determine,
In the second control state, the state changing means determines the state of the variation time determining means (for example, whether to use any variable putty) when the result of the determination is wrong. At least changeable,
The effect display means can notify at least before the advantageous symbol variation display is started that the symbol variation display advantageous to the player is started when the state of the variation time determination unit is changed. (For example, it can be notified by the display mode of the special figure pseudo hold display G).
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  Note that the first control state may be a non-electric support state, and the second control state may be an electric support state. In other words, the game ball has at least a start area into which the game ball can enter, and the start area can be changed at least from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, and the start area is easier to enter than the difficult entry state. In the state, the game ball is at least more likely to enter, and the second control state may be a control state in which the starting region is more likely to enter the entry easier state than the first control state. . More specifically, it is provided with a second success / failure determination means capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination, and the start area is provided when the result of the second success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result. The state may be changed at least from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state.

  Further, the first control state may be a non-probability change state, and the second control state may be a probability change state. That is, the success / failure determination means may be more easily derived in the second control state than the first control state.

  Further, the symbol variation display that is advantageous to the player may be a symbol variation display that stops and displays a symbol aspect corresponding to a result of the specific success / failure determination, that is, a winning symbol variation display. In this case, it becomes a pre-reading notice. Further, the symbol variation display advantageous to the player may be a symbol variation display having a long variation time.

  Further, among a plurality of types of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage unit and a variable time table storage unit storing a plurality of types of variable time tables (for example, variable putty) including one or a plurality of variable times Fluctuation time table selection means capable of selecting (or setting) at least one kind of fluctuation time table, and the state in which the fluctuation time table selection means has selected the fluctuation time table is that of the fluctuation time determination means. And at least one of the plurality of types of variation time tables is a first variation time table (e.g., variable putty B), and is one of the plurality of types of variation time tables. At least one type of variation time table is a second variation time table (for example, variation putty D), and the second variation time table. Buru, the than the first variation time table may be addressed by easily determined long the change time table.

  Further, the variation time table selection means may be capable of executing an update of the variation time table when the result of the success / failure determination is a loss. That is, the variation time table selection means can at least reselect the variation time table that has been selected so far as a new variation time table when the result of the determination of success / failure is a loss. May be.

  Further, the variable time table selection means is capable of executing the update of the variable time table according to a variable time table update table (for example, a variable putty set), and the variable time table update table is a result of the success / failure determination. The table may determine which type of variation time table is selected when the item is lost. In other words, the variable time table update table may be a table that defines which type of variable time table is selected each time the result of the determination of success or failure is lost.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the variable winning means (attacker) opened after the said symbol display means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the result of a specific success / failure determination may be sufficient. That is, when the result of the success / failure determination is a result of the specific success / failure determination, the size of the entrance is changed from the first variable state where the game ball is difficult to enter to the second variable state where the game ball is easy to enter. The variable approach area | region to be made, if it says simply, the aspect provided with the variable approach area | region which can enter a game ball when the result of the said success / failure determination is a result of a specific success / failure determination may be sufficient. Further, the start area may have a larger number of prize balls (number of payout balls) than the variable winning means. In other words, the start area may be a game ball entry area that is more advantageous to the player than the variable entry area in the second control state.

  In addition, the first control state is a non-electric support state, the second control state is an electric support state, and the start area is more player than the variable entry area in the second control state. This is a game ball entry area that is advantageous to the player, and the variation time table setting means can change at least from the first variation time table to the second variation time table when the result of the determination of success or failure is lost. The first variation time table and the second variation time table are tables in which the length of the variation time selected when the result of the determination of success / failure is lost is at least different, and the effect display means The notification regarding the variation time of the symbol variation display may be at least executable. Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing at least a notice regarding the length of the variation time of the symbol variation display of the losing, and may at least perform notification regarding the set variation time table. It may be a thing.

In addition, “having a starting area (for example, special figure starting port 230) where game balls can enter at least,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The establishment requirement of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the symbol display means stops and displays the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure after performing the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “with symbol display control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of at least executing control of the symbol display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the symbol display control means is capable of executing at least a control for holding the operation of the symbol display means (for example, a special symbol hold control) when a holding condition is established,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the symbol display control means controls to increase the number of times the operation of the symbol display means is suspended when the holding condition is satisfied (for example, a winning acceptance process shown in FIG. 7 or FIG. 19). S217, S1217) can be executed at least.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also, “The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Note that the gaming table may be a slot machine.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix i)
A determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure;
A variation time determining means capable of determining at least a variation time using at least one variation time table of the plurality of variation time tables;
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display over the variation time;
Control means capable of executing at least control for shifting the state;
A notification means capable of executing at least notification;
Notification control means capable of controlling at least the notification means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a first variable time table,
At least one of the plurality of variable time tables is a second variable time table;
The symbol variation display is to stop and display a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display.
The control means is capable of executing at least control for shifting the state from the first state to the second state after the first symbol aspect is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means.
The first symbol aspect is a symbol aspect corresponding to a jackpot in the result of the success / failure determination,
The first state is one of a plurality of types of non-hit states,
The second state is a jackpot state,
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a first non-hit state,
At least one of the plurality of types of non-hit states is a second non-hit state,
The second non-hit state is an advantageous state over the first non-hit state,
The second non-hit state is a state that can be shifted after the big hit state,
The second non-hit state is a state including at least a power support state,
The symbol display means can execute at least a first symbol variation display in the second non-hit state,
The symbol display means can execute at least a second symbol variation display in the second non-hit state,
The second symbol variation display is more advantageous for the player than the first symbol variation display,
The variation time of the first symbol variation display is determined using the first variation time table,
The variation time of the second symbol variation display is determined using the second variation time table,
The notification control means is capable of executing at least a first control,
The first control includes at least causing the notification unit to execute a first notification before the execution of the second symbol variation display is started,
The first notification at least suggests that the second symbol variation display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix ii)
A game machine according to appendix i,
The variation time determination means is longer when the variation time is determined using the second variation time table than when the variation time is determined using the first variation time table. It is easy to determine the fluctuation time,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix iii)
A game machine according to appendix i or ii,
It has a starting area where game balls can enter at least,
The symbol display means is capable of at least executing the symbol variation display when a symbol variation condition is established,
The establishment requirement of the symbol variation condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix iv)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendix i to appendix iii,
Comprising a symbol display control means capable of executing at least the control of the symbol display means;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix v)
A game machine according to appendix iv,
The symbol display control means is capable of at least executing a control for suspending the operation of the symbol display means when a holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix vi)
A gaming machine according to appendix v,
The establishment requirement of the holding condition is a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix vii)
A gaming machine according to appendix v or vi,
The symbol display control means is capable of at least executing a control for increasing the number of times the operation of the symbol display means is suspended when the holding condition is established.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix viii)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix i to appendix vii,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of each embodiment described above, each applicable mode, modification, or supplementary note, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, applicable modes, variations, You may apply to an appendix.

  Next, a gaming table to which the technical idea of the present invention can be applied will be further described. In the following description, overlapping with the items described so far will be omitted, and components having the same names as the components of the symbols used so far will be described with the symbols used so far. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 252 may be referred to as an electric chew. As described above, the starting point of the electric Chu is the special figure starting port 230. In addition, the state in which the normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is defined as the operation of the general electric accessory, and the state in which the normal operation is not set in the setting area. Fig. Assume that the electric accessory is not operating.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows the operations of the general-purpose display device 210 and the electric Chu, the operation / non-operation of the general-purpose electric accessory, and the on / off state of the solenoid signal that opens the general-purpose electric accessory. It is a time chart.

  For 500 ms after the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device 210 ends, the fixed symbol fixed display period of the normal symbol is displayed. When the winning symbol of the usual figure is confirmed and displayed, the electric chew will not be released immediately, but after the start display time A per ordinary figure has elapsed, the electric chew will be released and the electric figure electric tool is operating. become.

  FIG. 118B is a table showing an operation mode of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (electric chew).

  The operation pattern of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (electric chew) differs depending on whether the general-purpose low-probability state (non-electric support state) or the general-purpose high probability state (electric support state). In the normal figure high probability state, the normal display start display time A per 4 ms is very short, but in the normal figure low probability state, the normal display start display time A is as long as 30 seconds. In addition, an opening start effect for informing in advance that the electric chew is open is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the solenoid signal for opening the ordinary electric accessory is turned on, the electric chew is opened, and when the solenoid signal is turned off, the electric chew is closed. A period during which the solenoid signal is on is referred to as a normal electric accessory solenoid operating period B.

  In the ordinary high-probability state, the normal electric component solenoid operation period B is only once for 5.8 seconds, and the electric Chu opens once for 5.8 seconds, while the ordinary electric component is not activated. Become.

  On the other hand, in the normal low probability state, the normal electric accessory solenoid operating period B is three times. The first opening is 4.8 seconds, and the second opening is started with a closing time guarantee period C of 0.15 seconds. The second opening is 0.2 seconds, and the third opening is started with a closing time guarantee period C of 0.15 seconds. The third opening is also 0.2 seconds, and when the third opening is completed, the ordinary electric accessory is not operating.

  When shifting to the normal operation of the electric utility article, a closing time of 900 ms is secured. The closing time of 900 ms is a time until the gaming balls are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 when one or a plurality of gaming balls win the electric chew immediately before the opening ends.

  Following the closing time of 900 ms, an end time D is prepared per usual figure. The normal time end time D is 3 seconds in the normal figure high probability state, and 80 seconds in the normal figure low probability state. The end time D per universal figure is not only to secure the stage time of the opening end effect for notifying that the opening of the electric Chu has ended, but if the special figure is a big hit, the next general figure has a low probability. In order to prevent the fluctuation of the normal figure from starting for a long time due to the state, it is also a time for ensuring the fluctuation time of the special figure and the end of the opening of the attacker. It should be noted that the opening time of the attacker once is 0.6 seconds, the closing time of the interval is 0.5 seconds, and the maximum hit game is 16 rounds. In addition, as will be described later, in the case of the normal figure high probability state, the special figure has a big hit time of 1 second. In the case of the normal figure low probability state, the special figure has a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. It is.

  In addition, when the usual figure hold is left, even if the end time D per ordinary figure elapses, the symbol change display of the next usual figure will not be started immediately, and after the fluctuation waiting time of 4 ms has passed, The symbol variation display is started.

  As will be described in detail later, in the high-probability state of the ordinary figure, the symbol fluctuation display of the next ordinary figure is started from the start of the symbol fluctuation display of the ordinary figure where the success / failure determination result of the ordinary figure (second success / failure determination result) is a hit. The shortest time required to start is 10,608 seconds (including the usual figure change time is 250 ms), and the longest time is 11,608 seconds (including the usual figure change time is 1000 ms). In the normal high probability state, the average fluctuation time of the normal figure at the time of losing is 10983 [ms].

  For the attacker, each timer is set so that the usual symbol variation display is not started while the attacker is released.

  FIG. 118 (c) is a diagram showing a table used in the determination of whether or not the normal map is in the normal low probability state (non-electric support state) (second correct / incorrect determination), and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table used in the normal determination (second determination) in the high probability state (electric support state).

  These tables are the same as the tables shown in FIG. 20, and both are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the general attack probability is 1/60 in the normal low probability state. On the other hand, it is 1 / 1.0003 in the normal high probability state. In the normal high probability state, it may be possible to always win as 1/1.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability per unit table for determining a normal fluctuation period, and FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability loss table for determining a normal variable period. FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability per unit table for determining a normal variation period, and FIG. 119 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability loss table for determining a general variation period. These tables are also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Here, in the determination of the normal figure change period, the stop pattern mode (general pattern) of the normal figure is also determined at the same time. There are four types of stoppage patterns for the common figure: “normal figure A”, “normal figure B”, “general figure C”, and “general figure D”. One type of “E” is prepared.

  In the lottery here, a possible range is a random number of 0 to 65535. If it is a non-electric support state and the normal figure is successful, a random number lottery is performed using the table shown in FIG. 119 (a) to determine the normal symbol and the variable period of the normal figure. In this case, the minimum period of the usual fluctuation period is 15 seconds, and the longest period is 60 seconds. If it is a non-electric support state and the usual figure is lost, a random number lottery will be performed based on the number of holds at that time using the table shown in FIG. 119 (b), and the fluctuation period of the ordinary figure and the ordinary figure Is determined. In this case, the shortest period of the usual fluctuation period is 3 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest period at the time of hitting, and the longest period is 59 seconds, which is shorter than the longest period at the time of hitting.

  If it is in the electric support state and the normal figure is successful, a random number lottery is performed using the table shown in FIG. 119 (c) to determine the normal symbol and the variable period of the normal figure. In the table shown in FIG. 119 (c), the selection probability is the same regardless of the length of the variation period. However, the shorter the usual variation period, the higher the selection probability, and vice versa. As a result, the selection probability may be increased. In this case, the minimum period of the usual fluctuation period is 0.25 seconds, and the longest period is 1 second. Also, if the normal support is lost in the electric support state, as shown in FIG. 119 (d), the normal change period becomes a change period that has been shortened to an ultrashort of 1.5 seconds. The normal change period in the electric support state is shorter than the first open period of the electric chew described with reference to FIG. Moreover, the usual figure change period in the electric support state is shorter than the usual figure change period in the non-electric support state.

  In addition, each table of FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (d) shows the effect form of the general symbol decoration symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, which is determined according to the length of the general symbol variation period. In addition, the 1st sub-control part 400 determines the production | presentation aspect of a common figure decoration symbol.

  In this example, the stop pattern mode (general symbol) of the normal map, the variation period, and the production mode of the general symbol decoration pattern are defined in a one-to-one relationship, but further distribution may be performed. For example, the first aspect of the decoration pattern may be selected by the first sub-control unit 400 by lottery from among a plurality of kinds of effects.

  120A is a diagram showing a special probability determination low probability table stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300. FIG. 120B is a special probability determination high probability table stored in the ROM 306. FIG.

  In this special figure success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and whether or not the special figure is determined is determined based on whether or not the current control state is the special figure certain variation state (first determination of success / failure). . If the probability variation flag is turned off (if the special figure low probability state), the special figure is judged using the low probability table shown in FIG. 120A, and the probability variation flag is turned on (the special figure high probability). State), whether or not the special figure is determined is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. The special figure success / failure determination is performed based on the special figure winning random number value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. As shown in the special figure success / failure determination table of FIG. 120 (a), the special figure success / failure determination result becomes a big hit result when the combination 1/4 is established as shown in FIG. 120 (a). As shown in the special figure success / failure determination table, the result is almost a big hit. In the probability variation state, a big hit may be won with a probability of 100%.

  FIG. 120C is a diagram showing a special jackpot determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the big hit special figure determination table shown in FIG. 120C, the number of times to reach the limiter is also shown.

  In the special figure determination process using the table shown in FIG. 120C, the special figure determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Do it. Further, the special figure stop symbol form is determined based on the gaming state when the start information used when obtaining the special figure determination result is obtained. That is, if the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit at the time of the release of the electric figure of the special figure (at the time of the initial common figure), the special figure A to the special figure with a probability of 96% based on the random number for special figure determination A special figure of P (with big change and a big hit symbol with a short time until the next big hit) is decided, and a special figure Q to a special figure T (no big change and with a short time of 100 times) with a probability of 4% ). In addition, when the number of times to reach the limiter is determined as any one of the special figures A to P, the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and the maximum number of times of jackpot with probability variation is obtained. (11 times) -1 times = 10 times. On the other hand, when the special figure is selected from any of the special figures Q to T, the maximum number of wins per jackpot with probability change is 11 times. Even if the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit when the limiter has not been reached (during the consecutive day), the special figure A to the special figure P (with certainty and with a probability of 96%) based on the special figure determination random value. Decided to be one of the special charts in the jackpot symbol with a short time until the next jackpot), with a probability of 4%, any of the special charts Q to T (the jackpot symbol with no time change and 100 times the short-term) The special figure is decided. However, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined as one of the special figures from A to P, it means that the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and it is subtracted once. When any of the special drawings in FIGS. Q to T is determined, the number is reset and the prescribed number of times 11 is set again. When the result of the special figure determination is a big hit when the limiter is reached, the special figure A to the special figure H, the special figure Q, and the special figure R have a probability of 53.3% based on the random number value for special figure determination. (Special jackpot design with no time variation and 100 times of time-saving) Decided to one of the special maps, with a probability of 4% Special maps I-P, S, T A special figure is selected from among the jackpot symbols without). In this case, the number of times until the limiter is reached is reset when it is determined as one of the special figures A to H, special figure Q, and special figure R, and the prescribed number of times is reset to 11 times. Is done. If any of the special maps I to P, S, T is determined, the number of times is zero.

  In other words, the number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be acquired between the transition to the non-electric support state and the non-electric support state is 11, and the non-probable change to the non-probable change state (special figure low probability state). When the big hit is pulled, 11 limiter times are set, and when the probable big hit is drawn, the limiter number is 10 times. In addition, when the non-probable big hit is drawn during the retreat, the number of limiters is reset, the prescribed number of times is set again, and a time reduction of 100 times is given. In other words, since the fluctuation of one special figure is allowed in the short time after the uncertain large hit, hitting at this time adds a ranger to resetting the limiter count. Furthermore, when the limiter arrives, even if a probability variation symbol is displayed, it is treated as a non-probability variation big hit, but if a time reduction is given at this time, a real villa will be added.

  FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a special figure fluctuation time at a normal high probability, and FIG. 121 (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a special figure fluctuation time at a low probability, FIG. 4C is a diagram showing a typical high-probability special map change time determination lose table, and FIG. 10D is a general low-probability special map change time determination lose table. These tables are also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the determination of the special figure fluctuation period, the table shown in FIG. 121 is used based on the above-mentioned special figure determination result and the electric support state (normal high probability state) or the non-electric support state (normal low probability state). To determine the special figure fluctuation period. Further, the special figure change period is determined based on a special figure change period decision random value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. As shown in the table of FIG. 121 (a), when the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special figure A to the special figure P which are jackpot symbols with probability variation selected with a probability of 98%. The symbol variation display for stopping and displaying is a variation time (variation period) of 1 second with a probability of 100%. In this specification, the time length during which the special symbol or normal symbol variation display continues is referred to as a variation period or a variation time, which have the same meaning.

  On the other hand, the symbol variation display that stops and displays the special symbols Q to T, which are the jackpot symbols with no probability change selected with the remaining 4% probability, has a variation time of 1 second with a probability of 50%, and a probability of 50% It becomes a fluctuation time of 200 seconds. Here, 200 seconds, which is a long variation timer, is selected in a part (50% probability) at the time of selection of the big hit symbol when the limiter is reset, but the long variation timer is selected with a probability of 100%. Also good. Further, even if the big hit is when the limiter is reset, the same timer (variation time) as the big hit where the loss or the limiter advances may be selected. Also, this 200-second variation time is the longest variation time selected at the time of big hit. The longest variation time selected at the time of big hit is shorter than the longest variation time selected at the time of loss (here, 300 seconds as described later). On the contrary, the longest variation time selected at the time of big hit may be longer than or the same as the longest variation time selected at the time of loss.

  121 (a) to 121 (d) show special drawing effects on the decorative symbol display device 208, which are determined according to the length of the special figure change time. In addition, the 1st sub-control part 400 determines the production | presentation aspect of a special figure.

  121 (a) and 121 (b), the variation time of the special figure and the special figure effect mode are defined in a one-to-one relationship. The sub-control unit 400 may select one type of effect mode by lottery.

  When the special figure fluctuation time is 1 second, no special effects are performed. However, if it is a big hit without any probability change, an effect indicating that the limiter has been reset may be performed. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect as if the limiter is progressing without notifying the fact that the limiter is actually reset.

  When the special figure fluctuation time is 200 seconds, the second freeze will be described later in detail. This second freeze is executed when the limiter count is reset and the specified count of 11 is set again.

  On the other hand, as shown in the table of FIG. 121 (b), in the non-electric support state, when the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit, the special figure fluctuation time is uniform regardless of the special figure determination result (winning symbol). The fluctuation time is a predetermined time (60 seconds here). In addition, the special mode of the special drawing is a big hit (strike) effect which will be described later.

  Further, in this example, five types of “special drawing U”, “special drawing V”, “special drawing W”, “special drawing X”, and “special drawing Y” are prepared as special drawing losing symbols. The special figure loss pattern may be selected before the special figure change time is determined, but the relationship between the special figure lose pattern and the special figure change time is one-to-one. Can be done.

  As shown in the table of FIG. 121 (c), when the special figure success / failure determination result is lost in the electric support state, the symbol fluctuation display for stopping and displaying “Special Figure U” with a probability of 87% is 1 second. The symbol variation display that stops and displays “Special Figure V” with a probability of 10% has a variation time of 30 seconds (second variation time), with a probability of 10%. The symbol variation display that stops and displays “Special Figure W” with a probability of% has a variation time of 180 seconds (first variation time), and the symbol variation that stops and displays “Special Figure X” with a probability of 1%. The display has a variation time of 240 seconds, and the symbol variation display in which “Special Figure Y” is stopped and displayed with a probability of 0.5% has a variation time of 300 seconds. That is, the selection probability is higher for the fluctuation time of 30 seconds (second fluctuation time) than for the fluctuation time of 180 seconds (first fluctuation time).

  Therefore, in the electric support state, in the case of the usual figure loss, the result of the decision on the usual figure can be derived at most once during the fluctuation time of 1 second of the special figure, In some cases (see FIG. 119 (d)). In addition, even in the case of a normal figure, even if a normal figure shortening variation is made (see FIG. 119 (c)), since there is an operation period of the electric chew (see FIG. 118 (b)), the special figure is 1 second. During the fluctuation time, the number of normal determinations can be derived at most once, and sometimes it is zero. On the other hand, during the fluctuation time of 30 seconds of the special figure, whether or not the common figure is lost or the case of the common figure can be derived multiple times. In this way, by providing a 1-second fluctuation time for a special figure in which no profit is given or little profit is given, the player can be more focused on the special-design symbol display. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not In some cases, it is possible to prevent duplication of the periods in which the results are notified, and to confirm the results of the determination of the success / failure derived by the plurality of determination / non-permission determination means, respectively, and to prevent misperception of the results of the determination of success / failure. is there. In addition, there are provided a case where the result of determining whether or not the normal map is determined once during the display of the special map fluctuation, and a case where the result of determining whether or not the normal map is determined multiple times during the display of the special map fluctuation. Thus, it is possible to provide a period in which the end of the special figure change display must be taken care of and a period in which the end of the special figure change display need not be taken into consideration. As a result, a period during which the player is focused on a plurality of locations (a location related to a special map (for example, a special map display device) and a location related to a general map (for example, a general map display device)) and one location (a location related to a special map) Or, it may be possible to improve the interest by dividing it into a period in which attention is paid to a portion related to a common figure).

  Also, in the case of a loss, no particular effect is performed when the variation time is 1 second. On the other hand, when the variation time is 30 seconds or more, the first freeze is performed, and various aspects of production are performed. Although these effects will be described in detail later, when the variation time is 30 seconds, a failure effect is produced from the beat effect (first effect), and when the variation time is 180 seconds, the effect is Successful production (second production) is performed, and it develops into freeze production. When the fluctuation time is 240 seconds, the reverse rotation success effect is performed through the failure effect through the failure effect, and the freeze effect is developed. When the variation time is 300 seconds, a pseudo bonus effect is performed.

  The sprinkling effect is performed in common only in the symbol variation display of the special symbol of the long variation in which the determination result of the normal drawing may be derived multiple times. It is possible to easily determine that the usual result determination result is derived a plurality of times, and the profit is given to the electric chew a plurality of times, which is likely to be advantageous. In addition, if the player does not make a roaring effect, the player can also determine that no significant profit will be given, so that excessive expectations by the player can be prevented, and the excessive expectations are betrayed. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the absence of seats that are likely to occur.

  On the other hand, since the success rate has a low appearance rate and the special symbol variation display is performed for a considerably long time, the number of times the result of normal / unusual determination is derived tends to increase. Further, by executing the success effect only in the special symbol display of 180 seconds, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and attract the interest of the standing audience.

  In addition, as shown in the table of FIG. 121 (d), when the special figure determination result is lost in the non-electric support state, the special figure variation time is not related to the special figure determination result (lost pattern). The variation time is uniformly a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds). Further, as the special drawing effect mode, a failure effect, which will be described later in detail, is performed. From the table shown in FIG. 121 (b) and the table shown in FIG. 121 (d), in the normal low probability state, the same timer (in this case, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is selected for both big hit and loss, and the sub-control The means 400, 500 side makes the production different.

  The pachinko machine in this example is also a gaming machine that earns a ball by making the game ball enter the electric figure 252 (electric Chu), and when the symbol change of the special figure for a long time is performed in the electric support state. You can expect to earn a lot of balls by letting a game ball enter the electric Chu. In addition, if it is in a special figure high probability state (during probability change), it is also an electric support state (a state in the consecutive resort). As described with reference to FIG. 120 (b), the special figure high probability state (during probability change) cannot be substantially lost, and when the special figure is lost, the special figure low probability state (non- By making the fluctuation longer than the losing of (probably changing), a greater profit can be given.

  The electric Chu is closed when 6 balls are entered, and 10 prize balls are paid out for each entered ball. On the other hand, when an attacker enters one ball, the attacker closes and nine prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. In other words, the number of prize balls for one winning of electric Chu is larger than the number of prize balls for one winning of attacker. It should be noted that the number of winning balls for one attacker's winning may be larger than the number of winning balls for one winning of Chu.

  In the pachinko machine in this example, in the electric support state, if the player hits the right side normally, more prize balls than the game balls launched from the launching device 110 are obtained within the special figure fluctuation time of 180 seconds. It is paid out by winning the Chu. Similarly, if the player is right-handed in the electric support state, more prize balls than the game balls fired from the launching device 110 are paid out by the electric chew winnings within the special figure fluctuation time of 30 seconds. It is. This is achieved by organically intertwining the probability of winning a normal figure in the electric support state, the ease of passing the normal figure start gate (gate), the ease of passing the ball to the electric chew, the opening time of the electric chew, etc. Has been.

  Many of the conventional pachinko machines have a game characteristic that just waits for a big hit, and it is easy to get bored by the player, and the fun of the game table tends to decrease, but in this example the pachinko machine enters the game ball into the electric chew In this case, it can be expected to earn a significant number of balls, which may improve the fun of the game. That is, in the pachinko machine in this example, the longer the symbol variation time is selected, the longer the time of the electric support state that is advantageous to the player, so when the player can attract more attention to the symbol variation There is. In addition, since the magnitude of the profit given to the player is determined by the operation (long or short of the symbol variation time) that is not transmitted to the data counter installed on the island of the game store, the data counter is checked before the game to check the game In some cases, you may be prevented from being shy away.

  In addition, the big hits in conventional pachinko machines are displayed with symbols and the number of rounds at the start, so the amount of profit given to the player may be reliably predicted or estimated to some extent . On the other hand, in the pachinko machine in this example, if the remaining time of the symbol variation time is not notified, it is possible to reliably prevent the guess about the amount of profit to be granted, so how long will the profit be granted? There are cases where the game can be progressed while the player is thrilled to continue. In addition, even if the design is such that the probability that a long symbol variation time to which a benefit is given is selected is increased so that the player can feel a good state for the player relatively easily, a greater benefit can be obtained. Probability that profit will be granted while keeping the average value of profit given to the player in the electric support state low by setting the possibility that longer symbol variation time given will be selected low May be easily adjustable.

  In addition, due to the appearance of a freeze in the case of a special figure loss, the fluctuation time of the special figure that stops displaying the lost symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure that stops and displays the big hit symbol. In some cases, it may be possible to provide a new entertainment that is a big hit if the symbol stops by the time, and on the contrary, if the symbol is over a certain amount of time, the game will be lost. In addition, by adjusting the magnitude of the profit given to the player by jackpot and the magnitude of the profit given to the player by loss, while giving the profit by jackpot as in the conventional gaming machine, When it is possible to provide new playability such as giving an expectation to a loss by giving a profit by losing to assist the profit, or by increasing the profit by losing while suppressing the profit by jackpot There is.

  Note that the passing of the game ball through the normal start port (gate) corresponds to an example of the second condition, and winning in the electric chew corresponds to an example of the first condition. Profits are actually granted by notifying the amount of profits at the game console, even though the second condition necessary to establish the first condition for granting profit is not satisfied. Although it is necessary to establish a plurality of conditions until the game is done, there are cases where the player can be illusioned as if the conditions necessary for giving a profit are easily satisfied.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine in this example, the attacker can only open 0.6 seconds at a time during the big hit game, and almost no entry can be expected, whereas the electric chew is as shown in FIG. 118 (b). In addition, since 5.8 seconds are released in the electric support state and 4.8 seconds are released even in the non-electric support state, the profit amount per ordinary figure is more than the profit amount (number of winning balls) during the big hit game. Is big. By doing this, it may be felt that the loss in the electric support state is better than the big hit in the non-electric support state, and the player's prejudice to the result of the determination of the success / failure may be reversed and the interest of the game may be enhanced. . In particular, there are cases where a player who thinks that “big hit = advantage” can be surprised.

  Next, the game flow will be described in detail.

  In the pachinko machine in this example, the game proceeds in the same flow as the game flow shown in FIG. The probability of proceeding from step S503 to step S505 shown in FIG. 24 is 1.6%, and the probability of proceeding from step S503 to step S504 is 98.4%. Further, in detail, the probability of proceeding to step S512 in a chance game bowling effect (step S510) described later is 25%, and the probability of proceeding to step S511 is 75%.

  122 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of step S512 illustrated in FIG. That is, FIG. 122 shows a circled number “1” corresponding to the circled “1” number shown in FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing step by step the screen of the decorative symbol display device when the initial hit is a big hit without any probability change.

  In the special figure variable game here, the probability of winning a jackpot with probability variation is 96%, and the probability of winning a jackpot without probability variation is 4% (see FIG. 120 (c)). When winning a big hit with no chance change, the value 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. 123 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game is displayed. Then, “remaining 11 times” is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be acquired before the transition to the non-electric support state (step S613). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “in the middle of one consecutive villa” from the fact that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 has been opened once (step S507 shown in FIG. 24). The In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (a) has a character display of “high probability” indicating that it is in the electric support state, and held a bag in both hands that appeared in the center of the screen. A light aura 705 is added behind the Tono-sama character.

  On the other hand, when winning the jackpot with probability variation, a value of 10 is set in the probability variation counter (step S614).

  Since the control state has shifted to the electric support state, it is easy to win the normal determination, and the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is easy to open. For this reason, it is easy to determine whether or not the special figure is true. As described with reference to FIG. 120 (a), the special figure is judged to be a big hit with a probability of 25% in the non-probable change state. Loss of probability with%. The control state in step S613 is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and the special figure determination is lost with a probability of 75%. The limiter does not operate unless the big hit of the special figure is drawn, and it is possible to increase the number of balls with the electric chew with a probability of 75% and continuing to draw the special figure. In addition, as shown in FIG. 121 (c), in the symbol variation display in which the special symbol losing symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal diagram high probability state, 87% is a short variation timer of 1 second, and the remaining 13% is 30 seconds. In the above long variation timer, the first freeze that becomes the freeze for the loss is performed (step S620), which is a period advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 120 (b), if the probability variation state, a big win is won with a fairly high probability. In the state where the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is more than 2 times, the probability of winning the jackpot with probability change and short time until next jackpot is 96%, There is a 4% probability of winning a jackpot with no chance and 100 time savings (see FIG. 120 (c)). For example, when the remaining number of times is 11 and the winning combination with probability variation and the next big hit with time reduction is won, the probability variation counter is set to 10 values obtained by subtracting 1 from the 11 values set so far. As shown in 123 (b), “decided 10 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “during 2 consecutive villas”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), in the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the big hit symbol (special symbol Q to special symbol T) with no time variation and 100 time savings, 50% is a short variation timer of 1 second. 50% is a long fluctuation timer of 200 seconds, and a second freeze that is a hit for freezing is performed (steps S621 to S624). Since the big hit probability here is 4% and the selection probability of the second freeze is 50%, it can be said that the second freeze is very rare.

  Note that the dotted arrow indicates the flow when the special figure is lost in the probability variation state. In the probability variation state, the probability that the special figure determination is lost is 1/65536, and the selection probability of the first freeze is 13% as described above. Therefore, the first freeze in the probability variation state is not shown.

  If a winning combination with no change and 100 time savings is won in the probability changing state, the probability changing counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and a jackpot with a certain change is obtained until the non-electric support state is entered. The remaining number of times that can be increased. Although resetting the probability variation counter is advantageous to the player, it is performed only with a probability of 4% as described above.

  FIG. 123 (c) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 during a big hit game when the remaining number of times is two. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (c), “remaining 2 times” and “during 10 consecutive resorts” are displayed, and “additional bonus when a strike is added” is also displayed. . When the remaining number of times becomes one, a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. The result of the special figure variable game that will be the big hit game here is a big hit with no probability change, but with a probability of 53.3%, it is a big hit with 100 time reductions, with a probability of 46.7% It is a big hit without time. If the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit without a short time, the bonus is ended (step S619), and the state shifts to the non-electric support state and also shifts to the non-probable change state to enter the normal game state. . The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (g) displays an image of a scene where the strike could not be taken. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit with a time reduction of 100 times, it shifts to the non-probable change state, but the electric support state is extended until the special figure change stop display is performed 100 times. .

  FIG. 123 (f) is a diagram illustrating the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the limiter count is reset and the specified count of 11 is set again. As shown in FIG. 123 (f), “decided 11 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (f) also displays “12 consecutive resorts”. In addition, the display of “○ renso” is incremented by 1 based on the fact that a game ball is detected at the special figure starting port provided in the electric chew after the electric chew is released. That is, in one electric Chu release, the count is increased only for the first ball detected first, and the increase count is 1 even if a plurality of balls enter during one release.

  Next, the first freeze that becomes the freeze for loss will be described.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing various effects in the first freeze.

  The special symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 124 (a) shows that the stop symbol of the big hit without probability change is stopped, the limiter is reset, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a state until it shifts to the non-electric support state. In the meantime, “11 remaining times” is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability variation can be obtained. In addition, a character display of “high probability” indicating that the power support state is in progress is made. The control state in FIG. 124 (a) is also a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. In addition, the display of “27 consecutive villas” indicating the number of times of opening the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is also made, and there is a light behind the Tono-sama character holding the heel in both hands. An aura 705 is added. Further, each figure of FIG. 124 shows a general electric accessory 252 (electrical chew) and a variable winning opening 234 (attacker). The electric chew shown in FIG. 124 (a) is closed, and the attacker shown in FIG. 124 (a) is also closed. 124 also shows the universal display device 210. The general symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 124 (a) is displayed in a stopped state, and there are two common symbol holds as indicated by the normal symbol hold lamp 216.

  In the special figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 124 (b), the symbol variation display is started, and the symbol variation display is also started in the universal symbol display device 210. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (b), a roaring effect (first effect) is performed. The roaring effect here is a golf game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “a great chance if you can cup in”. Normally, the electric chew is released once for the symbol variation display of one special symbol. However, when the special symbol length variation is selected, the electric chew is turned on during the symbol variation of one special symbol. Since it can be opened multiple times, more profit is given to the player. Since the roaring effect is an effect that is performed only when the lottery result is lost and has a long fluctuation, it is determined that a larger profit than usual is given when the roaring effect occurs. However, in this example, as described with reference to FIG. 121 (c), the roaring effect is performed when the variation time is 30 seconds, 180 seconds, and 240 seconds. Since the player cannot infer how long the fluctuation will be during the special figure fluctuation, it cannot be assumed how much profit will be given, I expect the development from production.

  A success effect (second effect) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (c). That is, the cup-in is successful and the word “congratulations” is displayed. When a successful production is performed from a roaring production, 180 long fluctuations (special drawing W) are finalized, and a transition is made to a freeze production.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (d), a freeze effect is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining variation time (148 seconds here) of the special figure. As described above, in the normal figure high probability state, the electric chew can be released multiple times during the special figure variation, and many balls can be obtained by winning the electric chew. Is displayed. The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure is displayed in a countdown manner, but the true remaining time may be displayed or the false remaining time may be displayed. Further, the display may be switched depending on the player's operation, or a plurality of notification patterns may be provided for one fluctuation time (180 seconds in this case). For example, with respect to 180 seconds of special figure W, a pattern for notifying “180 seconds” from the beginning, and after notifying “60 seconds”, seconds are divided into a plurality of times such as “+30 seconds” and “+45 seconds”. For example, a pattern in which numbers are added (added), and after the first notified “30 seconds”, notification of “remaining? Seconds” is performed until completion. Furthermore, a display suggesting the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the special figure may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 124 (d), a meter display or level display that does not directly display the number of seconds but decreases with the passage of time, or a background such as morning → day → night. It may be something that changes.

  A failure effect is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (c ′) and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (c ″). That is, the cup-in failed and the word “sorry” is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (d ′), a reverse rotation success effect is displayed. That is, a golf ball that has not entered the cup once is displayed in a cup-in state, and a character display of “large reversal” is displayed. When the transition from the squeeze effect to the failure effect is made and then the reversal success effect is made, the long fluctuation of 240 seconds (special figure X) is confirmed, and the process shifts to the freeze effect shown in FIG. Since the long fluctuation of 240 seconds is longer than the long fluctuation of 180 seconds, the display of the remaining time and the display during the extended stay may be larger.

  In addition, in a plurality of symbol variations, some effects may be shared or prepared exclusively. This common or dedicated effect is not used in the symbol variation display that is a big hit in the special figure, but informs that the special figure has been lost. In the game characteristics of this example, there is a case where the effect of confirming the loss can improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, when it does not advance to the reverse rotation success effect, it is a long fluctuation of 30 seconds (special figure V), and the special figure symbol change display is finished before long. The electric Chu is open several times during the production, and in FIG. 124 (b), it is “29 consecutive villas”, but in the same figure (c ′) and FIG. It is. Therefore, even if the fluctuation time is 30 seconds, a certain amount of profit can be obtained. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (d ″) is the same as the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Yes.

  Next, the second freeze that becomes the winning freeze will be described. This second freeze is a rare freeze as described above.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing various effects in the second freeze.

  The special symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 125 (a) displays the stop symbol of the big hit without probability change, the limiter is reset, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a state until the non-electric support state is entered. In the meantime, “11 remaining times” is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability variation can be obtained. In addition, a character display of “high probability” indicating that the power support state is in progress is made. The control state in FIG. 125 (a) is also a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. In addition, the display of “27 consecutive villas” indicating the number of times of opening the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is also made, and there is a light behind the Tono-sama character holding the heel in both hands. An aura 705 is added. In addition, each figure of FIG. 125 shows a general-purpose electric accessory 252 (electric chew) and a variable winning opening 234 (attacker). The electric chew shown in FIG. 125 (a) is closed, and the attacker shown in FIG. 125 (a) is also closed. In addition, each figure of FIG. 125 also shows the universal map display device 210. The general symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 125A is stopped and there are two common symbol holds as indicated by the normal symbol hold lamp 216.

  The electric chew shown in FIG. 125 (b) is in an open state, and the internal counter circuit counts up based on the first game ball that has entered the open electric chew, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays “28 reams”.

  In the special figure display device 210 shown in FIG. 125 (c), the special symbol variation display is started, and the letter “BIG BONUS” is displayed large on the decorative symbol display device 208. This character display of “BIG BONUS” corresponds to a roaring effect before the start of the second freeze effect. At this stage, the electric Chu has returned to the closed state, but the usual fluctuation display has not yet started.

  In the second freeze effect, an R display effect is performed. "1R" is displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (d). This display “1R” is a display that assumes the number of times the electric Chu has been opened. That is, in the normal high probability state, if right-handed, the electric chew can be expected to open, and the electric chew operates in the operation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 118 (b). From this, if the fluctuation time of the special figure is known, the sub-control units 400 and 500 can calculate how many times the electric Chu is released within the fluctuation time of the special figure. In the R display effect, with the passage of time, the number before R is increased by 1 regardless of whether or not the electric chew is released. Here, with respect to the fluctuation time of the special figure of 200 seconds, it is calculated in advance that the electric chew will be released 18 times if the player normally hits the right, and the first sub-control unit 400 When recognizing the fluctuation time of the special figure of 200 seconds, the R display is switched one by one at a predetermined time interval. In addition, when there are multiple types of fluctuation time of the special figure in which the second freeze effect is performed, how many times the R display is performed may be calculated on the sub-control unit side according to the fluctuation time of the special figure. The relationship between the fluctuation time of the special figure and the maximum number of R displays may be defined by table management.

  The electric chew shown in FIG. 125 (d) has not been opened yet, but “1R” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as early as possible. As described above, in the case of the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time at the time of the big hit of the special figure is often 1 second, and the end time D per common figure is 3 seconds. It is always displayed before the electric Chu opens. Also, at this timing, the usual symbol variation display is started, and this does not open the electric chew. A period including the timing of FIG. 125D before the electric chew is released corresponds to an example of the first period, and a period in which the electric chew is opened corresponds to an example of the second period. The “1R” display shown in FIG. 125 (d) corresponds to the start effect of the second freeze effect or the second freeze confirmed effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (d), “28 consecutive villas” is displayed.

  In FIG. 125 (e), the normal symbol variation display is finished, and the electric chew is open. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (e) displays “29 consecutive resorts”.

  In the R display shown in FIG. 125 (f), “2R” is displayed. Note that here, when the game is played without delay, the average time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal figure to the next fluctuation start of the normal figure is displayed as 10983 ms when the winning symbol for releasing the electric chew is displayed. The R display is counted up every time the average time elapses. By doing so, the number of times the electric Chu is actually opened may correspond to the numerical value of the R display.

  In the R display shown in FIG. 125 (g), “18R → Last” is displayed. In addition, the second freeze is performed over 200 seconds, and during that time, the utility can be released on average 18.2 times. When it is actually opened 18 times, consistency with “18R” can be obtained, so that an illusion can be made that the R display is performed in correspondence with the opening of the electric chew. In addition, “44 reaming” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (g). The R display is started at the time of 28 consecutive resorts shown in FIG. 125 (d), and it is currently 18R and should be 28 + 18 = 46 consecutive resorts, but the notification of the number of consecutive resorts is 44 times. In other words, in this example, the electric chew was opened only 16 times, or opened 18 times. As described above, the R display may not match the number of times that the profit (privilege) is actually given. The symbol variation display of the special symbol whose variation has started in FIG. 125 (c) ends at the timing of FIG. 125 (g), and the special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol with no probability variation. The limiter is reset. The attacker 234 shown in FIG. 125 (h) is open and a big hit game is being played. After the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which notification is performed in accordance with an assumed number of profits and timing.

  In FIG. 126, the state of round digestion during the big hit game is shown on the left side, and the second freeze effect described with reference to FIG. 125 is shown on the right side.

  The special-figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 126 (b) is changing, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The roaring effect before the start of the second freeze effect shown in FIG. 5B 'is similar to the roaring effect before the start of the big hit game. Note that the universal display device 210 shown in FIG. 126 (b ′) is also changing.

  In the special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 126 (c), the big hit symbol with 16R probability change is stopped and displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure, the big hit game start effect is displayed. In this big hit game, the attacker opens 16 times. The start effect of the second freeze effect shown in FIG. 5C 'is similar to the big hit game start effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (d), an effect during the round in the big hit game is displayed. In the production during round, the number of rounds being digested is displayed in characters (here, “1 round”). In the big hit game effect, the number of times the attacker has been released from the start of the big hit (the first round) is displayed as the number of rounds. Since the round number display is performed based on the number of times the attacker has been released, it is a correct number of times and always matches the actual number of times the attacker has been released. The R display effect shown in FIG. 4D 'is similar to the effect during the round. That is, “R” in the R display during the second freeze is a character reminiscent of “round”, and both the round display during the big hit game and the R display during the freeze display the profit amount (the number of grants). And both are related in the display mode.

  Attackers are always released during jackpot games, according to the number of jackpot types. On the other hand, the electric Chu passes the game ball through the usual figure start opening (ordinary figure gate) and is not released unless it is won or not for the usual figure, and the number of times of opening is indefinite. Therefore, the attacker opens the game if the player is not hitting a ball even if the player is playing a big hit game, but the electric chew is not released if at least the player does not hit the ball.

  Note that the notification of the number of times the electric chew has been released since the start of the electric support state (the number of consecutive resorts), which has been continuously displayed in the electric support state, is not displayed (disappears) during the big hit game. This is because the game shifts to the non-electric support state during the big hit game, and the usual fluctuation display that starts changing during the big hit game is hard to hit and the electric Chu is difficult to open. Also, during a big hit game, the usual fluctuation time tends to be long. For these reasons, during the big hit game, it is less likely to be profitable with the electric Chu than during the electric support state.

  As described with reference to FIG. 126, the mode in which the number of profits is correctly notified is similar to the mode in which the number of profits is not correctly reported (strictly speaking, the number of profits may not be correctly reported). There may be.

  Freeze can also be seen as a pseudo-hit. When the freeze is regarded as a pseudo jackpot, both the big jackpot and the pseudo jackpot are notified of profits, but the modes are different for each. However, the aspect consists of a related aspect. That is, the number of times the electric chew is released during the pseudo-big hit is notified by a character display “Nenso”. Since the character display “in the middle of nrenso” is performed based on the opening of the electric chew, it corresponds to a correct numerical display. On the other hand, during the big hit game, the number of times the attacker is released is notified as a character display of the number of rounds. In addition, during pseudo-hit, a notification (in this case, R display) regarding the opening of the electric chew is performed, but this notification may not be correct.

  Next, a modified example of the round digest effect during the big hit game will be described.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the round digest effect during the big hit game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (a), a big hit game start effect is displayed. In this big hit game, the attacker opens 16 times.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (b), an effect during the round in the big hit game is started. In the effect during round in this modified example, the number of rounds representing the number of times the attacker has been released during the jackpot game is displayed, and the amount of profit that the player can theoretically obtain (as an example of the first notification) Equivalent) and the profit amount display actually obtained by the player (corresponding to an example of the second notification) are compared and displayed in the lower right. That is, “150” in the denominator position shown in FIG. 127 (b) represents the amount of profit (here, the number of winning balls) that the player may obtain in one round, and the position of the numerator. The number represents the amount of profit (here, the number of winning balls) that the player actually gained during the jackpot game. In FIG. 127 (b). The number at the position of this molecule is “0”. FIG. 127 (b) is a diagram showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 just before the start of one round, that is, immediately before the attacker actually opens, and there is a possibility that the player can acquire it in one round. The display of the position of the denominator representing the amount of profit (theoretical value) is notified before the profit (prize ball) is actually given. The period including the timing of FIG. 127 (b) before the attacker is released corresponds to an example of the first period, and the period in which the attacker is released corresponds to an example of the second period.

  FIG. 127 (c) and FIG. 127 (c ′) are diagrams showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of one round, that is, in a state where the attacker is actually opened and closed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (c), the display of the position of the numerator representing the amount of profit actually obtained by the player (actual profit amount) is “120”, and the theory that has been informed beforehand. It is lower than the numerical value “150” in the position of the denominator representing the value. In this way, when the amount of profit actually granted falls below the amount of profit that has been notified in advance, it may be possible to increase the attention on the game board surface. Further, it may be possible to easily determine that there is a high possibility that the nail adjustment by the game store in which the game table (pachinko machine) is installed is a disadvantageous adjustment for the player. Furthermore, even a player with poor knowledge may be able to determine the adjustment state of the nail on the game table from the difference between the previously notified benefit and the actually granted benefit.

  In addition, by notifying the amount of profit that can be given to the player in a certain period in advance, and further displaying the actual profit given to the player in that period, the difference in the amount of profit can be easily made to the player May be able to understand. In particular, it may be possible to emphasize the adjustment state of the nail that directly affects the profit.

  If at least the player does not strike a ball, the display of the actual profit amount remains “0”, and the launch of the game ball corresponds to an example of the first condition. On the other hand, even if the launching device 110 is broken, the first condition is not satisfied, and in this case, it is possible for the player to easily determine that an obvious abnormality has occurred in the game table. You can call the store clerk without. In addition, the store clerk can easily notice that an abnormality has occurred in the game table.

  In addition, winning at the attacha corresponds to an example of the first condition, and winning a jackpot corresponds to an example of the second condition.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (c ′), the display of the position of the numerator representing the actual profit amount is “150”, and the denominator position “150” representing the theoretical value that has been notified in advance. ". There are cases where the actual profit amount actually matches the theoretical value, but the actual profit amount may exceed the theoretical value. In other words, when the upper limit of the number of entrances to the attacker in one round is reached and the attacker closes, if a game ball that happens to exceed the upper limit of the number of entrances continuously enters the attacker, the actual profit amount is the theoretical value. Exceed. In this case, the actual profit amount is not displayed with a numerical value exceeding the theoretical value, but is displayed with a theoretical value. In other words, the upper limit value on the display of the actual profit amount is a theoretical value, and the actual profit amount is not displayed correctly and a false numerical value is displayed. By doing this, it may be possible to prevent the player from being unsatisfied with the gambling feeling, but the actual profit amount may be displayed in a numerical value exceeding the theoretical value (true numerical value display). In this case, notification about the amount of profit that can be granted (theoretical value) is made in advance, and the amount of profit that was actually granted (actual profit amount) was notified in advance. If the amount exceeds the amount (theoretical value), more profits can be obtained, so that a sense of superiority can be obtained. When the actual profit amount exceeds the theoretical value, the display may be switched to a display different from the numerical display. For example, the display may be “Thousand boxes / 150”.

  FIG. 127 (d) is a diagram showing a state of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the start of the second round, that is, the moment when the attacker starts the second opening. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (d), the mathematical display of the denominator position representing the theoretical value is “300”. This is a cumulative value from the start of the big hit game (first round), in which 150 balls that are the theoretical value of the second round are added to 150 balls that are the theoretical value of the first round. In addition, “120” is still displayed at the position of the numerator representing the actual profit amount. Thus, although the notification of the actual profit amount may be continued even after reaching the theoretical value becomes impossible, it may be separated every time the round starts. That is, 150 may be displayed as the theoretical value at the start of each round, and the actual profit amount may be once reset to zero.

  FIG. 127 (e) and FIG. 127 (e ′) are diagrams showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the start of the 16th round, that is, at the moment when the attacker starts the 16th release.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (e), the display of the position of the numerator representing the actual profit amount is “1950”, and the display of the position of the denominator representing the theoretical value is “2400”.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (e ′), the display of the position of the denominator representing the theoretical value is different from the numerical display (here, “large board behavior”). When it is determined that the profit actually given to the player does not reach the profit (theoretical value) assumed in advance, the profit suggestion notification may be stopped. That is, in this example, since the difference up to 2400 is larger than 150, which is the theoretical value for one round, in the remaining one round, the numerical display of 2400 is stopped and displayed in a different display mode. At this time, both the actual profit amount display and the theoretical value display may be stopped.

  In the example shown in FIG. 127, round display is performed. However, the number of profits may be correctly notified in the display mode (R display mode) of “1R”, “2R”... “16R”. .

  As described above with specific examples, the amount of profit that a player can earn is informed before the player can actually earn profit, thereby incentivizing the player's willingness to play. In some cases, the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that there may be a case where a variation time in which the proportional relationship between the variation time length and the appearance rate is reversed is selected. That is, in general, since a large profit is difficult to be given and a small profit is easily given, a short freeze (for example, a special chart fluctuation time of 30 seconds) is longer than a long freeze (for example, a special chart fluctuation time of 180 seconds). Although the selection probability is higher, a middle freeze (fourth variation time) may be provided which is longer than the short freeze but has a higher probability of being selected than the short freeze.

  In addition, the superiority of winning and losing may be reversed for each state. For example, you may make it the profit at the time of pulling out big hit and loss for every gaming state fluctuate. In particular, in some situations, the magnitude of the profit given to the player when the loss is drawn may exceed the profit given to the player when the win is drawn.

  In addition, the characteristic of profit provision of the ordinary electric accessory (here, electric chew) that operates when the winning symbol is displayed on the universal display device is the special electric accessory that operates when the winning symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device. You may make it higher than the characteristic in profit provision of a thing (Attacker here). For example, “the maximum number of winnings in one operation × the number of gaming balls to be paid out when one game ball is won” is larger in the case of the ordinary electric combination than in the special electric combination. Good.

  In addition, by providing a plurality of usual fluctuation time in the electric support state, even if the special figure fluctuation time is the same, it is possible to vary the amount of profit given to the player in the usual fluctuation time it can. In other words, since the profit during the long fluctuation (freeze) of the special figure in the electric support state changes according to the number of operations of the ordinary electric accessory during the long fluctuation, Depending on the operation pattern (opening time or opening mode) of the object, etc., it is possible to vary the amount of profit given to the player.

  Furthermore, a part of the effect executed when selecting the long variation time may be common to the aspect of the effect executed when selecting the short variation time and executed over a plurality of short variation times. For example, when the game is played normally and the determination of the variation time at the same opportunity is compared, the expected value of the profit given to the player is larger in the long variation of the loss than in the short variation of the big hit.

  In addition, in the period in which profits can actually be acquired (an example of the second period), the probability that the amount of profit actually granted to the player exceeds the theoretical value that has been notified in advance is not It may be higher than the probability of falling below. In addition, the probability that the amount of profit actually granted to the player during the period in which the profit can actually be acquired matches the theoretical value that has been notified in advance is higher than the probability of being lower Good.

  In addition, the theoretical value is notified before the start of the jackpot, and the theoretical value is the maximum value of profit predetermined for each jackpot (number of rounds × maximum number of winnings per round × number of winning balls per attacker) ). Further, the theoretical value may be an amount that can be easily acquired by a player who normally plays a game. For example, the value may be a value that can be normally acquired as long as there is no extremely bad nail adjustment or abnormality occurs in the game machine.

  Further, the notification of the theoretical value may be performed in a period (an example of a second period) in which the profit can be actually acquired. For example, the notification of the theoretical value started in the period before the second period (an example of the first period) may be continuously reported over the second period, or the first period After being notified in, it may be notified again in the second period across the period in which the notification is not performed. Or, conversely, the notification of the theoretical value may be performed only in the first period, and not performed in the second period (for example, the display disappears).

  In addition, during the execution of the freeze effect (pseudo bonus), when the predetermined time sensor does not detect the game ball, a notification that prompts the player to launch the game ball may be performed. For example, if you can not confirm the driving of the launching device for a predetermined time during the long-term fluctuation of the special figure in the ordinary high probability state, or if you can not detect the game ball with the ordinary figure start gate (gate) or electric Chu, A notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball or a notification that prompts the player how to hit the game ball (for example, right-handed) may be performed. Further, these notifications may be made in different notification modes and intervals depending on the detection state of the game ball.

In recent game machines, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game, and as a game machine that can improve the interest of the game, in the above description,
"At least a launching means capable of launching a game ball,
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A game machine equipped with
The symbol display means is capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display in the electric support state,
The symbol display means is capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display in the power support state,
The first symbol variation display is executed over a first time,
The second symbol variation display is executed over a second time,
The amount of game balls that the launching means can fire at the first time is a first amount,
The amount of game balls that the launching means can fire at the second time is a second amount,
When the first amount of game balls is fired by the launching means during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first profit can be given,
During the execution of the second symbol variation display, when the second amount of game balls are fired by the launching means, a second benefit can be given,
The first benefit comprises a third amount of game balls,
The second benefit comprises a fourth amount of game balls,
The third amount is greater than the first amount;
The fourth amount is greater than the second amount;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “a first success / failure determination unit capable of executing at least a first success / failure determination;
A second success / failure determination means capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination;
With
When the first success / failure determination means derives a winning as a result of the first success / failure determination, at least a third profit can be given,
When the second success / failure determination means derives a winning as a result of the second success / failure determination, at least a fourth profit can be given,
The fourth profit is a profit larger than the third profit.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “Starting area where game balls can enter at least,
The symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination,
The starting area is at least easier to enter the game ball in the second state than in the first state,
The start area is at least changeable from the first state to the second state when the second success / failure determination unit derives a winning as a result of the second success / failure determination. ,
The symbol display means can execute at least a third symbol variation display over a third time period,
The first time is at least longer than the second time;
The third time is at least shorter than the second time;
The second success / failure determination means is capable of deriving a result of the second success / failure determination at least a plurality of times during execution of the first symbol variation display,
The second success / failure determination means is capable of deriving the result of the second success / failure determination at least a plurality of times during execution of the second symbol variation display,
The second success / failure determination means is capable of deriving the result of the second success / failure determination once or less during execution of the third symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the second success / failure determination means cannot derive the result of the second success / failure determination during the execution of the third symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “provided with an effect display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of effects,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The effect display means is capable of executing at least the first effect during the execution of the first symbol variation display,
The effect display means is capable of executing at least the first effect during the execution of the second symbol variation display,
The effect display means does not execute the first effect during the execution of the third symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “at least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed after the first effect,
The effect display means is capable of executing at least the second effect during the execution of the first symbol variation display.
The effect display means does not execute the second effect during the execution of the second symbol variation display,
The effect display means does not execute the second effect during the execution of the third symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Further, “the symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a lost symbol form when the first success / failure determination unit derives a loss as a result of the first success / failure determination;
The symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a winning symbol form when the first winning / failing determining means derives a winning as a result of the first winning / failing determination,
The symbol display means is capable of displaying at least the lost symbol aspect in the first symbol variation display,
The symbol display means does not display the winning symbol mode in the first symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is capable of displaying at least the lost symbol aspect in the second symbol variation display,
The symbol display means does not display the winning symbol aspect in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description, “a launching means capable of firing at least a game ball (for example, launching device 110);
A starting area (for example, electric chew) into which at least a game ball can enter;
Control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of at least starting the electric support state;
A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A variation time selection means (for example, main controller 300) capable of selecting at least one variation time from a plurality of variation times;
A gaming machine comprising at least a profit granting means (for example, a payout control unit 600) capable of at least granting a profit (for example, a prize ball),
The control means is capable of at least starting a non-electric support state,
The starting area is at least easier for the game ball to enter in the second state (for example, the open state) than in the first state (for example, the closed state),
The electric support state is a control state in which the starting region is more likely to be the second state than the non-electric support state,
The symbol display means can execute at least the symbol variation display over the variation time selected by the variation time selection means,
At least one variation time of the plurality of variation times is a first variation time (for example, 180 seconds),
At least one variation time of the plurality of variation times is a second variation time (for example, 30 seconds),
When the launching means has fired a first amount of game balls within the first variation time in the electric support state, the benefit granting means receives a second amount of game balls as the benefit. Is at least grantable,
The profit granting means has a fourth amount of games as the profit when the launching means enters the third amount of game balls within the second fluctuation time in the electric support state. A ball can be added at least,
The second amount is greater than the first amount;
The fourth amount is greater than the third amount;
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

The first variation time is a variation time longer than the second variation time,
The variation time selection means is capable of at least selecting the first variation time with a first probability in the power support state.
The variation time selection means is capable of selecting at least the second variation time with a second probability in the power support state,
The second probability may be higher than the first probability.

In addition, the profit granting means, when the first amount of game balls enters the start area within the first fluctuation time in the electric support state, the second amount of games as the profit A ball can be added at least,
When the third amount of game balls enters the start area within the second variation time in the electric support state, the profit granting means receives a fourth amount of game balls as the profit. Is at least grantable,
The second amount is greater than the first amount;
The fourth amount may be greater than the third amount.

In addition, “a first success / failure determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a first success / failure determination (for example, a special figure determination)
A second success / failure determination means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination (for example, a normal / failure determination);
With
The profit granting means, when the first success / failure determination means derives a winning / failing determination result (for example, a special figure big hit) as the first winning / failing determination result, at least the first profit amount That can be granted,
The profit granting means, when the second success / failure determination means derives a hit / failure determination result (for example, per common figure) as a result of the second success / failure determination, at least a second profit amount That can be granted,
The second profit amount may be larger than the first profit amount,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, when the result of the first success / failure determination is a result of the success / failure determination of the winning, an attacker that allows a game ball to enter during the winning game,
The profit granting means is capable of at least giving a first profit amount during the winning game when the first winning / decision determining means derives the result of the winning / failing determination.
The profit granting means is such that when the second success / failure determination means derives the result of the hit / failure determination, the start area can at least give a second profit amount during the second state. May be.

  Further, the starting area may be one in which the number of prize balls per unit time may be larger than that of the attacker.

  Furthermore, the starting area may have a larger number of prize balls than the attacker.

In addition, “the symbol display means can stop and display at least a symbol aspect (for example, a big hit stop symbol) corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination,
The start area is a state where at least the state can be changed from the first state to the second state when the result of the second success / failure determination is a result of the success / failure determination.
At least one variation time of the plurality of variation times is a third variation time (for example, 1 second),
The first variation time is a variation time longer than the second variation time,
The third variation time is a variation time shorter than the second variation time,
The second success / failure determination means is capable of deriving a result of the second success / failure determination (eg, normal / failure determination) at least a plurality of times within the first fluctuation time in the power support state. Yes,
The second success / failure determination means is capable of deriving a result of the second success / failure determination at least a plurality of times within the second fluctuation time in the power support state,
The second success / failure determination means is one in which the result of the second success / failure determination cannot be derived or can be derived only once within the third variation time in the power support state.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “provided with an effect display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of effects,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, a sound effect),
The effect display means is capable of executing the first effect at least within the first variation time,
The effect display means is capable of executing the first effect at least within the second variation time,
The effect display means does not execute the first effect within the third variation time.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “at least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect (for example, a successful effect),
The second effect is an effect that may be executed after the first effect,
The effect display means is capable of executing the second effect at least within the first variation time,
The effect display means does not execute the second effect within the second variation time,
The effect display means does not execute the second effect within the third variation time.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

The symbol display means can execute at least the symbol variation display over the first variation time (for example, execute the first freeze) when the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the determination whether or not to lose is stopped. Possible),
The symbol display means can execute at least the symbol variation display over the second variation time (for example, the second freeze can be performed) when the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the determination whether or not to lose is stopped. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display at least over a variation time shorter than the second variation time when the symbol form corresponding to the result of the winning / failing determination is stopped and displayed. It may be. Alternatively, the symbol display means may execute the symbol variation display only in a variation time shorter than the second variation time when the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the winning / failing determination is stopped and displayed. It may not be possible.

  Further, when the symbol display means stops displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the determination of whether or not the loss, the power support state is longer than the first variation time than the non-power support state. The symbol variation display may be easily performed over the variation time.

Similarly, as a game stand that can improve the interest of the game,
“Notification means capable of executing at least information notification;
A profit granting means capable of at least granting the profit;
A game machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing at least a first notification in a first period,
The first notification is notification including at least notification of profit information;
The profit granting means is capable of at least giving the player a first profit in the second period,
The profit information is information relating to the first profit,
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Further, “the profit information is information on the amount of profit that the profit granting means can at least give to the player in the second period,
The first benefit is a first amount;
The profit granting means is capable of at least giving a second profit to the player in the second period,
The second benefit is a second quantity;
The second amount is an amount less than the first amount.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the profit information is the first profit information,
The notification means is capable of executing at least a second notification in the second period,
The second notification is notification including at least notification of second profit information;
The second profit information is information relating to the amount of profit that the profit granting means has granted to the player since the second period has started.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the profit granting means is capable of at least giving the second profit to the player when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may not be satisfied in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that may not be satisfied in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description, “notification means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing information notification;
Profit granting means (for example, payout control unit 600) capable of at least granting profit;
A game machine equipped with
The notification means can execute at least a first notification (for example, display of a theoretical value) in a first period (for example, a period including the timing of FIG. 127 (b) before the attacker is released). ,
The first notification is notification of information relating to a profit that can be given to the player in the second period (for example, a period in which the attacker is open),
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that. Was explained.

  Note that the profit-related information is, for example, the number of times that a privilege necessary for obtaining profits is granted (for example, the number of operations), or the number of times that a state where an electric chew can be opened and a prize ball can be obtained. It may be the maximum number of game balls to be paid out theoretically.

  The first notification may be a notification of information relating to the amount of profit that the profit granting unit can provide to the player in the second period. The amount of profit here may theoretically be the maximum number of game balls to be paid out.

  The first notification may be notified from the first period to the second period.

In addition, the “notification means performs notification of information on the amount of profit (for example, the theoretical maximum number of winning balls) as notification of information on the profit in performing the first notification. Yes,
The amount of profit is a first amount;
The profit giving means may give only a profit of a second amount (for example, the actual number of prize balls) to the player in the second period,
The second amount is smaller than the first amount (see, for example, FIG. 127 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  That is, the amount of profit that the profit granting unit actually gives to the player in the second period may be less than the amount of profit in the first notification. Here, the second amount may be an amount including zero, but an advantageous state that can be obtained if the player wants to gain profit has actually arrived.

  It should be noted that the amount of profit actually granted to the player by the profit granting means in the second period may be the same as the amount of profit in the first notification, The amount may exceed the amount of profit in the first notification.

Further, “the notification means is capable of executing at least a second notification in the second period,
The second notification is a notification including information (for example, the actual cumulative number of prize balls) related to the amount of profit that the profit granting unit has given to the player since the second period has started.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

The notification means is capable of executing at least a second notification at the end of the second period,
The second notification may be a notification including information related to the amount of profit given to the player by the profit granting unit in the second period.

  The second notification may be performed from the start to the end of the second period, or may be displayed at the end of the second period. Moreover, the notification may include information on the total amount of profit given to the player in the second period, or information on the amount of profit every time profit is given to the player in the second period. Notification may be performed.

Further, “the profit granting means is capable of giving at least the second amount of profit to the player when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may not be satisfied in the second period (for example, winning an attacker),
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “the first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the second condition (for example, winning the jackpot) is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that may not be satisfied in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix α-1)
A launching means capable of firing at least a game ball;
A starting area where game balls can enter at least;
A first success / failure determination unit capable of executing at least a first success / failure determination;
A second success / failure determination means capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination;
Display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A selection means capable of selecting at least a symbol variation time from a plurality of symbol variation times;
A granting means capable of at least granting a profit;
Control means capable of at least starting the electric support state;
A game machine equipped with
The start area is at least state changeable from the first state to the second state when the first success / failure determination result is the first success / failure determination result,
The starting area is at least easier to enter the game ball in the second state than in the first state,
The control means is capable of at least starting the power support state when the result of the second success / failure determination is a second success / failure determination result,
The first success / failure determination means is more likely to derive at least the first success / failure determination result in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state,
The granting means is capable of at least giving a profit when a game ball enters the start area,
The granting means is capable of at least giving a first amount of game balls as the profit in the electric support state,
The launching means is capable of firing at least a second amount of game balls in the electric support state,
The first amount may be greater than the second amount;
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation times is a first symbol variation time,
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation times is a second symbol variation time,
The display means is capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display,
The display means is capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display,
The first symbol variation display is executed over the first symbol variation time,
The second symbol variation display is executed over the second symbol variation time,
The first symbol variation time is a time longer than the second symbol variation time,
The selection means is capable of selecting the first symbol variation time with a first probability in the power support state,
The selection means is capable of selecting the second symbol variation time with a second probability in the power support state,
The first probability is a lower probability than the second probability.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix α-2)
In the gaming machine described in Appendix α-1,
At least one of the plurality of symbol variation times is a third symbol variation time,
The display means is capable of executing at least a third symbol variation display,
The third symbol variation display is executed over the third symbol variation time,
The third symbol variation time is a time shorter than the second symbol variation time,
The first success / failure determination means is capable of deriving the first success / failure determination result at least a plurality of times during execution of the first symbol variation display in the power support state,
The first success / failure determination means is capable of deriving the first success / failure determination result at least a plurality of times during execution of the second symbol variation display in the power support state,
The first success / failure determination means is one in which the first success / failure determination result cannot be derived or can be derived only once during the execution of the third symbol variation display in the power support state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix α-3)
In the gaming machine described in Appendix α-1,
The second success / failure determination means is capable of deriving at least a fourth success / failure determination result as a result of the second success / failure determination,
The grant means is capable of at least giving a first profit when the second success / failure determination means derives the second success / failure determination result in the non-electric support state,
The grant means is capable of at least giving a second profit when the second success / failure determination means derives the fourth success / failure determination result in the non-electric support state,
The grant means is capable of at least giving a third benefit when the second success / failure determination means derives the second success / failure determination result in the power support state,
The grant means is capable of at least giving a fourth profit when the second success / failure determination means derives the fourth success / failure determination result in the power support state,
The first profit is a profit larger than the second profit;
The third profit is a smaller profit than the fourth profit.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix α-4)
In the gaming machine described in Appendix α-1,
Production display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is executed in the first symbol variation display,
The first effect is executed in the second symbol variation display,
The first effect is not executed in the third symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix α-5)
In the gaming machine described in Appendix α-1,
At least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is executed in the first symbol variation display,
The second effect is not executed in the second symbol variation display,
In the third symbol variation display, the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix α-6)
In the gaming machine described in Appendix α-1,
At least a part of the first symbol variation display is a stop display of the first symbol aspect,
At least a part of the second symbol variation display is a stop display of the first symbol aspect,
At least a part of the third symbol variation display is a stop display of the second symbol aspect,
The first symbol aspect is a symbol aspect corresponding to a fourth success / failure determination result,
The second symbol aspect is a symbol aspect corresponding to the second determination result,
The fourth success / failure determination result may be derived as a result of the second success / failure determination,
The fourth success / failure determination result is different from the second success / failure determination result,
The third symbol variation time is the longest symbol variation time corresponding to the second success / failure determination result in the power support state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix β-1)
An informing means capable of at least informing information;
A granting means capable of at least granting a profit;
A game machine equipped with
The notification means is capable of executing at least a first notification in a first period,
The first notification is a notification of information on the amount of profit that the granting unit can grant to the player in the second period,
The second period is a period after the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix β-2)
In the game stand described in Appendix β-1,
The amount of profit in the first notification is a first amount;
The amount of profit granted to the player by the granting means in the second period is a second amount,
The second amount is less than the first amount.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix β-3)
In the game stand described in Appendix β-1,
The notification means is capable of executing at least a second notification in the second period,
The second notification is a notification of information related to the amount of profit that the granting unit has granted to the player in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix β-4)
In the game stand described in Appendix β-1,
The granting means is capable of granting at least a third amount of profit to the player when the first condition is established,
The third amount is less than or equal to the first amount;
The third amount is less than or equal to the second amount;
The first condition is a condition that may not be satisfied in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix β-5)
In the game stand described in Appendix β-1,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied at least after the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that may not be satisfied in the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of each embodiment described above, each applicable mode, modification, or supplementary note, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, applicable modes, variations, You may apply to an appendix.

  The technique described in this specification can also be applied to a sealed pachinko machine.

  FIG. 128 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the technology described in this specification can be applied.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 128, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 128 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine and uses the enclosed sphere as a launching sphere. May be executed by credit.

  Furthermore, the technology described in this specification can also be applied to a rotating game machine (slot machine).

  Subsequently, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an applicable form to which the technical idea of the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 129 to 172 are used only for the description of the applicable modes described below in principle, and the following description is provided even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings. Then, priority is given to the code | symbol shown in FIGS. 129-172.

<Applicable form A>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to an applicable form A of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the applicable form A of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by a setting person (for example, a player or the like), a confirmation (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirmation button, and a lower part of the confirmation button. , A right button located to the right of the confirm button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. Yes. In addition, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor 427 (see FIG. 132) that detects the pressing operation of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this applicable form has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. It should be noted that at least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 may be configured to have the same function as the chance button 136 described above.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

<Back of the pachinko machine>
FIG. 130 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 129 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

<Front of game board>
FIG. 131 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this applicable embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The universal map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a universal map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this applicable form. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this applicable form.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). In this applicable form, up to a predetermined number (for example, two) of general-purpose variable games It is possible to hold. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). Can be held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  A plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged in the game board 200 in this applicable form, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general winning holes 226). ), The payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this applicable form, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. Collectively, it is called “sphere (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this applicable form, One is arranged on the left side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200 in this applicable form. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in the present applicable form, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and only one is arranged below the center of the game board 200 in this applicable form. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm in this applicable form, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. Is provided with a forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this applicable embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 An operation unit sensor 427 that detects an operation, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430, chance button detection sensor 426, and operation unit sensor 427 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Read stored image data, etc. It is connected to generate a display image using the rear for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 a (video display processor), a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In this applicable form, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 133A to 133C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 10A, 10 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure F” and “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure, the white portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of this applicable form, as will be described later, the determination of whether or not a big win in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol and “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, both of which are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, which is a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R. “Special figure E” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing F” and “special drawing d” are out-of-order symbols, and are the symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present applicable embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 133 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of this applicable form, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  For example, when the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing F” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 133 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stoppage display modes of the usual figure in this applicable form: “normal figure A” which is a winning symbol and “general figure B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In this applicable form, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (this application form). Then, it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage is less than 9v). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (about once every 2 ms in this applicable embodiment), and the main control unit timer allocation is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start processing at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this applicable form) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In this applicable mode, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this applicable form, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal. 132 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300 shown in FIG. 132 (in this applicable form, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). . In this step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this applicable form, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of a match with the general prize opening 226, the variable prize opening 234, the first special figure start opening 230, and the second special figure start opening 232, or the general figure start opening It is determined that 228 has passed.

  In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this applicable form, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In addition, in this applicable form, the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 133 (c)) and the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 133 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag.
Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, special figure prefetch processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (details will be described later). Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 controls the turning on / off of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214, and then confirms the special diagram 2 using the second special symbol display device 214. Display. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this applicable form) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) ) That is, the effect standby in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for the period during which the image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Set information indicating the period. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this applicable form, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are configured with command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes the big hit flag and small hit flag values, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure stop symbol selected in the special drawing related lottery process, and the timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including a value for a special symbol variation time, including a value of a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a value of a special symbol probability variation flag, etc., a winning effect command and an end effect start In the case of a command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the above rotation start setting transmission process, the big hit flag and the small hit flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

<Special figure look-ahead processing>
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 137 (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are shown in FIG. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S251). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S252, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S252, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a pair of special figure 2 random value) is obtained before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S253 following step S252, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S254, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S255, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S256, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (ordinary high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S258. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S256, the increased special figure 1 starting information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value pair) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S257 following step S256, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S258, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special-Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In addition, pre-reading is always executed for the starting information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the starting information in FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.

<Prefetch result information>
FIG. 137 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 6A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 5B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is expressed as “none”.

  FIG. 6C shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 5C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are determined in advance, and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. The information may be determined and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

<Special drawing 1 related lottery processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a special drawing 1 related lottery process in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process.

  In step S281, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not the special figure 1 variable game or big hit game is in progress, and if applicable, the process is terminated. If not, the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 variable game on hold. If there is no special figure 1 variable game on hold, the process ends. If there is a hold, the process proceeds to step S283.

  In step S283, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special figure probability variation flag is ON or OFF. If the special figure probability variation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S284, and a high probability table for success / failure determination to be described later [see FIG. ] Using the lottery data, the big hit determination (big hit determination) and the small hit determination (small hit determination) are performed, and if the special figure probability variation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S285 to determine the success described later. Using the lottery data of the determination low probability table [special figure 1], big hit determination (big hit determination) and small hit determination (small hit determination) are performed.

  In step S286, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination result is a big win. If yes, the process proceeds to step S287, and if not, the process proceeds to step S288. In step S287, a symbol lottery is performed based on the jackpot winning / failing determination result and the symbol random number value. In the case of 2, any one of the special drawings a to c) is determined, and then the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S288, it is determined whether or not the small hitting result is a small hit. If yes, the process proceeds to step S289, and if not, the process proceeds to step S290. In step S 289, a symbol lottery is performed based on the above-described small hit / no-go determination result and the symbol random number value, and the small hit symbol (in this applicable form, in FIG. After determining “no hit”, the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S290, after the symbol lottery is performed based on the symbol random number value, and the off symbol (in this applicable form, special figure F in the case of special figure 1 and special figure d in the case of special figure 2) is determined. The process proceeds to step S291. In step S291, a variation type lottery is performed on the basis of the type of special figure stop symbol determined in steps S286 to S290 and the number of currently stored memory (at the start of fluctuation of special figure 2) to determine the fluctuation pattern and special figure fluctuation time. To do.

  In the above-described special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery process related to special figure 2 is performed. Of the special figure 1 related lottery processes shown in FIG. The table [Special Figure 1] is replaced with a high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2], and the low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] is replaced with a low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2]. Since the process is the same as the process without the determination, the description thereof is omitted.

<Data table of main control unit>
Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Win / fail judgment table>
139 (a) is a low probability table for special determination [Special Figure 1], which is an example of a table used for the determination of special Figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the numerical value range and the success / failure result of FIG. Moreover, the high probability table for success / failure determination [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 5B is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. 3 is a table in which a range of winning random numbers and a result of success / failure in FIG.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the success / failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 1] when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, and based on the acquired special figure winning random number value, Judgment whether special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), or wrong (missed) In the case where the special figure 1 is in the special figure high probability state, the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) is obtained by referring to the high probability table for success / failure determination [special figure 1]. The big hit judgment or the small hit judgment of FIG. 1 is performed.

  For example, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit) and the big hit provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating that it is a big hit in the flag storage area is set (hereinafter, setting the big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the big hit flag on”).

  Further, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10220 to 10383, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit) and is provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the small hit flag is stored in the small hit flag storage area is set (hereinafter, the setting of the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag ON”).

  In the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is 0 to 10000 or 10384 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is lost, and The information indicating that there is a shift in the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag is set (hereinafter referred to as setting the big hit flag to OFF) Setting the deviation information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”).

  The failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 6C is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the numerical value range and the success / failure result of FIG. Further, the high / bad determination probability table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 4D is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of the winning random number value, and the success / failure result of FIG.

  When the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for special determination [Special figure 2], and acquires the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later). ) To determine whether the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit) or wrong (missed) (special figure 2 big hit judgment). In such a case, the jackpot determination of special figure 2 is performed based on the acquired special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) with reference to the high probability table for determination of success / failure [special figure 2]. Note that the special figure 2 variable game is configured not to win a small hit.

<Special figure determination table>
The special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] and the special figure determination table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIGS. 140 (a) and (b) include the above-described big hit flag and small hit flag (result of determination of success / failure), and symbols. It is the data table which linked | related and stored the random value and the kind of special figure stop symbol by the 1st, 2nd special figure display apparatuses 212 and 214. FIG.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table, the above jackpot determination result (the value of the big hit flag), the small hit determination result (the value of the small hit flag), and the acquired symbol random number value. Based on this, a special symbol lottery for determining the type of the special symbol stop symbol is performed. When the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as the symbol random number value, and when the big hit flag is on, the small bonus symbol generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used. Use the random number value as the design random number value, and if the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit judgment result and the small hit judgment result are out of date), use the acquired off-set design random number value as the design random number value. To do.

  In this applicable mode, in the special figure 1 variable game, refer to the special figure determination table [Special figure 1] in FIG. 11 (a), and when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit) When the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 24, the special symbol A has a probability of 25/100, and when the acquired symbol random number is 25 to 49, the special symbol B has the probability of 25 /. The special figure C is selected with a probability of 5/100 when the numerical value is 50 to 54, and the special figure D is selected with a probability of 45/100 when the acquired design random number value is 55 to 99. In addition, when the small hit flag is on (when the determination result is a small hit), the special figure E (small hit) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the design random number, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set. When it is off (when the determination result is out of date), the special figure F (out) is selected with a probability of 100/100 (100%) regardless of the design random number value.

  Also, in the special figure 2 variable game, when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit), the special figure a has a probability of 70/100 when the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 69. When the acquired symbol random value is 70 to 74, the special symbol b is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random value is 75 to 99, the special symbol c is selected with a probability of 25/100. In the special figure 2 variable game, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the result of the determination is wrong), the special figure d (missed) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the design random number value. To do. In the special figure 2 variable game, unlike the special figure 1 variable game, the probability that the small hit is selected is set to 0%.

<Variable display time determination table>
141 is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table used for determining the fluctuation time of FIG. 1, and FIG. 142 is the special figure 2 fluctuation used for determining the fluctuation time of FIG. It is an example of a display time determination table.

  The variable display time determination table is a table in which the above-described special figure stop symbol type, special symbol variable time, the effect performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of special graphic variation, and a random value are stored in association with each other. It is. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a variation pattern lottery for determining the variation time of the special figure and the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the variation display time determination table and the acquired random value.

  For example, when determining the fluctuation time of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 141, the special figure stop symbol type is special figure A or special figure B, and When the numerical value range is 1001 to 20000, the variation time is 45000 ms, and the decoration design display device 208 is selected as per super reach A. Further, when determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, the special figure stop symbol type is special figure a to special figure c with reference to the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 142. When the numerical value range is 20001 to 65535, the fluctuation time is 65000 ms, and the decoration pattern display device 208 is selected as per super reach B.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. In step S311, when the pressing of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the operation means. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this applicable embodiment). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this applicable embodiment). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Operation means image display processing>
Next, the operation means image display process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation means image display process.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether the start timing of the reception period of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137) has arrived. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1002. The process proceeds to S1004. The operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137, and includes, for example, a ball launch handle 134 and the like as long as it can be operated by the player. The “operation means reception period” is a period during which an operation of the operation means is detected and it is determined that the operation is valid and processing corresponding to the operation can be executed.

  In addition, the condition for determining that “the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation means has arrived” is not particularly limited. For example, when winning a big hit or a small win of a special figure variable game in the special figure prefetching process, a predetermined number of games When a ball is paid out, if the gaming state transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state advantageous to the player (or the third gaming state disadvantageous to the player), after the big hit game For example, when a special figure variation game is performed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined lottery is won.

  In step S1002, in order to display the operation means image (details will be described later, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136) on the decorative symbol display device 208, effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406. The process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, an elapsed time notification image for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means (including an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image to be described later, and an elapsed time notification image accompanied by display of the operation means image is included. In the same manner, the effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406 and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. To finish the process.

  For example, when an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image (an operation means image that can be understood that some operation is necessary for the operation means. For example, a progress information notification image that simulates the operation means) is displayed. The effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Also, an elapsed time notification image that does not include information related to the operation means (an elapsed time notification image in which it is not possible to grasp that the operation of the operation means is necessary. For example, an elapsed time notification image consisting only of a number representing the elapsed time) is displayed. If there is, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, although this application form shows the example which displays the elapsed time alert image (for example, the image of the scale of the meter) on the decorative symbol display device 208 in each applicable form described later, it does not display the elapsed time alert image. It may be. If not displayed, the process ends without performing the process of step S1003.

  In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the operation means image is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If not, the process ends. If it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1005. In this step S1005, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation means corresponding to the operation means image (for example, the chance button 136 when the operation means image is an image imitating the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation is accepted. If YES in step S1007, the process advances to step S1007. If no operation is accepted, the process advances to step S1006.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1008. Here, the condition for determining that “the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived” is not particularly limited. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation means in step S1002, the gaming state is different. The case where it transfers to a gaming state etc. is mentioned.

  In step S1007, the operation means images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (including an operation means image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image and an operation means image that accompanies the display of the elapsed time notification image. The display of the operation means image is terminated. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the process proceeds to step S1009 if applicable, and to step S1010 if not applicable. move on.

  In step S1009, in order to switch the operation means image to a specific image when the elapsed time of the operation means reception period coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the effect data corresponding to the specific image is changed. Processing such as reading from the ROM 406 is performed. On the other hand, in step S1010, in order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406. If the effect data needs to be updated, image data update processing is performed. I do.

  For example, an operation unit image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image (an operation unit image that can grasp the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation unit. For example, display mode (color, size, shape, font of characters according to the elapsed time) In order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed. When the data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, an operation unit image that does not include information related to the elapsed time (an operation unit image in which the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation unit cannot be grasped. For example, an operation unit image including only an image imitating the operation unit, When an operation means image consisting only of character information representing a name (for example, a chance button) is displayed, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is stored in the ROM 406 in order to continue displaying the operation means image. When the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

<Notice lottery processing>
Next, the notice lottery process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the notice lottery process.

  In step S1101, with reference to the value of the big hit flag included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, symbol variation start command), if the value of the big hit flag is on, it is determined that the big hit is won, step S1102 If the value of the big hit flag is OFF, it is determined that the big hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1103. In step S1102, after performing a lottery using a lottery value corresponding to “big hit (15R series)”, “big hit (sudden probability change)” or “big hit (latency probability change)” in a later-described notice lottery table, step S1106 is performed. Proceed to

  In step S1103, the value of the small hit flag included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, the symbol variation start command) is referred to. In step S1104, if the value of the small hit flag is OFF, it is determined that the small hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1105. In step S1104, the lottery value corresponding to “small hit” in the notice lottery table, which will be described later, is used, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1105, the lottery value corresponding to “miss” in the notice lottery table, which will be described later, is used, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the process is terminated after a command including information on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500.

<Data table of first sub-control unit>
Next, a data table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149.

<Notice lottery table>
The notice lottery table shown in FIG. 147 is an example of a table used for the notice lottery performed in the notice lottery process described above. The special symbol design type (result of success / failure), the fluctuation time of the special figure, the notice table number, and the lottery value It is a table in which numerical ranges are associated and stored.

  In the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when the big hit flag is on, the item of “symbol type” in the notice lottery table is “big hit (15R series)”, “big hit (sudden probability change)”, or “big hit ( With reference to the lottery value corresponding to “latency probability change”, a lottery (preliminary lottery) for selecting any one of the notice tables 1 to 5 is performed based on the acquired random number value for the notice lottery.

  For example, when the jackpot flag is on, the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B, and the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is 15000 ms, the item of “symbol type” in the notice lottery table is “big hit (15R System) ”and“ variation time ”items refer to the lottery value corresponding to“ 15000 ms ”, and when the obtained random number for preliminary lottery is 0 to 9, the preliminary announcement table 2 is selected and the preliminary lottery randomness acquired When the numerical value is 10 to 29, the advance notice table 3 is selected, when the obtained advance notice lottery random number value is 30 to 94, the advance notice table 4 is selected, and when the obtained advance notice lottery random number value is 95 to 99, The notice table 5 is selected.

  In this applicable form, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (disconnected) and the fluctuation time of the special figure is 1500 ms, 3000 ms, or 8000 ms, the notice table 1 is independent of the notice lottery random value. Select. The notice table 5 is selected when the jackpot flag is on and the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B (or the special symbol type of special figure 2 is special figure a to special figure c). Only if. Further, the lottery value when the big hit flag is on and the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure D (latency probability change) and the lottery value when the small hit flag is on are set to be the same. In this applicable form, the lottery is performed with the table for small hits, but the lottery may be performed with the same table as the table for big hits.

<Notice table>
The notice table shown in FIG. 148 (a) is an example of the notice table 4 among the notice tables described above, and is a table that stores the notice mode and the numerical range of the lottery value in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 when the notice table 4 is selected in the notice lottery described above, and determines the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. The notice mode lottery is performed. For example, when the acquired random number value is 0 to 9, “button press (one time) notice” is selected, the acquired mode is determined, and when the acquired random number value is 10 to 24, “button press (two times) ) Select "Notice", select "Conversation notice" when the acquired random number is 25-39, select "Open door" when the acquired random value is 40-59, When the numerical value is 60 to 74, “Treasure box selection notice” is selected. When the obtained random number value is 75 to 89, “Step up notice” is selected. When the obtained random number value is 90 to 99, “Title box notice” is selected. Select "Notice".

  Note that FIGS. 148 (b) to 148 (d) and FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 (b) are subdivided contents of “open the door notice”, for example, the first notice. When “open door notice” is selected in the lottery, the table corresponding to “open door notice” shown in FIG. 148 (b) is referred to, and the meter color is changed based on the obtained random number value. The lottery for the second notice mode to be decided is performed. Next, in the second notice mode lottery, for example, when “meter color blue → red” is selected, the table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 148 (c) is referred to. Based on the acquired random number value, the third notice mode lottery for determining the mode of the character (princess) is performed.

  Next, in the third notice mode lottery, for example, when “Princess“ Chance! ”” Is selected, the table corresponding to “Princess“ Chance! ”” Shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fourth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fourth notice mode lottery, for example, when “signboard“ reach may ”” is selected, the table corresponding to “signboard“ reach may ”” shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fifth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed. Next, when “Hime no Ogi (Hanamaru)” is selected in the fifth notice mode lottery, for example, a table corresponding to “Hime no Ogi (Hanamaru)” shown in FIG. With reference to the obtained random number value, the sixth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed.

<Applicable form 1 of operation means image display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 150, an applicable form 1 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, this figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 1 in time series.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136 when the start timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 has arrived. The first operating means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a decoration pattern. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208.

  Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (6 seconds in this example) has not arrived, but two operations on the chance button 136 are performed. In order to prompt the player, the second operation means image BG2 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, and the display of the character information “Press the chance button!” Is displayed in the lower center. doing.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed below the first operation means image BG1.

  Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed. The second operation means image BG2 is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B has passed a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) from the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. Timing is shown. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed.

  At this timing, since the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the image TG2 ′ displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. To the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136) The scale of the meter (filled area) is gradually reduced).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a moving image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. . At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 5 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 1 second) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 3 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes. In this example, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, but the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are deleted. The display of the notification image TG1 may be continued.

  According to the operation means image display according to the applicable form 1, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In this applicable form, the timing shown in FIG. 6A is the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds), and the timing shown in FIG. Although the timing shown in b) is the start timing of the second operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, FIG. The timing shown in (a) is the start timing of the first operation reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the chance button 136, and the start of the second operation reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the chance button 136. It is good also as timing. That is, the start timings of the N-th operation (N is a positive integer) operation reception period of the operation means may be set to the same timing (the same applies to other applicable forms).

  In addition, when the start timing of the first operation reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the chance button 136 and the start timing of the second operation reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the chance button 136 are set to the same timing. Even when each reception time is different, the notification start timing of the elapsed time may be different. In this example, the reception time of the second operation of the chance button 136 after two seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation reception. The elapsed time may be notified.

<Applicable form 2 of operation means image display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, an applicable mode 2 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, this figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 2 in time series. In addition, since the display shown to the figure (a)-the figure (f) is the same as the display example shown to the said FIG. 150 (a)-(f), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 151 (g) shows the state shown in FIGS. 15 (a) to (d), that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and instead of the image display, a decorative symbol display device A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area 208.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. Has elapsed, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is notified that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). The image to be displayed is displayed.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed. Erasing. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period for the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed as shown in FIG. A character image (時間) may be displayed instead of the display of the elapsed time notification image TG2. In the state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ((g) in this example). In addition, as shown in FIG. 6J, a character image (爺) may be displayed instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is accepted immediately after a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has passed since the timing shown in FIG. Yes. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the character image (爺) is displayed instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. doing. In the state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ((g) in this example). In addition, as shown in FIG. 8J, a character image (don and niece) may be displayed instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2.

  The timing shown in (l) of FIG. 4 indicates the timing immediately after a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the first and second operations of the chance button 136 have not been performed. The second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted.

  According to the operation means image display according to the applicable form 2, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

<Applicable Mode 3 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 152, a description will be given of an applicable mode 3 of the operation unit image display performed by the above-described operation unit image display process. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 3 in time series.

  In this applicable form 3, the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is applied instead of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the applicable form 1. The third progress information notification image TG3 is an image for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and also an image suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation game. . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the result of the success / failure determination is suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this) Instead, the result of the determination of success / failure may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and there may be three or more progress information notification images. In this case, the determination result may be suggested using at least one progress information notification image.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the success / failure determination using the progress information notification image, the result of the determination of the success / failure may be suggested in another display area. Further, in this example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has come, but the display is performed at other timings. For example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started after the elapse of a predetermined time after the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

  According to the operation means image display according to the applicable form 3, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

<Applicable form 4 of operation means image display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 153, an applicable mode 4 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 4 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136. The means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) and the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the same timing. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (in this example, 6 seconds) of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136) is displayed on the first operation means image BG1. Shown below.

  Further, a second elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (6 seconds in this example) of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2. An image TG2 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the second operation means image BG2. Shown below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is also continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation reception period of the chance button 136, the predetermined time from the start timing of the first operation reception period of the chance button 136. Immediately after (6 seconds) have elapsed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the state continues.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136, the start timing of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 is Immediately after the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted, and the state is continued.

  FIG. 8E shows the state shown in FIG. 7B, that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208.

  FIG. 5F shows the state of the chance button 136 in the state shown in FIG. 5E, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136. The timing at which the second operation is performed is shown. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. In the right display area of the device 208, a character image (爺) different from the character image (donor) is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 5E, the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation. The display shown in f) may be performed.

  FIG. 4G shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 The elapsed time notification image TG2 is deleted.

  According to the operation means image display according to the applicable form 4, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

<Applicable Mode 5 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 154, description will be given of an applicable form 5 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 5 in time series.

  This applicable form 5 applies the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 in place of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 in the applicable form 4. The fourth progress information notification image TG4 is an image for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and also an image suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation game. . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the result of the success / failure determination is suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this) Instead, the result of the determination of success / failure may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and there may be three or more progress information notification images. In this case, the determination result may be suggested using at least one progress information notification image.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the success / failure determination using the progress information notification image, the result of the determination of the success / failure may be suggested in another display area. In this example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. For example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

  According to the operation means image display according to the applicable form 5, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

<Operation means image display applicable form 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, an applicable mode 6 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, this figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 6 in time series.

  In this applicable form, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed. For example, in the case of hitting special figure 1 by big hit determination, special figure stop figure of special figure 1 is decided to special figure A by special figure lottery, and the fluctuation time of special figure is decided to be 45000 ms by fluctuation pattern lottery, The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command from the main control unit 300 based on the fact that the jackpot flag value is ON, the special figure stop symbol is special figure A, and the special figure variation time is 45000 ms. The notice lottery is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45000 ms of the “big hit (15R series)” in the notice lottery table shown in 147. In this notice lottery, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 94, the notice table 4 is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 shown in FIG. 148 (a), and performs the first notice mode lottery that determines the notice form of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. For example, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in a numerical value range of 40 to 59, “open door notice” is selected. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to the “open door notice” shown in FIG. 148 (b), and determines the color of the meter based on the obtained random number value for the second time. For example, assuming that the obtained random number value is in a numerical value range of 50 to 64, “meter color blue → red” is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 148 (c), and based on the acquired random number value, the character (princess) mode For example, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in a numerical range of 30 to 59, the princess “chance!” Is selected. In this applicable form 6, the notice effect is executed according to the notice effect form determined by such a notice lottery or notice form lottery.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (a), the first operating means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation period for the operation of the chance button 136 (6 seconds in this example). An image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, in order to prompt the player to perform an operation on the chance button 136, the display of the character information “Open the door !!” is displayed above the left display area.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, a chance opportunity) for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at almost the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for the operation of the button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). It is displayed below.

  In addition, at the same timing as the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1, an image corresponding to the notice effect of the above-mentioned "open the door notice" (in this example, the characters "open the door !!") A display and an image simulating a door) are displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this applicable form, the first elapsed time for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 by a part of the image of the notice effect (in this example, an image simulating a door) It also serves as the notification image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 also serving as a notice effect is not changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for informing that 1 second has elapsed (that the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is set to the first color (in this example, blue) as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “meter color (blue → red)”. ) To the second color (in this example, red).

  Further, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (in this example, white) to the first. The color is changed to 4 (red in this example). With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation.

  Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the color of the second elapsed time notification image TG1-2, a predetermined time from the start timing of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136 is obtained. Although it is informed that (4 seconds) has elapsed, the change in the color may be configured to suggest, for example, the result of the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for informing that 6 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 also serving as a notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 5E shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification images TG1-1 and TG-2 are erased, the above-mentioned princess “chance!” The image corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the character display of “chance!” And the character image (princess)) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation reception period, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification After erasing the images TG 1-1 and TG-2, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display may be performed after the display shown in FIG. FIG. 5G is a diagram showing an example of reach display in the decorative symbol variation display, and the reach display is performed after any of the states shown in FIGS. Is displayed.

  According to the operation means image display according to the applicable form 6, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players. In the case of this applicable form, the lottery is also performed for the display of the elapsed time notification image (meter color) in the notice table, but the lottery may not be performed in the notice table for the elapsed time notice image. . In this case, the elapsed time notification image notifies only the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and changes the display mode after a predetermined time (for example, the color of the meter changes when T seconds elapse). There may be. Further, the elapsed time notification image may be a notification that only notifies the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means and does not change the display mode (color, size, shape, character font, etc.) with the passage of time. .

<Operation means image display applicable form 7>
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, an applicable form 7 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 7 in time series. In this applicable form, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation period for the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, a chance opportunity) for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at almost the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for the operation of the button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). It is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image for informing that 3 seconds have passed has been displayed. Further, at this timing, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (not shown) for notifying the remaining time (3 seconds in this example) of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136 above the first operation means image BG1. In the example, an image of numerical information) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Is displaying an image notifying that 5 seconds have elapsed. Further, at this timing, an image for notifying that the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 second is displayed as the remaining time notification image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Is displaying an image notifying that 6 seconds have elapsed. At this timing, as the remaining time notification image TG1-2, the remaining operation time of the chance button 136 is 0 seconds (a predetermined time (6 seconds from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136). ) Has been displayed.

  FIG. 5F is a diagram showing an example of a failure display when the result of the special figure variable game is out of play, and FIG. 8G is a jackpot display when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. It is the figure which showed an example. In these missed display or jackpot display, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state (during the operation reception period) before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. Or when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

  According to the operation means image display according to the applicable form 7, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

<Operation means image display applicable form 8>
Next, an applicable mode 8 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 8 in time series. In this applicable form, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the right of the setting operation unit 137 is triggered by the start timing of the right button and left button operation reception period (in this example, 6 seconds). The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the button operation (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box; white) is used for the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and for the left button operation of the setting operation unit 137. The corresponding second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box, white) is displayed in the left display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the left side of the character information display “Select a treasure chest that can be opened with the direction key!” Is displayed to prompt the player to operate the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. It is displayed above the area.

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2, the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is notified. First elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137) Are displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first color (blue in this example).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has passed 1 second (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the right button and left button operation reception period of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 1 second (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is changed from the first color (blue in this example) to the second as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “treasure box color (blue → red)”. (In this example, it is red).

  At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the second operation means image BG2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the fourth color. (In this example, it is red). Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the color of the second operation means image BG2, the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is changed. Although it is informed that the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, for example, it may be configured to suggest a result of the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the second operation means image BG2 that also serves as a notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 6E shows that the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the right button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation unit image BG1, the second operation unit image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted. An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing a book popping out from the treasure chest) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6F shows the left button of the setting operation unit 137 in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing at which the operation was performed is shown. At this timing, since the left button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation unit image BG1, the second operation unit image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted. An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing a book popping out from the treasure chest) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the notice effects shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. Further, when the determination result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6G, a notice effect with higher reliability and expectation is performed than the notice effect shown in FIG. It may be configured.

  FIG. 11H shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 being performed. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is erased since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 being performed. ing. Note that the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2 may be deleted in accordance with the deletion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  According to the operation means image display according to the applicable form 7, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

<Applicable Form 9 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a description will be given of an applicable mode 9 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 9 in time series. In this applicable form, in addition to the operation means image display, the hold icon and the change icon are displayed.

  Here, the hold icon refers to an animation of a texture image representing the number of hold of the special figure variable game. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed. The animation to be executed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), the order of the hold changes due to the digestion of the previous hold, and the hold icon changes to another display position (for example, the position on the left side) ) Animation executed when moving to () (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon movement animation”), animation executed when the display state of the holding icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter “ Hold icon change animation ”), the hold is consumed and the hold icon Animation to be executed when left (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon erasing animation”), non-priority side special icon hold icon when priority side special figure hold increases in priority change aircraft There is an animation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pending icon save animation”) executed when the icon is saved. In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  In addition, after the suspension is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held.

  For animations related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is moved to a different area from the hold icon display area when the hold is consumed. Animation that moves as a fluctuation icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icons”) and animation that changes from the hold icon display form to the change icon display form (hereinafter “between hold and change icons” Sometimes called “change animation”. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, after the change animation for changing the first (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area to the change icon CI is performed, the change icon is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. CI is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI is a variation icon for suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variation icon CI is represented by character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. It is composed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). An image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to see. .

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. And displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  FIG. 5F shows the state in which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 5C, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, “Leach is!” Is displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information that suggests whether or not the special figure change is correct is covered with the change icon CI, so that a part of the information is invisible or difficult to see.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is performed before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image is displayed as shown in FIG. After erasing BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting whether or not the special figure change is correct may be displayed in front of the change icon CI. Although not shown in the figure, after the change icon CI is erased in addition to the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the special figure change is displayed. Good.

  Further, when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 11H is a diagram showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display is displayed after any of the states (e), (f), and (g). Also good.

  According to the operation means image display of the applicable form 9, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

<Applicable Form 10 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 159, an applicable mode 10 of the operation unit image display performed by the above-described operation unit image display process will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 10 in time series. In this applicable form, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, an erase animation for erasing the earliest hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (chance in this example) Button).

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the result of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful, a notice effect is displayed (in this example, an image in which an upside-down character image (dono) has a signboard with “Leach may”) is displayed). Yes.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Is displayed on the screen to notify that 3 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since all of the first operation means image BG1 and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image are displayed. All of TG1 is invisible. Note that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 or at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be invisible or difficult to view.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 4 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, “character information“ It's super hot !! ”) is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. In other words, in this example, a part of the information that suggests whether or not the special figure change is correct is covered with the image of the notice effect, so that a part of the information is invisible.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is performed before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image is displayed as shown in FIG. After erasing BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the notice effect, information suggesting whether or not the special figure has changed may be displayed.

  Further, when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 11H is a diagram showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display is displayed after any of the states (e), (f), and (g). Also good.

  According to the operation means image display of the applicable form 10, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

<Applicable Form 11 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 160, an applicable mode 11 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 11 in time series. In the present applicable form, in addition to the operation means image display, it is configured so as to display a general notice change display and a notice effect based on determination of whether or not the normal figure change display is correct.

  FIG. 4A shows the timing when the general map variation display is started during the special map variation display, and the production accompanying the general map variation display is started. At this timing, the base map change display is started in the base map change display area 208s, the notice effect is performed based on the determination of whether or not the base map change display is appropriate, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. (In this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a notice effect (in this example, a character image (princess) appears from below) is performed based on the normal map change display and whether or not the normal map change game is successful.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible. In addition to (or instead of) this, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to view (the same applies to the present applicable embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the announcement effect based on the result of the normal-game variable game is continued, and, as the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has passed 3 seconds (the remaining period of the reception period) An image informing that the time is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  FIG. 4E shows the timing when the usual stop display is performed. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the normal fluctuation (in this example, the character image (princess) has a fan) Image). Further, as described above, since the symbol 2 per universal symbol is selected in the common variable game, the universal symbol decorative symbol corresponding to the “general symbol decoration 2” is displayed in the general symbol variation display area 208s.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, the text information “is it a chance?” Is displayed. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display shown in FIG.

  According to the operation means image display of the applicable form 11, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

<Applicable form 12 of operation means image display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, an applicable mode 12 of the operation unit image display performed by the above-described operation unit image display process will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 12 in time series. In this applicable form, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, three hold icons PI1 to PI3 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are three special figure variable games on hold.
In this example, by displaying a character image (savohani) as the third hold icon PI3, the result of the prefetch of the third special figure variable game is suggested.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 3 to 2. At this timing, an erase animation for erasing the first hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and the second hold icon PI2 and the third hold icon PI3 are moved to the positions of the adjacent hold icons. There is a moving animation to move to.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when the moving animation of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is completed. At this timing, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed. However, since the first operation means image BG1 is displayed behind the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3 and cannot be seen. In addition to this (or in place of it), at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to visually recognize with the hold icon PI3 (the same applies to the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  FIG. 5F shows the state in which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 5B, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the special figure change after the special figure change (in this example, A notice (in this example, the character information “After two revolutions is hot!”) Indicating the success / failure result of the special figure fluctuation after two revolutions is displayed. Note that the advance notice is an example of a “prefetching advance notice” that indicates the result of the special figure change after the special figure change.

  In this example, the display of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is not erased, but it may be erased simultaneously with the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 5G is a diagram showing an example of the decorative symbol variation display, and the variation display may be displayed after any of the states shown in FIGS.

  According to the operation means image display of the applicable form 12, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the modified example of the applicable form 12 in time series. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 3C to 3E, the first operation means image BG1 is displayed in front of the hold icon PI3, so that all of the first elapsed time notification images TG1 are held icons PI3. It is in a visible state without being covered with.

  According to the operation means image display of the modification of the applicable form 12, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

<Applicable Form 13 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 164, an applicable mode 13 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, FIGS. 163 to 164 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the applicable form 13 in time series. In this applicable form, a part of one of the two operation means images is covered with the variation icon.

  FIG. 163 (a) shows the timing when the special figure variation game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing a change animation for changing the first (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area to the change icon CI, the change icon is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. CI is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI is a variation icon for suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variation icon CI is represented by character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. It is composed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the first operation corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the variation icon CI in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to see. .

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a decoration pattern. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208. In this example, the second operation means image BG2 is not covered with the change icon CI, and all of the second operation means image BG2 is visible.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. , And behind the change icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. ing.

  At this timing, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed as the second operation means. It is displayed below the image BG2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) from the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. Timing is shown. At this timing, since a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 2 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  At this timing, since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the still image TG2 displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. 'Is a second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, the elapsed time of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 At the same time, the scale of the meter (filled part) is switched to an image that gradually decreases).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing.

  FIG. 164 (i) shows the timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. Show. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208. However, since a part of the character image (dono) is covered with the change icon CI, a part of the character image (dono) is invisible or difficult to see. (J) to (k) in FIG. 6 are the chance buttons before the predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 after the display in FIG. A display example when the second operation of 136 is not performed is shown.

  FIG. 11 (l) shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Show. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (爺) is displayed in the right display area of the device 208. Even when the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation, the display shown in FIG. Good. FIG. 6 (m) shows a display example after the character image (donor) is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of FIG. 1 (l).

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing operation means image display of the modified example of applicable form 13 in time series. In this example, as in the above-described applicable form 4, the chance button is triggered by the arrival timing of the acceptance period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation 136 and the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed on the decorative design display device 208 at the same timing.

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing as the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2. A second elapsed time notification image TG2 for displaying the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. And it comprises so that a part of 1st elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG1 may be covered with the fluctuation | variation icon CI.

  That is, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 that notifies the same elapsed time (in this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is displayed by the variation icon CI. Since it is covered, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  According to the operation means image display of the applicable form 13, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  Note that the position at which the variation icon CI is displayed is not limited to the above, and is at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the change icon, and only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed. May be displayed at a position covered by the change icon, and at least two or more of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. The image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

  Further, only two images of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image are displayed at the positions covered with the change icons. Well, at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the variation icon. Alternatively, only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position that is not covered by the variation icon. Alternatively, the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

  Further, the image displayed at the position covered by the variation icon may be at least partly covered, only partly covered, or all covered. .

<Applicable form 14 of operation means image display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, an applicable form 14 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 14 in time series.

  This applicable form is one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 in the applicable form 6 (see FIG. 155) (in this example, the first One elapsed time notification image TG1-1) is covered with the image of the notice effect shown in FIGS. 11B to 10D, so that one of the one image (first elapsed time notification image TG1-1) is covered. It is comprised so that a part may be invisible or difficult to visually recognize. Further, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is covered with the character image (dono) at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, and the character image (princess) is covered with the timing shown in FIG. A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is covered. Moreover, in this applicable form, the notice lottery process using FIGS. 147-21 is performed similarly to the said applicable form 6 (refer FIG. 155). Since other displays are the same as in the applicable form 6 (see FIG. 155), the description thereof is omitted.

<Applicable Mode 15 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a description will be given of an applicable form 15 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 15 in time series.

  In this applicable form, a part of the first elapsed time notice image TG1-1 and the remaining time notice TG1-2 in the applicable form 7 (see FIG. 156), and all of the first operation means image BG1, By covering with the image of the notice effect shown in FIG. 4D, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 and the first operation means image BG1 are all invisible. Or it is comprised so that it may be in a state in which visual recognition is difficult. Since other displays are the same as in the applicable form 7 (see FIG. 156), description thereof is omitted.

<Applicable Mode 16 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, an applicable mode 16 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 16 in time series.

  In this applicable form, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the above-mentioned applicable form 8 (see FIG. 157), as shown in FIGS. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 is partly invisible or difficult to view by covering with a notice effect image that suggests the determination result. Since other displays are the same as in the applicable form 8 (see FIG. 157), the description thereof is omitted.

<Applicable Mode 17 for Displaying Operating Means Image>
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, an applicable mode 17 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 17 in time series.

  In this applicable form, the timing corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. One operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed above the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, a part of which is the first. Are displayed so as to overlap the operation means image BG1. That is, in this applicable form, by covering a part of the first operation means image BG1 with the second operation means image BG2, a part of the first operation means image BG1 becomes invisible or difficult to view. It is comprised as follows.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, when the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 are not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period, When the decorative symbol variation display shown in (c) is performed and the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 is used instead of the first operation means image BG1 as shown in FIG. When the character image (dono) is displayed and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (ｅ) is replaced with the second operation means image BG2 as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  Note that, in this applicable form, when two operations are urged, two operation means images that are the same as the number of operations are displayed. However, for example, when three or more operations are urged, The same number of operation means images as the number of operations may be displayed. When prompting one operation, a larger number of operation means images than the number of operations may be displayed. In this case, the player may be strongly urged to perform one operation.

<Applicable Form 18 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, an applicable form 18 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 18 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6D, an increase animation of the hold icon is triggered when a new hold of the special figure variable game occurs, and the second hold icon PI2 after the increase (in this example, the chance icon A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the adjacent first hold icon PI1 are covered with an icon imitating the button 136 and a star-shaped figure). . That is, in this applicable form, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 cannot be visually recognized by covering the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 with the hold icon PI2. Or it is comprised so that it may be in a state in which visual recognition is difficult.

  With such a configuration, since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the elapsed time notification image or the hold icon that has become invisible or difficult to visually recognize, the player can be prompted to operate the operation means, Since the game will be more concentrated than before, there may be a case where the operating rate of the game table can be increased.

  The hold icon PI2 also serves as an operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated within a predetermined reception time, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon PI2 is an image that suggests whether or not the special figure variable game corresponding to the hold icon PI2 is successful from the operation means image (an icon that imitates the chance button 136 and a star-shaped figure). In this example, it is configured to change to a character image (savohani) that suggests that the success / failure result by prefetching the special figure variable game is a big hit.

  With such a configuration, the game information can be obtained by the hold icon that is changed by the operation of the operation means, so that the operation of the operation means can be further promoted and the interest of the game can be enhanced. is there.

  In this example, both the image before the change of the hold icon PI2 (the image imitating the chance button 136 and the icon combining the star-shaped figure) and the image after the change (character image (savohani)) are the first. Although it is configured so as to cover a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1, the image after the change may be configured not to cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the second operation of the operation means can be surely performed after prompting the first operation of the operation means, and a decrease in game motivation can be prevented.

  Further, in the first operation of the chance button 136, as shown in (f) of the figure, a notice effect regarding the change is started, and in the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in (g) of the same figure. By configuring the display mode of the hold icon to be changed, the display related to the change may be given priority over the display related to the hold. In this case, the roles of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be reversed. Further, at least one of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be changed to an operation by another operation means (for example, the setting operation unit 137). Moreover, you may comprise so that both the notice effect regarding the said change and the display aspect of a hold icon may be changed by operating the chance button 136 once.

<Applicable Form 19 for Displaying Image of Operating Means>
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, an applicable mode 19 of the operation unit image display performed by the operation unit image display process described above will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the applicable form 19 in time series.

  In this applicable form, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, within the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f. Is provided. The special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the result of special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f displays the result of special figure 2 variable game. For example, during a special figure change game (during special figure change), a diamond-shaped figure is displayed blinking.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception start timing of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. At this timing, the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 is moved in the closing direction, and the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon are displayed on the right door 246b. By covering all of the decorative designs in the inside, the first operating means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon, and all of the changing decorative designs are invisible or difficult to see. It is configured to be in a state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, the hold icon, and the decorative symbol that are invisible or difficult to see, and thus prompt the operation of the operation means. In addition, since the player is more concentrated on the game than before, the operating rate of the game table may be increased. The shielding device 246 may cover all of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the hold icon, or may cover a part of the decorative pattern that is changing. Also good.

  In this applicable form, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed to a visible position in conjunction with the movement of the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, as shown in FIG. A notch portion may be formed in a part of the device 246, and the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f may be visible through the notch. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to surely grasp game information important to the player as in the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol, and therefore, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in game motivation.

<Modifications of operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image>
FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the operation unit image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image. In the figure, as an example of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image, the reception start image displayed when the reception start timing of the operation means arrives and the reception time of the operation means are halved. An image for the passage of half of the acceptance period displayed when it has elapsed, and an image for completion of acceptance displayed when the acceptance end timing of the operating means has arrived.

  The figure (a) employs an image imitating the design of the operation means as the operation means image, and displays an elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image) according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is used in which the scale (filled part) gradually decreases. Further, FIG. 5B employs an image obtained by simplifying the operation means as the operation means image, and matches the elapsed time of the operation reception period as the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). The image that the scale (filled part) of the meter divided into plurals gradually decreases is adopted. Further, FIG. 4C adopts an image obtained by simplifying the operation means as the operation means image, and matches the elapsed time of the operation reception period as the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). An image representing a state in which lamps (including those by light emitting means such as LEDs and those by display means such as LCD) are gradually turned off is adopted.

  FIG. 4D is configured to count down the remaining time of the operation reception period as the remaining time notification image, and FIG. 4E illustrates the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). The color of the image is gradually lightened in accordance with the elapsed time (or remaining time) of the operation reception period, and the image is erased immediately before the reception period. FIG. The notification image (or remaining time notification image) is configured to gradually darken the color of the image in accordance with the elapsed time (or remaining time) of the operation reception period. These operation means images, elapsed time notification images, and remaining time notification images may be applied to any of the above-described applicable forms.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the applicable form A is at least operating means (for example, the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. ) And display means capable of executing at least a plurality of displays (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400), and at least one of the plurality of displays Is a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 shown in FIGS. 156 (a) to (e)), and at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display. (For example, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIGS. 156 (c) to 156 (e)), and the first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136). of The second display is a display relating to the operation of the operation means (for example, the remaining time for notifying the remaining time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display during display of the first display, and the display means includes at least one of the plurality of displays. The display mode of the display can be changed (for example, accepting the operation of the chance button 136 that displays an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136. Count down the remaining time of the period, display (related to operation means, notice effect, normal symbol fluctuation display, hold icon, etc.) At least partially hide) ones of the display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the game table according to the applicable form A, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, a meter scale (e.g., a meter scale corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136) The second display is a notification according to an elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, an operation of the chance button 136). The remaining time of the reception period may be counted down).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In addition, at least one of the first and second displays changes to a different display mode when a specific time has elapsed since the start of acceptance of the operation of the operation means (for example, FIG. 155). As shown in (c), the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 may be changed from the first color (blue) to the second color (red).

  With such a configuration, various displays can be performed, and the player may be prevented from getting bored. Further, since the player can determine the operation timing by looking at the display, it may be easy for the player to participate in the game.

  The first display (for example, a meter) may be a display mode different from the second display (for example, a number).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be more strongly urged to operate the operation means by various display notifications. Further, there are cases where the player can be entertained by notification with various displays.

  In addition, the first and second displays may be terminated (for example, the elapsed time notification image or the remaining time notification image is deleted) when at least the reception period ends.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In addition, it is provided with an appropriateness determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the determination of the validity when the determination condition is satisfied, and at least one of the first and second displays. One may indicate the result of the determination (for example, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 shown in FIG. 152).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. In addition, there are cases where the choice of how to play by the player increases and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, a third display (for example, a first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIGS. 156 (a) to (e) shown in FIG. The third display does not notify the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operating means, and the third display is during the reception period, It may be executable at least during execution of at least one of the first and second displays.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by encouraging the player to operate more than necessary. In addition, the display may be sharpened to make the player more entertaining.

  Note that a third display for notifying only that it is the operation acceptance period for the operation means may be displayed, or that at least a third display for notifying that the operation means is being accepted for operation is displayed. Good.

  The third display may not notify only the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period, or at least the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period. It may be one that does not notify, may notify at least the elapsed time after a specific time from the start of the reception period, and only notifies the elapsed time after a specific time from the start of the reception period It may be a thing.

  The third display may be at least executable during execution of the first display, may be at least executable only during execution of the first display, It may be at least executable during execution of the second display, or may be at least executable only during execution of the second display. The third display may be at least executable during the execution of both the first and second displays, or only during the execution of both the first and second displays. It may be executable.

  In addition, the third display is displayed on at least one of the first display and the second display when at least part (or only part or all) of the operation reception period overlaps ( Alternatively, the operation reception result may be reflected in only one display or both displays.

  The third display is at least the third display when at least a part (or only a part or all) of the operation acceptance period overlaps at least one of the first and second displays. The operation reception result may be reflected on (or only the third display or all the first to third displays).

  The plurality of displays include a fourth display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIG. 155 (c)) displayed when a specific time has elapsed, and the fourth display Is displayed in accordance with the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white) to the fourth color (red). ) At least. With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation.

  Note that the fourth display may be a notification only according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period, or at least a notification (or only a notification) indicating the result of the determination of success / failure. It is also possible that at least (or only the advance notice) is not made to suggest the result of the determination.

  Further, the game table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the applicable form A includes at least operation means (for example, a chance button 136 and a setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. And a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of displaying at least one of the plurality of displays. At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is a display related to the operation means (first operation means image BG1, second operation means). Image BG2, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the display means receives a third display (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 158). At least a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time), and the display means displays at least a fourth display (for example, a part of the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 158). The display means can display the fourth display rather than the third display when the display position of the third display and the display position of the fourth display match. Display preferentially (for example, display in front), the third display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display, and the fourth display The display is at least a part of the other display of the first display and the second display.

  According to the game stand according to this applicable form A, there are cases where the player can be further urged to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, a meter scale (e.g., a meter scale corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136) It is also possible to display at least an image in which the filled portion) gradually decreases.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  In addition, the third display (for example, a part or all of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 158, the first operation shown in FIG. 169) The means image BG1 (part or all of the image imitating the chance button) is at least a part of the first display, and the fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 158, FIG. 169 The second operation means image BG2 (a part or the whole of the image imitating the chance button) shown may be at least a part of the second display.

  With such a configuration, it may be difficult to see the notification of the reception period, and the player's operation may be further urged.

  In addition, the display means may display a fifth display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIG. 158) when a specific time has elapsed since the start of acceptance of the operation of the operation means. At least when the display position of the fourth display and the display position of the fifth display coincide with each other. The fourth display is preferentially displayed (for example, displayed in front), and the fifth display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display. It may be.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 158) may have a display mode different from the fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 158). Note that different display modes may indicate different shapes, may indicate different transmittances, may indicate different colors, or may indicate different sizes. In addition, at least one of the third displays (shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) may be used as long as they have the same shape or different display forms as long as they have different colors. The display mode may be different as long as a part (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) of the first display and the fourth display is different.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to focus attention on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  In addition, a part of the third display (at least one of shape, color, transmissivity, size, etc.) so that the colors may be different or the same shape and the same display mode may be used. And a portion of the fourth display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc., that matches a portion of the third display) The same display mode may be used.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 158) is at least a part of the second display. The fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 158) may be at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, it may be easy to see the notification of the reception period and allow the player to perform the operation reliably. In some cases, the player may be urged to press a button. In some cases, the player can concentrate on the game to prevent the player from getting bored.

  (A) In addition, it is provided with a go / no-go determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the go / no-go determination when the pass / fail determination condition is satisfied, and a second display (for example, notice) The display of the effect) may be a notice that suggests the result of the determination.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. Further, there are cases where the player can be made to pay more attention to the reception period of the operation means.

  (B) Further, it is provided with a go / no-go determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the go / no-go determination when the pass / fail determination condition is satisfied, and a first display (related to the operation means). The display) may be a notice suggesting the result of the determination.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. In some cases, the player can be more focused on the notice.

  In the case of (A) and (B) above, at least one of the first display and the second display (or only one display, or both displays) suggests the result of the determination. A notice may be included, and the first display and the second display may be the same (or different) notice showing the result of the determination. For example, both of them may be the determination results of special drawings, or both may be the determination results of ordinary drawings. In addition, one may be a result of whether or not a special figure is determined, and the other may be a result of normal or not, or one may be a result of determining whether or not the change is correct and the other is a result of determining whether or not the next time is correct (Prefetching) may be used, or both may be the determination results of the different fluctuations (special / standard prefetching).

  (C) Further, if at least a part of at least one of the first, second, and third displays is hidden by a plurality of other displays, the hidden display is made more noticeable. May be possible. Note that only a part (or all) of at least one of the first, second, and third displays may be hidden by a plurality of other displays.

  (D) Further, if at least one of the first, second, and third displays hides a plurality of other displays, the hidden display may be more noticed. In some cases, the hidden display can be more noticed. In addition, at least one part (or only part or all) of one of the plurality of other displays is hidden by the one display, and the other display is at least partly ( Alternatively, only a part or all) may be hidden.

  In the case of (C) and (D) above, the third display may be a notice that at least suggests the result of the determination (or only a notification that suggests the result of the determination), The third display may be a notification of at least the reception period of the operation means (or only the notification of the reception period of the operation means), a notice that suggests the result of the determination, and the reception period of the operation means. At least one of the notifications (or only one of the two, or at least both, or both) may be performed. The display means may be a notification means, and the display may be a notification.

  In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.

(Appendix Z1)
A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, start information deriving means for deriving start information based on the game ball entering the first entrance, and start information acquired by the start information acquiring means And a second entrance where a predetermined profit is generated based on the entry of the game ball. The game means is characterized by changing the predetermined performance based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance during the predetermined performance.

(Appendix Z2)
The game table according to attachment Z1, further comprising: a profit granting unit that grants a predetermined profit to the player based on a game ball entering the second entrance, wherein the effect unit is the predetermined game unit A game table characterized in that a specific effect that affects the predetermined effect is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance during the effect.

(Appendix Z3)
The gaming machine according to appendix Z1 or 2, wherein the effect means includes display means for performing a predetermined display, and the display means has entered a game ball into the second entrance during the predetermined effect. On the basis of this, a game table characterized in that a part of the display effect based on the predetermined effect is covered with a part of the display effect based on the specific effect.

(Appendix Z4)
The game machine according to any one of appendices Z1 to 3, wherein the first entrance and the second entrance are such that a game ball that has entered the first entrance enters the second entrance. A game stand characterized by being placed at a position where it can enter the mouth.

(Appendix Z5)
The gaming machine according to attachment Z2, comprising a winning device that is advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the specific performance is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition A game stand characterized by a directing effect.

(Appendix Z6)
A game value giving means for giving a game value to a player when a game value giving condition is established; a first entry area where the game value giving condition is not met even if the game ball passes; and a game ball A second entry area in which the game value provision condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball, a determination unit that can determine whether or not the determination is true, and a determination of success / failure by the determination unit The pattern mode corresponding to the result includes at least notification means capable of stopping display after performing the variable display of the pattern, and image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and is configured separately from the notification means. In a gaming machine provided with production means and production control means capable of controlling the production means, the success / failure determination condition includes at least that a game ball has passed to the first entry area. Yes, the production The control means is capable of causing the image display means to display a symbol fluctuation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure judgment by the success / failure judgment means after starting the symbol fluctuation display. The second approach area is one in which at least a game ball can enter when the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a specific result of the success / failure determination. It is possible to cause the effect means to execute at least a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not, and the jackpot is generated based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect control means may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol variation display during the display of the symbol variation display by the image display means. It is possible to cause the effect means to at least make the big hit announcement, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol fluctuation display by the image display means. A game stand that is easily visible to the player during the period.

(Appendix Z7)
The gaming machine according to appendix Z6, wherein the effect control means, during the stop display of the symbol by the image display means, the jackpot notice, so that at least a part of the symbol is difficult to see from the player, It is possible for at least the effect means to perform the symbol stop display by the notifying means, even if at least a part of the symbol stop display by the image display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A game table characterized by being easily visible.

(Appendix Z8)
The game table according to appendix Z6 or 7, wherein the effect control means is configured such that when a game ball enters the second entry area while the image display means is displaying the symbol variation display, An effect that does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable display can be performed at least by the effect means, and the jackpot notice does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect. Stand.

(Appendix Z9)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes Z6 to 8, wherein the determination result includes a first determination result and a second determination result, and the notification means includes the determination result. Can be stopped and displayed when the result is the first determination result, and when the determination result is the second determination result, what is the first design aspect? A game table characterized by being capable of stopping and displaying different second symbol patterns.

(Appendix Z10)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes Z6 to 9, wherein the rendering means includes at least one of a first position that does not cover the symbol variation display by the image display unit from the front and the symbol variation display. A movable body that is movable to a plurality of positions including a second position that covers the part from the front, wherein the effect control means moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, thereby moving the movable body to the second position. A game table characterized in that it is possible to cause the movable body to make a big hit notice.

  Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.

(Appendix Z11)
A plurality of entry areas into which a game ball can enter and a determination of whether or not the game ball can be executed at least when a game ball enters a predetermined entry area including at least the first entry area among the plurality of entry areas. And means for determining whether or not the assisting ball can be determined when the game ball enters a second approaching area different from the predetermined approaching area among the plurality of approaching areas; After performing the display, after performing the symbol variation display, the first informing means capable of at least performing the first symbol variation display to stop display the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination, A second notifying unit capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination, an effect unit including at least the second notifying unit, and at least the A game table comprising: production control means capable of controlling the exit means; and time reduction control means capable of controlling at least a time reduction state and a non-time reduction state in which a game ball is likely to enter at least the first entry area. In the first approach area, after the first symbol variation display is performed and the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the specific auxiliary success / failure determination among the results of the success / failure determination is stopped and displayed, the game ball The effect control means is capable of causing the effect means to at least execute a predetermined effect related to the result of the determination of success and the second symbol variation display, The effect control means executes at least the predetermined effect on the effect means so that at least a part of the second symbol change display is difficult to view during a predetermined period during execution of the second symbol change display. Let The first symbol variation display is easier to see even during the predetermined period, and the second symbol variation display is executed in the non-time reduction state than in the time reduction state. A game stand that is easy to be played.

  The first entry area here is, for example, an electric Chu, and the predetermined entry areas are, for example, the second special figure start port 232 (electric Chu) and the first special figure start opening 230, and the second entry. The region is, for example, the general symbol start port 228, and the first symbol variation display is, for example, a common symbol variation display performed by the universal symbol display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300, and the second symbol variation is displayed. The display is, for example, a normal decorative pattern variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500.

(Supplementary Note Z12) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note Z11, the second notification unit is an image display unit, and the predetermined effect can be executed at least by the image display unit. The image display means has at least a predetermined display area where the second symbol variation display can be executed, and the effect control means is configured to display the second symbol variation display in the predetermined display area. A gaming machine characterized in that a display effect different from the second symbol variation display can be executed in a period including at least a part of the execution period.

  Here, the effect control means may be capable of causing the effect means to execute at least the predetermined effect so that at least a part of the different display effects is difficult to visually recognize.

(Appendix Z13)
The gaming machine according to attachment Z12, wherein the different display effects that can be executed in the predetermined display area include at least one of a jackpot notice display and a game information display.

  The jackpot notice display here includes a so-called prefetch notice. In addition, the game information display includes, for example, the number of time reductions, the number of consecutive games, the number of acquired game balls, the number of simulated consecutive times, and the like.

(Appendix Z14)
The gaming machine according to appendix Z13, wherein the production control means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice during the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving state, The gaming table characterized in that at least the gaming information display can be executed during the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the time-shortening state.

(Appendix Z15)
The gaming table according to attachment Z14, wherein the specific second symbol variation display of the second symbol variation display includes a symbol relating to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination and a symbol relating to the jackpot notice. A game table characterized by being capable of executing a second symbol variation display.

  The predetermined period in the gaming machine described in appendix Z11 to appendix Z15 may be a period including at least a part during execution of the second symbol variation display. The predetermined performance may include a jackpot notice that can at least tell whether or not a jackpot will occur. Further, the effect control means may not execute the second symbol variation display in the non-time-short state. In the predetermined display area, at least a notice regarding the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 out of the second symbol variation display may be executed. Even if the special symbol 2 is interrupted during the execution of the second symbol variation display and the different symbol display is possible, the second symbol variation display can be performed with priority. Good. The notification during the electric chew operation can be executed, and the notification during the electric chew operation may be different depending on whether or not the second symbol variation display is executed. For example, the lamp control near the electric Chu may be different with and without the second symbol variation display. Specifically, the notification may be flashy with the second symbol variation display. The flashing notification here includes a long production period. The second symbol variation display may vary only the symbol related to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed, and the second symbol variation display may be more easily performed when left-handed. Further, the gaming machine may be left-handed in the non-electric support state and right-handed in the electric support state. The open pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first open pattern and a second open pattern, and the second open pattern is more advantageous than the first open pattern, and the second pattern The variable display may be executed at least when the second opening pattern is set.

  Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.

(Appendix Z16)
It is equipped with electric Chu, winning / failing determining means (special figure), auxiliary winning / failing determining means (common figure), and jackpot game control means, and main common figure variation display (first symbol variation display) and sub-variable figure variation display. A game machine capable of performing (second symbol variation display), wherein the sub ordinary variation is difficult to see due to the second effect, and the main ordinary variation is the sub ordinary variation. A gaming table characterized in that even if it is difficult to visually recognize due to the second performance, it is easy to visually recognize, and the sub-normal variation is more likely to be performed outside of the big hit game than during the big hit game.

(Appendix Z17)
The gaming machine according to appendix Z16, characterized in that a specific sub-common figure change among the sub-normal figure fluctuations is more likely to be performed outside of the big hit game than during the big hit game. Amusement stand.

(Appendix Z18)
The gaming machine according to appendix Z17, wherein the sub-normal variation can be executed at least in a first variation time and a second variation time, and the second variation time is greater than the first variation time. The game table is characterized in that the variation time of is longer and the specific sub-normal variation is executable at a variation time including at least the second variation time.

(Appendix Z19)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes Z16 to Z18, wherein the opening pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first opening pattern and a second opening pattern, The second opening pattern is more advantageous for the player than the opening pattern (for example, a game ball is easy to enter), and at least the electric chew is released by the second opening pattern. A game stand, characterized in that it can be executed in some cases.

(Appendix Z20)
The gaming machine according to appendix Z18 or 19, wherein the sub-normal game variation is executable during the jackpot game at a variation time including at least the first variation time. Stand.

  The specific sub-normal variation in the game machine described in supplementary notes Z16 to Z20 may not be performed in the first variation time. In addition, the sub-normal change except the specific sub-normal change may not be performed in the second change time. In addition, the sub-normal map change performed in the first change time may be capable of performing an effect of notifying only the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination. In addition, the sub-usual change may not be performed during the jackpot game. Further, at least a part of the sub-normal variation may be a symbol variation display including a big hit notice. Furthermore, during the jackpot game, it may be possible to execute only the opening notification effect of electric Chu. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed, and a predetermined firing strength (for example, right-handed) may be easier to execute the sub-normal variation. Further, it may be a gaming table that can be played at the predetermined firing strength (right-handed) at least during a big hit game.

  Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.

(Appendix Z21)
It includes a determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary determination unit (general figure), a production unit capable of at least performing a pre-reading notice, and a production control unit capable of controlling at least the production unit. A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display (first symbol variation display) and a sub-normal symbol variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the effect control means includes the pre-reading notice and the sub-normal diagram. It is possible to cause the effecting means to execute at least a change display, and when the sub-normal figure change is executed during execution of the pre-reading notice, the sub-normal figure change is at least one of the pre-reading notices. A game table characterized in that it is difficult to see the part.

(Appendix Z22)
The gaming machine as set forth in appendix Z21, wherein at least a part of the sub-common figure fluctuation is capable of executing a symbol fluctuation display including a big hit notice.

(Appendix Z23)
The gaming machine according to appendix Z21 or 22, wherein the rendering means includes at least an image display means, and at least the image display means is capable of executing the sub-normal map change and the pre-reading notice, and the image The display means has a predetermined display area in which the sub-normal variation can be executed, and the image display means has a pre-reading notice display area, and the predetermined sub-normal variation is included in the sub-normal variation. When a figure change is performed, the sub-normal figure change can be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enters the prefetch notice display area, and makes at least a part of the prefetch notice difficult to view. A characteristic game stand.

  The pre-reading notice is a holding change notice, and the image display means has a holding display area. When a predetermined sub-normal change is performed among the sub-normal changes, the sub-normal notice is displayed. The figure variation may be able to be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enter the hold display area, and make at least a part of the hold prefetch notice difficult to view.

(Appendix Z24)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes Z21 to Z23, wherein the gaming machine is a special figure 2 priority changing machine, and includes a reserved display area of special figure 1 and a reserved display area of special figure 2 And both reserved display areas are provided across a predetermined display area, and the sub-normal display variation can make it difficult to see at least a part of both reserved display areas. A gaming machine characterized in that only one of the pre-reading notice of FIG. 1 and the pre-reading notice of FIG.

(Appendix Z25)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes Z21 to Z24, wherein an effect can be executed so that at least a part of the sub-normal variation is difficult to visually recognize. A game stand.

  The sub-common figure variation in the game tables described in appendix Z21 to appendix Z25 is at least a part of the reserved display area (for example, the first reserved display area with the oldest winning timing) among the plurality of reserved display areas. Some may make it difficult to view. Moreover, you may make the 1st hold | maintenance of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 hold display area difficult to visually recognize. Further, it may be difficult to visually recognize other hold such as the second hold. Further, when the electric chew is released and the special figure 2 is interrupted during the non-electric support state, at least a part of the suspension of the special figure 2 may be difficult to visually recognize due to the electric chew release notification effect. Further, during the non-electric support state, it is possible to (at least) make it difficult to visually recognize the reserved pre-reading notice in FIG. It may be possible. In addition, a specific reserved display area that is difficult to view due to the change of the sub-normal figure can perform the reserved display of special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in a winning order changing game machine. The function may be switched for each special figure change (during the non-electric support state). In addition, when the pre-reading hold display and the sub-normal figure change are performed at the same time, when the production (for example, super reach) is started during the special symbol decoration display, the sub-normal change May be left, and the pre-read hold display may be hidden, the sub-transition fluctuation and the pre-read hold display may be both hidden, the pre-read hold display may be left, The variation may be in a non-display mode.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each applicable form and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

(Appendix Z26)
It is provided with a main design variation display (first symbol variation display) including a determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary determination unit (general drawing), a production unit, and a production control unit capable of controlling at least the production unit. ) And sub-general variation display (second symbol variation display) can be performed so that at least a part of the sub-general variation is difficult to see. An image display means and an effect movable means, wherein the effect move means is operable at least as the effect, and the sub-normal variation is at least performed by the image display means. In the image display means, the effect can display at least an image related to the operation of the effect moving means, and at least one of the effect moving means and the image operated as the effect. Amusement machine wherein a sub Hiroshizu difficult viewing the variation, characterized in that the.

(Appendix Z27)
In the case of the gaming table according to attachment Z26, in the case where the sub-normal variation has been performed first, the sub-normal variation has been made difficult to visually recognize in the rendering, and the rendering has been performed first The game machine is characterized in that the sub-normal variation using the image display means is not executed.

(Appendix Z28)
The gaming machine according to appendix Z26 or 27, wherein the image display means has a holding display area, and the production makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the holding display area. A characteristic game stand.

(Appendix Z29)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes Z26 to 28, wherein the sub-common figure variation is more likely to be performed during non-big hit games than during big hit games. Stand.

(Appendix Z30)
30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices Z26 to 29, wherein the sub-common figure change is more easily performed in a non-electric support state than in an electric support state.

  The effect in the game machine described in appendix Z21 to appendix Z25 may include at least a jackpot notice. Further, the effect moving means may be operable at least as a jackpot notice. Further, the effect moving means may be capable of at least an operation toward the front side (player side) of the image display means as the effect.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each applicable form and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

(Appendix Z31)
An electric Chu, a win / fail judgment means (special drawing), an auxiliary success / failure judgment means (common figure), an effect means, and an effect control means capable of controlling at least the effect means, and a main common map fluctuation display (first) And a sub-general variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the effect control means provides the effect means with at least the effect and the sub-general fluctuation. It is possible to execute the effect so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the electric chew release notification effect after the sub-normal change, the electric chew release notification effect While running, it is allowed to enter the electric chew, and while the electric chew release notification effect is being performed with the effect in the special figure variation display based on entering the electric chew, it is difficult to see , Said Mei Hiroshizu variation is easy viewing, amusement machine, characterized in that.

(Appendix Z32)
The gaming machine according to attachment Z31, wherein the special figure 1 symbol fluctuation display means capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 symbol fluctuation display capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 A game stand characterized in that it makes it difficult to visually recognize a running electric-chu release notification effect by the effect during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

(Appendix Z33)
The game machine according to appendix Z31 or 32, wherein the special figure 2 is more likely to receive a big hit that is more advantageous.

(Appendix Z34)
This game machine is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and includes at least a prefetch notice means capable of executing the prefetch notice of special figure 1 and executes at least the sub-normal figure change display during execution of the prefetch notice of special figure 1. It is possible, the electrification variation is won and the electric chew is released, and the prefetching notice is performed even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, and the electric chew release notification effect is visually recognized by the effect display of the prefetching notice. A game stand characterized by difficulty.

  In the special figure 2 priority variation machine, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the electric chew release notification effect being executed with the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 according to the entry into the electric chew. In addition, in the winning order variation machine, the electric chew release notification effect that is being executed in the state where the number of special symbols on hold is less than a predetermined number (less or zero) and the special symbol variation display is stopped is It may be difficult to view due to the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure corresponding to the entry into the chew. During non-electric support, special figures 1 and 2 can be won almost alternately. The electric Chu release notification effect in the middle may be made difficult to visually recognize by the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the winning. By doing so, it may be possible to notify that there is a possibility that the advantageous symbol variation display of FIG. Also, the attacker has a first big hit (unfavorable big hit) with a relatively short opening time, and a relatively long second big hit (advantageous big hit). The second jackpot may be more likely to appear than the second jackpot, or the first jackpot may not appear.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each applicable form and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

(Appendix Z35)
A first entry area in which a game ball can enter; a second entry area in which a game ball can enter; When the second determination result is satisfied, the second determination unit that can execute the second determination, and the first determination unit after starting the symbol variation display. A game machine comprising: a notifying unit capable of executing a symbol variation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first determination result, and an effect unit including at least a display unit capable of executing the display. At least one of the requirements for establishment of the first condition includes at least the entry of a game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first success / failure determination result. If the result is a specific success / failure determination result, the time allowed for entry is limited. A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for establishing the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the display The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is established, and the effect display includes at least a result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The display means can display the effect display while the symbol variation display is being executed, and the display means can display the result display while the symbol stop display is being executed. The effect display is displayed over an effect time longer than the first effect time, and the first effect time is shorter than the display time of the symbol variation display. Features Gaming table.

  Note that the first entry area is, for example, the ordinary map starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, electric chew, and the first success / failure determination is, for example, the determination of whether or not the usual figure is present (usual drawing lottery), The second determination of success / failure is, for example, determination of success / failure of special figure (special drawing lottery).

(Appendix Z36)
The gaming table according to appendix Z35, wherein the gaming state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of states, and the plurality of states include at least a first state, The second state includes at least a second state, and the second state has a higher probability that the first success / failure determination result becomes the specific success / failure determination result than the first state, and the display The means is characterized in that the effect display is easier to display during the period of the first state than the period of the second state.

(Appendix Z37)
The gaming machine according to attachment Z36, wherein the symbol variation display is performed over any one of a plurality of display times, and the plurality of display times includes at least a first display time. The plurality of display times include at least a second display time, the second display time is longer than the first display time, and the first state is The game table is characterized in that the display time is more likely to be the second display time than the second state.

(Appendix Z38)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes Z35 to Z37, wherein the result display indicates that the second entry area is when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result. The game table is characterized in that it includes at least an entry enable indication indicating that a game ball can enter.

(Appendix Z39)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes Z35 to Z38, wherein the effecting means is capable of at least executing a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot will occur. It is generated on the basis of at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area, and the effect unit is configured to display at least a part of the effect display during display of the effect display by the display unit. The jackpot notice can be executed at least so that it is difficult to see from the player, and the change display of the symbol by the notification means is difficult for the player to see at least part of the effect display by the display means. A game stand that is easily visible to the player during the period.

(Appendix Z40)
A first entry area in which a game ball can enter; a second entry area in which a game ball can enter; When the second determination result is satisfied, the second determination unit that can execute the second determination, and the first determination unit after starting the symbol variation display. A game machine comprising: a notifying unit capable of executing a symbol variation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first determination result, and an effect unit including at least a display unit capable of executing the display. At least one of the requirements for establishment of the first condition includes at least the entry of a game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first success / failure determination result. If the result is a specific success / failure determination result, the time allowed for entry is limited. A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for establishing the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the display The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is established, and the effect display includes at least a result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The directing means is capable of at least executing a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot will occur, and the jackpot is generated based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect display started when the jackpot notice is being executed is better than the effect display started when the jackpot notice is not executed. Serial in which production time tends to be shorter, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

  In this case as well, the first entry area is, for example, the general map starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, the electric chew, and the first success / failure determination is, for example, the determination of whether or not the normal figure is correct (normal map lottery). ), The second success / failure determination is, for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is present (special drawing lottery).

(Appendix Z41)
The gaming machine according to attachment Z40, wherein the effect means displays at least the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the effect display is difficult for a player to view during display of the effect display by the display means. The symbol variation display by the notifying means is easy to see from the player even during a period when at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult to see from the player. A game table that features

  In addition, it may be a gaming machine according to the supplementary notes Z35 to Z41, in which the electric chew can be selected with a shorter opening time during non-electric support than during the electric support. In other words, the possible entry time of the second approach area is any one of a plurality of times including at least a first time and a second time longer than the first time, The state may be such that the possible entry time is more likely to be the first time than the second state. By doing so, it may be possible to have an expectation that it will be a time other than the first time in the first state.

  In addition, the ordinary drawing effect may be performed more easily when the electric Chu long is opened than when the electric Chu short is opened. In other words, the display means is more likely to execute the effect display when the approachable time is the second time than when the accessible time is the first time. In this case, there may be a case where expectation can be given for the second time.

  Further, the time for the short normal drawing effect may be longer than the time for the short normal map change display. That is, the second state is such that the display time is likely to be the first display time than the first state, and the first effect time is longer than the first display time. There may be. Moreover, the said approach possible display may be displayed during the said approach possible time.

  Further, the display means has a display area capable of executing at least display, the display area includes at least a first display area, and the display means displays the effect display in the first display area. It may be possible to display in at least a part of the display area.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing a notice display relating to the result of the second determination of success / failure in at least a part of the first display area. Further, at least a part of the effect display and at least a part of the notice display may be common.

  In addition, when performing a special drawing when the special figure is unchanged, the jackpot notice (for example, “Hatsuatsu”) may not be stopped, or even when the special drawing is not changed, A change display including a big hit notice (for example, “super hot”) may be displayed.

  Further, the ordinary drawing effect may be performed only during non-electric support, or may be performed only during a non-hit state.

  In addition, the effect display includes at least a first display (for example, variable display), and the effect display includes at least a second display (for example, a result display and an effect image display may be included). Yes, the effect display may include at least a third display (for example, an approachable display). Here, the third display may have a display area larger than the first display, may have a display area larger than the second display, The display area may be larger than the display.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each applicable form and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

(Appendix Z42)
Symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol variation display, hold display means capable of displaying a hold icon, and first control means capable of at least performing display control of the symbol display means; And a second control means capable of at least controlling display of the hold icon by the hold display means, wherein the symbol variation display is performed after the symbol variation display is performed. The symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure is stopped and displayed. The first symbol display means of the symbol display means is configured to display the symbol variation when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied. The second symbol display means of the symbol display means can perform at least the symbol variation display when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. The first symbol variation condition includes at least that there is a ball in the first starting region of the starting region, and the second symbol variation condition is the starting It includes at least that there was a ball in the second starting area of the area, and the holding display means is a holding icon corresponding to the symbol fluctuation display in relation to the start of the symbol fluctuation display. It is possible to at least perform a first display relating to a certain digest pending icon, and the pending display means is a pending icon that does not correspond to the symbol variation display in association with the start of the symbol variation display. It is possible to perform at least a second display relating to the hold icon, and the hold display means is capable of displaying at least an undigested hold icon equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number. The hold display means can display at least a plurality of undigested hold icons, and the first control means sends a command signal to the second control means in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. The second control means is capable of at least starting the first display in response to the reception of the command signal; and The control means is capable of at least starting the second display in response to the reception of the command signal, and the hold display means has at least a first display area. And the hold display means has at least a second display area, and the first display has a small amount of the digest hold icon from the first display area to the second display area. At least movement (hereinafter referred to as first movement). ), The digestion pending icon is erased in the second display area, and the second display displays the display position of the undigested suspension icon separately in the first display area. At least to the position (hereinafter referred to as second movement), and when the first hold increase condition is satisfied, the hold display means sets the first hold icon as the hold icon. The hold display means can display at least a second hold icon as the hold icon when the second hold increase condition is satisfied. The first hold increase condition includes at least that the first start area has been entered, and the second hold increase condition includes the second start area entry. There is a sphere If the first hold icon is the undigested hold icon, the first hold icon is displayed in the first symbol display means display area of the first display area. And when the second pending icon is the undigested pending icon, the second pending icon is displayed in the second symbol display means display area of the first display area, The display area for one symbol display means is a display area different from the display area for the second symbol display means, and the display area where the erasure is performed for the first hold icon is the second hold icon The first display is completed in a longer time than the second display, and the hold display means is an effect display by the undigested hold icon. The hold display means can also perform an effect display by the digestion hold icon, and at least all the undigested in the display area for the second symbol display means The hold icon completes the second movement at a second time, and at least the digestion hold icon in the display area for the second symbol display means has the first movement at the first time. The game table is characterized in that the first time is a time different from the second time.

(Appendix T1)
Counting means capable of at least performing counting;
Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The first display is a first type of display,
The second display is the first type of display,
The first type is a count value in the counting means,
The first display includes at least a display corresponding to a true value of the count value,
The second display includes at least a display corresponding to a false value of the count value,
The display means is configured to display at least the first display after displaying the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix T1,
The display means may display the first display without displaying the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T3)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix T1 or T2,
The display means is configured to display at least the second display after displaying the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T3,
The display means may display the second display without displaying the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T4,
The false value is a value smaller than the true value.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T5,
Comprising operating means provided at least at a position where the player can operate,
The count value relates to a period for receiving an operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “acceptance period”),
The first display is a display at least indicating that the remaining period of the reception period (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period”) is the first period;
The second display is a display at least indicating that the remaining period is the second period,
The second period is a period shorter than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T7)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix T6,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The third display is the first type of display,
The third display includes at least a display corresponding to a true value of the count value,
The third display is a display at least indicating that the remaining period is the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T8)
A game machine according to appendix T7,
The second display is displayed in the first display mode,
The third display is displayed in a second display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T9)
A gaming table according to appendix T7 or T8,
The first display is a meter display,
The second display is a meter display,
The third display is a meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T6 to T9,
The reception period is a valid period,
The effective period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T6 to T10,
As the reception period, there are a plurality of types of reception periods with different period lengths.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T12)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes T6 to T11,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is configured so that at least display can be started when the operation means is operated within the reception period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T13)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix T12,
The fourth display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated within the reception period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T13,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a second type of display,
The second type is different from the first type.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T15)
Counting means capable of at least performing counting;
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of displays;
A game machine equipped with
The counting means counts a value related to a period for receiving an operation of the operating means (hereinafter referred to as “acceptance period”),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display at least indicating that the remaining period of the reception period (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period”) is the first period;
In the case of the first state, the first display is configured to be at least displayable,
The first display is configured to be at least displayable in the second state,
The first state is a state including at least that the remaining period is the first period,
The second state is a state including at least that the remaining period is a second period,
The second period is a period longer than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T16)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix T15,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in the first state without being displayed in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T17)
A gaming table according to appendix T15 or T16,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in the second state without being displayed in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T15 to T17,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display related to the reception period,
The second display is a display at least indicating that the remaining period is a third period,
In the case of the third state, the second display is configured to be at least displayable,
The third state is a state including at least that the remaining period is the third period,
The third period is shorter than the second period;
The third period is a period longer than the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T15 to T18,
The first display is displayed in the first display mode in the first state,
The first display is displayed in a second display mode in the second state,
The first display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T20)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix T18,
The first display is a meter display,
The second display is a meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T21)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T15 to T20,
The reception period is a valid period,
The effective period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T15 to T21,
As the reception period, there are a plurality of types of reception periods with different period lengths.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T23)
A gaming table according to appendix T18 or T20,
At least transition to the third state through the second state, and then at least transition to the first state;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T24)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes T15 to T23,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is configured so that at least display can be started when the operation means is operated within the reception period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T25)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix T24,
The third display is not displayed when the operation means is not operated within the reception period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix T26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices T1 to T25,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining a false count value.

  In each figure of FIG. 173, mainly hatched hatching corresponds to information source means, white one corresponds to processing means for performing some processing, and gray one corresponds to effect execution means. To do.

  FIG. 173 (a) shows an example in which counter information is included in the command itself.

  For example, the main control unit 300 is provided with a counter circuit (corresponding to an example of a counting unit) that counts a count value. The counter circuit corresponds to the counter timer 312 shown in FIG. 4 and the like, and the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 (hereinafter the same). When the main control unit 300 includes information on the count value (count value information) in the command and transmits it to the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500, as shown on the left side, The count value may be processed, and information representing a false count value may be included in the command and transmitted to the receiving side. Alternatively, as shown on the right side, information indicating the true count value may be included in the command on the transmission side and transmitted to the reception side, and the true count value may be processed on the reception side to obtain a false count value. . In addition, what gave diagonal hatching is equivalent to an example of a counting means.

  FIG. 173 (b) shows an example in which an effect is performed based on count value information and additional information included in the command.

  For example, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter circuit (corresponding to an example of a counting unit) that counts a count value. The counter circuit corresponds to the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 4 or the like and the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (hereinafter the same). The first control unit 400 includes the count value information in a 2-byte command and transmits it to the second sub-control unit 500. When the upper 1 byte of the count value information is “00”, the lower 1 byte is “1”. , The second sub-control unit 500 causes the effecting means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, speaker, lamp, etc.) to execute the effect “A”, and the lower 1 byte is “2”. If the count value information indicates “B”, the effect “B” is executed. If the lower 1 byte is count value information indicating “3”, the effect “C” is executed, and the lower 1 byte is “4”. If the count value information represents the effect of “D”. That is, in this case, an effect “A” is associated with the count value “1”, and an effect “B” is associated with the count value “2”. The effect “C” is associated with the count value “3”, and the effect “D” is associated with the count value “4”.

  When the upper 1 byte of the count value information is “0F”, based on the additional information, the second sub-control unit 500 determines that the lower 1 byte is count value information indicating “1”. If the lower 1 byte is count value information indicating “2”, the effect “B” is executed, and if the lower 1 byte is count value information indicating “3”, “B” is also displayed here. The effect is executed, and if the lower 1 byte is count value information indicating “4”, the effect of “D” is executed. That is, in this case, the count value information and the effect are associated with each other based on the additional information. In other words, the effect is determined based on the count value information and the additional information. The additional information includes, for example, a gaming state (control state), a production mode, a jackpot type, a lottery result, and the like. This additional information is included in the same command as the command including the count value information or transmitted in advance. Or sent after the fact. Further, the additional information is stored in a specific storage area described later.

  Note that the upper byte (eg, “00” or “0F”) of the count value information may be used as additional information.

  The white one corresponds to an example of the counting unit, but the white one may be a count value information storage unit that stores transmitted or acquired count value information. The same applies not only to 2-byte commands but also to 4-byte commands.

  FIG. 173 (c) is a diagram showing a processing example of FIG.

  If the additional information (for example, information represented by the upper 1 byte) in FIG. 173 (b) is information representing the production mode (pattern) 1, "1" to "4" are output as unprocessed, When the additional information is information representing the production mode (pattern) 2, only when the count value is “3”, the processing is performed and “2” is output.

  As described here, even with the same count value or count information, the production may differ depending on the gaming state (control state), production mode, jackpot type, lottery result, etc. In some cases, a “false” effect (for example, an effect in mode 2 (an effect when the count value is “3”)) is performed.

  FIG. 173 (d) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the count value information included in the command and the gaming state (control state).

  It is not limited to the case where the additional information, the count, and the information are included in one command and transmitted at the same time (for example, the example in FIG. 173 (b)). The example shown in FIG. 173 (d) is an example in which the additional information is transmitted at a timing before the count information. That is, the count value information is included in the 2-byte command from the white count means or the count value information storage means and transmitted to the gray effect execution means. The effect execution means receives additional information representing the gaming state (control state) and stores the additional information before receiving the count value information. When the game state (control state) is state 1, the effect execution means may execute the effect of “A” if the count value information indicates “1”, and count value information indicating “2”. If the count value information indicating “3”, the “C” effect is executed, and if the count value information indicating “4”, the “D” effect is executed. In this case, an effect “A” is associated with “1” of the count value information, and an effect “B” is associated with “2” of the count value information. An effect of “C” is associated with “3” of the count value information, and an effect of “D” is associated with “4” of the count value information.

  On the other hand, when the game state (control state) is state 2, the effect execution means causes the effect of “A” to be executed if the count value information indicates “1”, and count value information indicating “2”. If so, the effect “B” is executed. If the count value information indicates “3”, the effect “B” is also executed here. If the count value information indicates “4”, the effect “D” occurs. Is executed. That is, in this case, an effect “A” is associated with “1” of the count value information, and “B” is associated with “2” and “3” of the count value information. The effects are associated with each other, and the effect “D” is associated with “4” of the count value information.

  State 1 of the gaming state (control state) mentioned here includes a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, an electric support state, a demonstration state, an error notification state, etc. A state in which these states are combined (for example, a probabilistic and electric support state) may be used. State 2 includes a non-hit gaming state (normal state), a non-probable change state, a non-electric support state, a gaming state (non-demo state), and an error non-notification state. A state in which these states are combined (for example, a non-probable and non-electric support state) may be used. Furthermore, state 1 may be a probabilistic and non-electric support state, and state 2 may be a non-probable and electric support state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 173 (d), the count value information and the effect are associated with each other based on the game state (control state). In other words, the effect is based on the count value information and the game state (control state). It is determined.

  As the types and number of commands increase, as explained here, even commands that contain the same count value information, depending on the gaming state (control state), production mode, jackpot type, lottery result, etc. The production may be different, and the “false” production (for example, the production in state 2 (the production when the count value is “3”)) is performed for the “true” production (for example, the production in state 1). Occurs.

  FIG. 173 (e) is a diagram showing an example in which the count value information is not included in the command itself.

  A command is transmitted from the counting means or the count value information storage means subjected to oblique hatching to the white processing means. This command does not include count value information, and the processing means also has a counter function. When the command is received once, it updates its count value. In this example, “1” is added when the command is received once. In order to perform a fake effect, it is only necessary to always perform an operation (for example, addition) with a fixed value (for example, “1”). Moreover, what is necessary is just to calculate using a variable in order to make it the aspect in which a fake presentation may be performed. For example, a variable may be obtained by table management or lottery and may be calculated (“+1” (true), “+0” (false), or “+2” (false)).

  FIG. 173 (f) is a diagram illustrating an example in which a transmission command is generated and transmitted based on additional information without processing the count value.

  For example, in the transmission processing means with oblique hatching, if the production mode (pattern) 1 is transmitted, the commands “1” to “4” are transmitted unprocessed, and if the production mode (pattern) 2 is performed, Only when the count value is “3”, processing is performed and a command “2” is transmitted. Even in this case, a “false” effect (for example, an effect in mode 2 (an effect when the count value is “3”)) may be performed with respect to a “true” effect (for example, an effect in mode 1). .

  FIG. 173 (g) is a diagram illustrating an example in which an effect is performed based on count value information included in a command.

  If the count value information included in the transmitted command is information indicating “1”, the gray effect executing means executes the effect of “A”, and if the information indicating “2” is “ The effect “B” is executed. If the information represents “3”, the effect “C” is executed, and if the information represents “4”, the effect “D” is executed. In other words, in this case, an effect “A” is associated with “1” of the count value information, and an effect “B” is associated with “2” of the count value information. An effect of “C” is associated with “3” of the count value information, and an effect of “D” is associated with “4” of the count value information.

  FIG. 173 (h) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the count value is updated according to the input.

  In this example, there are provided a counting means (first counting means) that updates the count value every time there is an input, and a counting means (second counting means) that counts the count value itself (number of updates). ing. The input may be a sensor input or the like. For example, when there is a sensor input every time the effect button 136 is pressed, or when there is a sensor input every time a ball of a winning opening or a start opening enters. Etc. are examples. The first counting means updates the first count value every time the sensor input is performed once. The second counting means updates the second count value every time the first counting means updates the first count value. Further, in this example, when the second count value is in the first range (here, 0 to 4), it is processed into information representing “1” by the white processing means, and the second range (here In the case of 5 to 8), it is processed into information representing “2”, and in the case of the third range (here 9 to 16), it is processed into information representing “3”, and the fourth range (here) In the case of 17 to 24), the information is processed into information representing “4”.

  In both the example shown in FIG. 173 (g) and the example shown in FIG. 17 (h), “true” is obtained by changing the correspondence between the count value and the effect, or the count value and the value based on the effect. There is a case where a “false” performance is performed for the performance.

  As described above, when performing a fake presentation, the command itself may include counter value information. Moreover, when displaying a fake effect, you may process the data used as the origin of command generation. Alternatively, the side that receives the command may process the value corresponding to the command, and in the case of processing, the information may be combined with other information such as the gaming state and the effect mode and the counter value. Further, the value represented by the count value information included in the command may be a value based on a predetermined table. Further, when the command itself does not include counter value information, the receiving side may perform arithmetic processing such as incrementing at the time of reception. Further, when displaying a fake effect, the increment may be a variable instead of a constant such as +1. Moreover, the display side may only display based on the transmitted command. Further, it may be determined whether or not a fake presentation is performed according to the value of the first byte of the command to be transmitted. For example, it may be used as an index of a table of what to display. Further, whether to perform a fake presentation may be determined according to the content of a command different from the transmitted command. The counter value on the transmission side and the transmission command may be in a correspondence relationship. Further, there may be cases where there is no correspondence when processing a transmission command (for example, when masking). In addition, the counter update trigger is for every interrupt cycle (for example, 10 ms interrupt, 20 ms interrupt, about 33 ms, etc.) when there is a sensor input (for example, production button operation, winning a prize opening, etc.). For example, each sub-control main process performed at the same time). When a plurality of counters are used, the time may be when one of the counters reaches the first value.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control configuration.

  The first control unit shown in FIG. 174 may be the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, or these The control units 300, 400, and 500 may be combined, or a sub-side control unit that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500. The second control unit shown in FIG. 174 may be the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500. The sub-side control means may be combined. The effecting means may be a display means such as a main liquid crystal display device or a sub liquid crystal display device such as a decorative symbol display device 208, an audio output means such as a speaker 120, or a decorative lamp such as a frame lamp 122. The display unit and a control unit (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) for controlling the display unit may be combined.

  FIG. 174 (a) shows the first control means and the rendering means. The first control means includes a first counter. The first control means controls the effect means, and the effect means executes the effect based on the count value of the first counter.

  FIG. 174 (b) shows the first control means, the second control means, and the rendering means. Also in this example, the first control means includes a first counter. Information on the count value of the first counter (count value information) is sent to the second control means. Note that the count value information may be information indicating the count value of the first counter, or may be information corresponding to the count value of the first counter. The second control means controls the effect means, and the effect based on the count value information is executed by the effect means.

  FIG. 174 (c) shows the first control means and the rendering means as in FIG. The first control means shown in FIG. 174 (c) includes a specific storage area in addition to the first counter. In the specific storage area, for example, additional information such as a game state (control state), a production mode, a jackpot type, a lottery result, and the like are stored. The first control means determines the effect based on the count value of the first counter and the additional information. The effect means is controlled by the first control means and executes the effect determined by the first control means.

  FIG. 174 (d) shows the first control means, the second control means, and the rendering means as in FIG. Also in this example, the first control means is provided with the first counter, and the count value information is sent to the second control means. The second control means includes a specific storage area, and the second control means determines an effect based on the count value information and the additional information stored in the specific storage area. The effect means is controlled by the second control means and executes the effect determined by the second control means.

  FIG. 174 (e) also shows the first control means and the rendering means as in FIG. 174 (a), and the first control means is provided with a first counter. The effect means shown in FIG. 174 (e) is provided with a specific storage area, and the effect means itself determines the effect based on the count value information and the additional information, and executes the determined effect. The effect means here corresponds to, for example, a combination of the second sub-control unit 500 and the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 174 (f) shows the first control means and the rendering means as in FIG. The first control means shown in FIG. 174 (f) includes a second counter in addition to the first counter. The first counter and the second counter are independent from each other, and are different in count value update trigger, count value update width, and the like. The CPU of the first control means refers to a counter that varies depending on the period.

  FIG. 174 (g) is a time chart showing a counter referred to by the CPU of the first control means shown in FIG.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 174 (g), time T elapses toward the right. The CPU of the first control means refers to the first counter in the first period, and determines the effect based on the count value of the first counter. On the other hand, the CPU of the first control means refers to the second counter in the second period, and determines the effect based on the count value of the second counter.

  Note that the first control unit shown in FIG. 174 (f) may determine an effect based on both the count value of the first counter and the count value of the second counter. For example, the effect may be determined based on a value obtained by calculating (for example, adding) the count value of the first counter and the count value of the second counter.

  Further, the second counter shown in FIG. 174 (f) may count, for example, that the counter value of the first counter has been updated a first number (for example, four times). Good. That is, the count value is incremented by 1 each time the counter value of the first counter is updated once, five times, nine times, thirteen times,. Further, the second counter is not limited to the one described here, and may perform counting related to the counting of the first counter.

  The effect means shown in FIG. 174 (f) is controlled by the first control means and executes the effect determined by the first control means.

  FIG. 174 (h) shows the first control means, the second control means, and the rendering means as in FIG. The first control means shown in FIG. 174 (h) is provided with a first counter, and the second control means is provided with a second counter. The second counter shown in FIG. 174 (h), for example, updates the count value every time a command is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Further, the second control means determines the effect based on the count value of the second counter. The effect means is controlled by the second control means and executes the effect determined by the second control means.

  As described above, in a hardware combination, for example, when a plurality of counters are used, there are various modes as to which control means has which counter. In addition, since a plurality of counters are operating and display is performed based on different counters depending on the timing, when one counter is used as a reference, it may be a true effect or, on the contrary, a false effect. . In addition to this, there are cases where each of the plurality of control means has a counter, and the effect is a false effect when an effect that does not match at least one counter is performed. Further, the counter of the control means may count up (add) or count down (subtract). Further, the display of the effect means may be a display that counts up (adds), a display that counts down (subtracts), or a display that adds or subtracts.

  FIG. 175 (a) is a time chart showing the start timing and end timing of the big hit game.

  In this FIG. 175 (a), in order from the top, a special symbol changing signal, a condition device operation signal, an accessory continuous operation device operation signal, a special electric agent release signal, a special electric agent operation signal, an attacker, an attacker A solenoid signal is shown. These signals correspond to an example of a signal output from the pachinko machine 100 or an example of a signal necessary for a test firing test. That is, it is not necessary that all these signals are used.

  Special symbol changing signal, condition device activation signal, accessory continuous activation device activation signal, special electric accessory release signal, special electric accessory activation signal are signals as seen from the game rules. If it is on, the special symbol display device is in operation, and if it is off, it is inactive (stopped). If the condition device activation signal is on, the attacker is operating (opening operation, maintaining the open state, closing operation, maintaining the closed state), and if off, it is not operating (closing). In addition, if the accessory continuous operation device activation signal is ON, the special electric accessory has been activated a plurality of times. The special electric accessory release signal is a signal that maintains the open state of the special electric accessory. If the special electric accessory operating signal is on, the attacker is in the opening operation, maintaining the open state, or in the closing operation, and if off, the attacker is in the closing state.

  The “opening” of the attacker shown in FIG. 175 (a) corresponds to the opening operation or maintaining the open state, and the “closing” of the attacker corresponds to the closing operation or maintaining the closed state. Also, the attacker solenoid signal shown in FIG. 175 (a) is a signal for maintaining the open state, which is transmitted to the solenoid that opens and closes the attacker.

  An arrow A in FIG. 175 (a) corresponds to the fixed display time of the special symbol stop symbol. The arrow B corresponds to a jackpot game start effect time (a jackpot start display time). Arrow C corresponds to the closing operation time of the attacker. The arrow D corresponds to a jackpot game end effect time (a jackpot end display time). The arrow E corresponds to the special display fluctuation display waiting time, and when there is a special figure 1 or special figure 2 suspension, the special symbol fluctuation starts after the fluctuation display start waiting time elapses. See the dotted line part of the signal).

  The start timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the special figure changing signal is turned off, the timing when the condition device activation signal is turned on, or the accessory continuous actuation device activation signal is It may be the timing when the special electric accessory release signal is first turned on, or the timing when the special electric accessory operating signal is first turned on. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the attacker starts the first opening, or the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is first turned on.

  On the other hand, the end timing of the jackpot game may be the timing when the condition device operation signal is turned off, the timing when the accessory continuous operation device operation signal is turned off, or the condition device operation signal. And / or when the accessory continuous actuating device activation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the special electric accessory release signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device activation signal and / or the instrument continuous signal When the actuator activation signal is on, it may be the timing when the special electric instrument operating signal is finally turned off from the on state, or the condition apparatus activation signal and / or the accessory continuous actuator activation signal may be In the case of being on, it may be the timing when the attacker finally goes from “open” to “closed”, condition device activation signal and / or accessory continuous When the motion device activation signal is on, it may be the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is finally turned off from on, or the condition device activation signal and / or the accessory continuous operation device activation signal is turned off. Therefore, it may be the timing when the variable waiting time has elapsed.

  From the above, “in jackpot game” means between the start timing of jackpot game and the end timing of jackpot game. Also, during jackpot gaming, in terms of signals, for example, when a test fire tester and a pachinko gaming machine are connected, it is a period during which a condition device activation signal is output, or an accessory continuous activation device activation signal Is a period in which the special electric accessory release signal is repeatedly on and off, or a period in which the special electric accessory operating signal is on and off repeatedly It may be. Further, it may be a period in which the attacker repeats opening and closing, or a period in which the attacker solenoid signal is repeatedly turned on and off.

  FIG. 175 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by an ellipse indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG.

  Even when the special electric accessory release signal is turned off, the special electric accessory operating signal is on for a while (here, the period of the arrow a). During the period indicated by the arrow a, the attacker performs a closing operation, and an opening end effect (for example, a display effect) of the attacker is executed. Note that the period indicated by the arrow a may be only the period during which the attacker performs the closing operation. The period of the arrow b elapses from when the special electric accessory operating signal is turned off to when it is turned on. The interval between rounds corresponding to the interval between rounds may be a period indicated by an arrow b shown in FIG. 175 (b), or a period obtained by combining the arrows a and b shown in FIG. May be.

  It should be noted that the attacker release period (open state maintaining period) shown in FIG. 175 corresponds to a period (long period) in which the game ball can easily enter, and hereinafter, the attacker release may be referred to as a packer. On the other hand, there are cases in which the attacker's release period is a period (short period) in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Hereinafter, the attacker's release period may be referred to as a packer.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner how a true effect is performed during an 8-round jackpot game. In FIG. 176, time elapses in alphabetical order.

  FIG. 176 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220.

  In FIG. 176 (a), the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variable symbol variation display. A fourth symbol 281 is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The fourth symbol 281 is a display for notifying whether or not the symbol of the special symbol is changing (or when the symbol is stopped), and is displayed in black when the symbol of the special symbol is stopped. It is displayed in gray during fluctuation. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode of the fourth symbol.

  In FIG. 176 (b), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. It is displayed. In this example, 8 round jackpots and 4 round jackpots are also prepared, and the combination of the “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” jackpot pattern is the combination of the 8 round round jackpot symbols. It is also a combination, and it is also a combination of decorative designs for 4 rounds of big hits. Further, the fourth symbol 281 is displayed in black. The fourth symbol 281 is displayed in black continuously even during the big hit game.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (c), the start effect of the big hit game is displayed. In this jackpot game start effect, the combination of the “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” jackpot decoration symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and below that, the eight-round jackpot A character “SUPER” for notifying that there is a character is displayed. The player is not sure whether it is a big hit of 8 rounds or a big hit of 4 rounds only by looking at the combination of the decorative designs of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”. It can be seen from the character display of “SUPER” that it is a big hit of 8 rounds.

  Following the start effect of the jackpot game, the first round, which is the first round of the jackpot game, is started. In FIG. 176 (d), the start effect of the first round is performed, the character display “1R start” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, There is an effect display showing the number of rounds of the big hit game. The main control unit 300 is provided with a counter circuit (corresponding to an example of a counting means) that counts a count value. When a big hit game is started, “1” is set in the counter circuit and a big hit game is started. The count value at the time is “1”. Note that “1” may be set in the counter circuit at the timing when the start effect of the big hit game ends. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a command (for example, a big hit game start command (more specifically, a winning effect start command)) or a first round start command (more specifically, an attacker) from the main control unit 300. Opening start command)) is transmitted. This command includes count value information (here, “1” information) regarding the count value of the counter circuit of the main control unit 300. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is also transmitted with information indicating that it is a big hit of 8 rounds as information on the big hit type from the main control unit 300, and the information on the big hit type is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Is stored in a specific storage area provided in the RAM 408. The jackpot type information is included in a command including count value information or a command other than the command (for example, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, or a winning round designation command). Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, during the big hit game, an effect (round number effect display) representing the number of rounds is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by using the display number of images of a thousand boxes. Further, in this example, based on the information on the big hit of 8 rounds, the effect (display contents) for displaying the images of the eight thousand carton boxes is associated with the count value information “1”, and the command is received. In the 1st sub-control part 400, it determines to the effect which displays the image of eight thousands of boxes as a display effect. The round number effect display in this example corresponds to a true round number effect display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (d), a total of eight images of a thousand boxes are displayed in two columns on the left and right. The display of images of eight thousand boxes shown in FIG. 176 (d) corresponds to an example of a third display. Only the third display may be displayed. Further, the display start time of the third display may be the same as the display start time of the first display, may be before, or may be after. In FIG. 176 (d), “1” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300. The round number effect display may be a character display (for example, “8 rounds”) or the like instead of the number of displayed images.

  In the first round, the attacker opens the packer, and at the timing when the attacker closes, 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main controller 300, and the count value becomes “2”. Note that the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 may be incremented to “2” at the timing when the attacker in the second round is released. In addition, the main control unit 300 side counts up (adds) during the period from when the first round attacker close command is transmitted to the sub control unit sides 400 and 500 until the second round attacker open command is transmitted. May be.

  When the opening of the attacker in the first round is completed, an end effect of the first round (not shown) is performed here.

  In FIG. 176 (e), the start effect of the second round is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays characters “2R start”. Further, “2” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a command including information “2” as count value information (for example, a first round end command (more specifically, an attacker closing command) or a second round start command (more specifically, ) Is sent. In this example, based on the information of 8 rounds of jackpot, for the count value information “2”, the effect of displaying the images of eight thousand-thousand boxes with a cross mark only on one thousand-thousand-box images is supported. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command determines the effect to display the images of the eight thousand boxes that are indicated by the cross mark only on the image of the one thousand boxes as the round number effect display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (e), among the eight thousand box images, a cross mark is displayed on the image of the top thousand boxes in the right column. It should be noted that there are various timings at which the first sub-control unit 400 updates the round number effect display (here, a cross mark is added) after receiving a command including count value information. It is. For example, if the count value information is included in the first-round attacker closing command, a cross mark may be added at the stage of the end effect of the first round. Also, instead of adding a cross mark, the image of the top thousand boxes in the right column may be erased.

  Even in the second round, the attacker opens the packer, and at the timing when the attacker closes, 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300, and the count value becomes “3”. Note that the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 may be incremented to “3” at the timing when the third round attacker opens.

  When the opening of the attacker in the second round is completed, an end effect of the second round (not shown) is performed here.

  In FIG. 176 (f), the start effect of the third round is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays characters “3R start”. Further, “3” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a command including information “3” as count value information (for example, a second round end command (more specifically, an attacker closing command) or a third round start command (more specifically, ) Is sent. In this example, based on the information of 8 rounds of jackpot, “3” of the count value information is associated with the effect of displaying the images of the eight thousand boxes that are indicated by the cross marks on the images of the two thousand boxes. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command determines the effect to display the images of the eight thousand boxes that are indicated by the cross marks on the images of the two thousand boxes as the round number effect display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (f), among the images of the eight thousand boxes, in addition to the image of the top thousand boxes in the right column, the cross mark is also displayed on the image of the thousand boxes below it. Yes.

  Thereafter, 3 to 7 rounds are digested in the same manner. In this example, “4” of the count value information is associated with an effect of displaying eight thousand box images with cross marks displayed on the three thousand box images, and “5” of the count value information is “5”. ”Is associated with the effect of displaying eight thousand-thousand box images with cross marks displayed on four thousand-thousand box images, and“ 6 ”of the count value information is associated with five thousand-thousand box images. The effect of displaying images of eight thousand-thousand boxes with cross marks shown in the image is associated, and for the count value information “7”, eight images with cross marks displayed on the six-thousand box images. The effect of displaying the image of the thousand boxes is associated with “8” of the count value information, and the effect of displaying the images of the eight thousand boxes with the cross mark shown on the images of the seven thousand boxes. It has been. Upon receiving the command including each count value information, the first sub control unit 400 determines the content of the round number effect display corresponding to the count value information based on the count value information included in the received command, In the symbol display device 208, the round number effect display of the content determined by the first sub-control unit 400 is executed.

  Also in the eighth round of the final round, the attacker opens the packer, and at the timing when the attacker closes, 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300, and the count value becomes “9”.

  In FIG. 176 (i), the end effect of the eighth round is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “8R end”. Further, “9” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 receives an eighth-round attacker closing command including information “9” as count value information. In this example, based on the information of 8 rounds of big hits, “9” of the count value information is associated with the effect of displaying all the images of the eight thousand-thousand boxes with cross marks, The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command determines that the round number effect display is an effect to be displayed by displaying a cross mark on all the images of the eight thousand boxes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (i), cross marks are displayed on all of the images of the eight thousand boxes.

  In FIG. 176 (j), the big hit end effect is performed, and the round number effect display that has been displayed so far is ended. The count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 is reset to 0 at the timing when the big hit end effect is started.

  Note that, at the timing when the attacker in the eighth round is closed, the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 may be reset to 0 and the count value may be set to “0” to display the same round number effect display. In this case, “0” of the count value information is associated with the effect of displaying the cross marks on the images of the eight thousand boxes. Further, the round number effect display may be ended when the seventh round ends (when the eighth round starts) or when the attacker of the eighth round is released. Alternatively, the round number effect display may end at the timing when the eighth round attacker closes. When the round number effect display is finished, the images of the eight thousand-thousand boxes are not displayed, and therefore, the images in which the cross mark is displayed on all of the eight thousand-thousand boxes images are not displayed.

  Each of the rounds in the 8-round jackpot game described above is a round in which the attacker releases the packer, and can be expected to play in each round, which is substantially equivalent to an 8-round jackpot game. In the 16-round jackpot game, the first 8 rounds are all rounds where the attacker opens the packer, and the last 8 rounds are all rounds where the attacker opens the packer. In this case, the game is equivalent to a big hit game of 8 rounds. Also, in the 16-round jackpot game, the latter 8 rounds are rounds where the attacker opens the packer, and the first 8 rounds are all rounds where the attacker opens the packer. In this case, the game is equivalent to a big hit game of 8 rounds.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner how a true effect is performed during a 4-round jackpot game. Also in FIG. 177, time elapses in alphabetical order. Note that detailed description of the same points as in FIG. 176 may be omitted.

  As in FIG. 176, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special symbol hold lamp 220 are also provided in FIG. It is shown.

  In FIG. 177 (a), the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol 281 is also displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 177 (b), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Although it is displayed, it is unknown whether the player is a big hit of eight rounds or a big hit of four rounds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (c), the start effect of the big hit game is displayed, and the combination of the big hit decorative symbols "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is reduced in the upper left. It is displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 176 (c), the character display of “SUPER” for notifying that 8 rounds is a big hit, and the person who knows the meaning of the character display of “SUPER” has a big hit of 4 this time. It turns out that it is a big jackpot.

  Subsequently, the first round, the first round, is started. In FIG. 177 (d), the start effect of the first round is performed, the character display “1R start” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, this time A display showing the number of rounds of the big hit game is made. Here, when the big hit game is started, “1” is set in the counter circuit of the main control unit 300, and the count value at the time of starting the big hit game becomes “1”. In this example, on the basis of the 4-round jackpot information transmitted as the jackpot type information from the main control unit 300, the effect of displaying the images of the four thousand box boxes is associated with the count value information “1”. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command determines the effect to display the images of the four thousand boxes as the round number effect display. The round number effect display in this example also corresponds to a true round number effect display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (d), four thousand-dollar box images are displayed in a vertical line. In FIG. 176 (d), “1” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300.

  In the first round, the attacker opens the packer, and from the timing when the attacker closes until the timing when the attacker opens in the second round (for example, when the attacker opens), the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 1 is added to the count value, and the count value becomes “2”.

  In this example, “2” of the count value information is associated with the effect of displaying the images of the four thousand-thousand boxes indicated by the cross mark on the image of one thousand-thousand boxes. "Is associated with the effect of displaying the images of the four thousand-thousand boxes indicated by the cross marks on the images of the two thousand-thousand boxes, and the count value information" 4 " An effect of displaying images of four thousand-thousand boxes with cross marks on the images is associated. The display of images of eight thousand boxes with cross marks shown in FIGS. 176 (e) to (g) respectively corresponds to an example of the fourth display and an example of the sixth display. Further, the display start time of the fourth display or the sixth display may be the same as the display start time of the first display, or may be before or after.

  Even in the fourth round, the attacker opens the packer, and at the timing when the attacker closes, 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300, and the count value becomes “5”.

  In FIG. 177 (h), the end effect of the fourth round is performed, the character display “4R end” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and images of four thousand boxes are displayed as a true round number effect display. All of these are displayed with a cross mark. Further, “5” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 177 (i), the big hit end effect is performed, and the round number effect display that has been displayed so far is ended. The count value (R) of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 is reset to 0 at the timing when the big hit end effect is started.

  Note that at the timing when the attacker in the fourth round closes, the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 may be reset to 0, and the count value may be set to “0” to display the same round number effect display. In this case, “0” of the count value information is associated with the effect of displaying the cross marks on the images of the four thousand boxes. Further, the round number effect display may be ended when the third round is completed (when the fourth round is started) or when the attacker of the fourth round is released. Alternatively, the round number effect display may end at the timing when the fourth round attacker closes. When the round number effect display is finished, the images of the four thousand-thousand boxes are not displayed, and therefore, the images in which the cross marks are displayed on all the four-thousand-box images are not displayed.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner how a fake effect is performed during an 8-round jackpot game. Also in FIG. 178, time elapses in alphabetical order. Note that detailed description of the same points as in FIG. 176 may be omitted.

  178 also includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220, as in FIG. 176. It is shown.

  In FIG. 178 (a), the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol 281 is also displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 178 (b), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Although it is displayed, it is unknown whether the player is a big hit of eight rounds or a big hit of four rounds.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (c), the start effect of the big hit game is displayed, and then the first round which is the first round is started. The display of the big hit start effect shown in FIG. 178 (c) corresponds to an example of a fourth display. Only the fourth display may be displayed. The fourth display includes various displays such as a display of other effects, an error display, a suggestion display, a notification display, and a demonstration display.

  In FIG. 178 (d), the start effect of the first round is performed, the character display “1R start” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, A display showing the number of rounds of the big hit game is made. In this example, for example, the first hit of 8 rounds is a big hit, and the first sub-control unit 400 also transmits information representing the first big hit of 8 rounds as information of the big hit type from the main control unit 300 here. The jackpot type information is stored in a specific storage area provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, on the basis of the information on the first big hit of 8 rounds, although it is 8 rounds, an effect that displays only images of four thousand carton boxes is associated with the count value information “1”. The received first sub-control unit 400 determines the effect to display only images of four thousand boxes as the round number effect display. Since the round number effect display in this example is an effect as if it were 4 rounds despite being 8 rounds, it corresponds to a false round number effect display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (d), images of a thousand boxes are displayed in only one column, and only a total of four images are displayed. FIG. 178 (d) shows “1” as the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300. “Images of four thousand boxes” corresponds to an example of the second display, and “1” of the count value of the counter in the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the second count value. Only the second display may be displayed. The display of the images of the four thousand boxes can also be seen as an example of the fifth display. Further, the display start time of the second display or the fifth display is before the display start time of the first display described later.

  In the first round, the attacker opens the packer, and 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 between the timing when the attacker closes and the timing when the attacker opens in the second round. The value is “2”.

  In this example, “2” of the count value information is associated with the effect of displaying the images of the four thousand-thousand boxes indicated by the cross mark on the image of one thousand-thousand boxes. "Is associated with the effect of displaying the images of the four thousand-thousand boxes indicated by the cross marks on the images of the two thousand-thousand boxes, and the count value information" 4 " An effect of displaying images of four thousand-thousand boxes with cross marks on the images is associated. The display of images of the four thousand-thousand boxes with cross marks shown in FIGS. 178 (e) to (g) also corresponds to an example of the fourth display and an example of the fifth display.

  Even in the fourth round, the attacker opens the packer, and at the timing when the attacker closes, 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300, and the count value becomes “5”.

  In FIG. 178 (h), the promotion effect is performed before the start of the fifth round. The promotion effect is an effect that expects to be promoted from 4 rounds to 8 rounds. However, as will be described later, there are cases where it is not possible to expect a ball even if the promotion is promoted to 8 rounds. There may also be a fake promotion effect that is not promoted to 8 rounds. The number of rounds of the jackpot game has already been determined at the special drawing lottery stage, and here, since it has won the jackpot of eight rounds, it is a true promotion effect. The fake promotion effect may be abolished. In FIG. 178 (h), “5” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main controller 300. In this example, based on the information of the first round of 8 rounds, for the count value information “5”, all the images of four thousand boxes are displayed with a cross mark, and then a cross mark is added. There is associated an effect of newly displaying images of four thousand-thousand boxes that are not displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (h), cross marks are displayed on all the images of the four thousand boxes.

  In FIG. 178 (i), the promotion has been successful and the start effect of the fifth round has been performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the letters “5R start” and has four cross boxes without a cross mark. The effect of adding and displaying a new image (corresponding to an example of the first display) is performed. That is, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (i), a total of eight images of a thousand boxes are displayed in two columns on the left and right, and a cross mark is added to each of the four thousand boxes in the right column. However, no cross mark is added to the images of the four thousand boxes in the left column, which corresponds to a true round number effect display. Only the first display may be displayed. Further, the display of the images of the four thousand boxes in the left column can be regarded as an example of the sixth display. Furthermore, the images of the four thousand-thousand boxes each having a cross mark added to the right column correspond to an example of a fourth display. The count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300 is “5”. As described above, the “four images of the thousand boxes” corresponding to an example of the first display is also displayed here, but the count value of the counter in the main control unit 300 is “5”, which is “5”. Corresponds to an example of the first count value. Note that the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and below that, it is notified that the eight-round big hit is “ The text “SUPER” is also displayed.

  Thereafter, the true round number effect display is continued, and even in the eighth round of the final round, the attacker opens the packer, and 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 at the timing when the attacker closes. The count value is “9”.

  In FIG. 178 (j), the end effect of the eighth round is performed, the character display “8R end” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and images of eight thousand boxes are displayed as the true round number effect display. All of these are displayed with a cross mark. Further, “9” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 178 (k), the big hit end effect is performed, and the round number effect display that has been displayed so far is ended. The count value (R) of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 is reset to 0 at the timing when the big hit end effect is started.

  Subsequently, even in the big round of 8 rounds, it is possible to expect a round in each round. Both the big round where 8 rounds of big hit games are played and the first 4 rounds are rounds where the attacker opens the packer. In the latter half of the four rounds, there are cases where an attacker opens a paka and a jackpot where only four rounds of jackpot game are played is prepared.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of a case where only four rounds of big hit game are played even though there are eight rounds of big hit. Also in FIG. 179, time elapses in alphabetical order. Note that detailed description of the same points as those in FIGS. 176 and 178 may be omitted.

  In FIG. 179 as well as FIG. 176 and FIG. 178, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special symbol hold. A lamp 220 is shown.

  In FIG. 179 (a), the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Similarly to FIG. 176, a fourth symbol 281 is also displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 179 (b), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. It is displayed. In this example, it corresponds to a combination of decorative symbols for 8 rounds of big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (c), the start effect of the big hit game is displayed, and then the first round, which is the first round, is started. In FIG. 179 (d), the start effect of the first round is performed, the character display “1R start” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, this time A display showing the number of rounds of the big hit game is made. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 also receives from the main control unit 300 information indicating that it is a big hit where only four rounds of big hit games are played, although it is a big hit of eight rounds. Sent. In this example, on the basis of the information of the jackpot type, an effect of displaying images of four thousand boxes is associated with the count value information “1”, and the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the command The round number effect display is determined to be an effect of displaying images of four thousands of boxes. The round number effect display in this example corresponds to a false round number effect display, but substantially corresponds to a true round number effect display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (d), images of four thousands of boxes are displayed in a line. In FIG. 179 (d), “1” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main controller 300.

  In the first round, the attacker opens the packer, and 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 between the timing when the attacker closes and the timing when the attacker opens in the second round. The value is “2”.

  In this example, “2” of the count value information is associated with the effect of displaying the images of the four thousand-thousand boxes indicated by the cross mark on the image of one thousand-thousand boxes. "Is associated with the effect of displaying the images of the four thousand-thousand boxes indicated by the cross marks on the images of the two thousand-thousand boxes, and the count value information" 4 " An effect of displaying images of four thousand-thousand boxes with cross marks on the images is associated.

  Even in the fourth round, the attacker opens the packer, and at the timing when the attacker closes, 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300, and the count value becomes “5”.

  In FIG. 179 (h), the promotion effect is performed before the start of the fifth round. In FIG. 179 (h), “5” is shown as the count value (R) of the counter of the main controller 300. In this example, based on the information of the big hit type, “5” of the count value information is associated with the effect of displaying all the images of the four thousand boxes boxes with a cross mark. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (h), cross marks are displayed on all the images of the four thousand boxes.

  In FIG. 179 (i), promotion is failed, and instead of the start effect of the fifth round being performed, the failure effect is started. When the failure effect starts, the round number effect display ends, and the images of the four thousand boxes disappear. In addition, the round number effect display is continued, and it can be seen that the image of the four thousand boxes has disappeared without adding the image of the thousand boxes, which corresponds to a false round number effect display. Failure production is performed from the 5th round to the 8th round, and during this time, the attacker opens the paka 4 times. If the attacker opens the paka, it is difficult to get a winning ball and it is difficult to get a ball. At the timing when the attacker closes, 1 is added to the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300, and the count value increases by one.

  FIG. 179 (j) is a diagram showing the timing at which the opening of the fourth packer of the attacker is completed, and the last frame of the failure effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, 1 is added to the count value (R) of the counter of the main control unit 300, and the count value is “9”.

  In FIG. 179 (k), the big hit end effect is performed, and the count value of the counter circuit in the main control unit 300 is reset to zero.

  Next, the prize ball number display effect will be described.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing step by step how the prize ball number display effect is performed. Also in FIG. 180, time elapses in alphabetical order.

  FIG. 180 also shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220.

  In FIG. 180 (a), the special symbol display on the first special diagram display device 212 is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol on the display. A fourth symbol 281 is also displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 180 (b), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays 16 rounds of the big-decoration decoration symbol of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. The combination is stopped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c), the big hit game start effect is displayed, and then the first round, which is the first round, is started. The main control unit 300 is provided with a winning counter circuit (corresponding to an example of a first counting means) that counts the cumulative number of winnings to an attacker during a single big hit game. When the count value of the winning counter circuit reaches a value obtained by multiplying the current round number by “10” based on the current number of rounds, the main control unit 300 closes the attacker even before the attacker release period has elapsed. . The winning counter circuit is cleared every time one round is completed, and the number of winning prizes to the attacker during one round is counted. The main control unit 300 sets the count value of the winning counter circuit to “10”. ”, The attacker may be closed even before the attacker release period has elapsed.

  Further, in this example, when one ball is won in the attacker, 15 prize balls are paid out. The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a prize ball counter circuit (corresponding to an example of a second counting means) that adds “15” to the count value every time a winning command is received from the main control unit 300. Yes. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit is displayed as “GET”, and the prize ball number display effect corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter circuit is executed during the end effect period of the final round. Is done.

  FIG. 180 (d) shows a state immediately after the first round is started (immediately after the attacker is released). At this stage, no single ball has been won in the attacker, and the main control unit 300 is shown. The count value (number of winnings) of the winning counter circuit is 0. As a result, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 is also zero. Simultaneously with the start of the first round, the display of the number of winning prizes (GET display) is started on the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. “GET 00000” is displayed.

  In FIG. 180 (e), the first round continues. At this stage, there is a three-ball winning to the attacker, and the count value (winning number) of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 is three. . As a result, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 is “45”, and “GET 0545” is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 180 (f), 10 balls are won to the attacker during one round, the attacker closes before the attacker release period elapses, and the end effect of the first round is performed. The count value (winning number) of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 is 10. As a result, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 is “150”, and “GET 00150” is displayed on the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. .

  Instead of displaying the number of prize balls such as “GET 00150” at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of winning prizes (for example, “GET 010”) may be displayed.

  Thereafter, rounds 2 to 15 are digested, and FIG. 180 (g) shows the state of 16 rounds. At this stage, since the 16th round is started, the player has won 9 balls, and the count value (the number of winnings) of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 is 159. As a result, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 is “2385”, and “GET 02385” is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 180 (h), there are 10 balls in the attacker during the 16th round, the attacker starts closing from the open state before the attacker release period elapses, and the end effect of the 16th round is started. The count value (winning number) of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 is 160. As a result, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes “2400”, and the first sub-control unit 400 selects the prize ball number display effect corresponding to the count value of the prize ball counter circuit. . Here, since the theoretical maximum number of winning balls has been acquired, the production of the celebration pattern is selected together with the cumulative display of the number of winning balls (here, “2400 GET” which is the theoretical maximum number of winning balls). As shown in 180 (h), it is executed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, “2400”, which is the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400, corresponds to an example of the first count value, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 180 (h). The prize ball number display effect of “2400 GET” corresponds to an example of the first display.

  In this example, accidentally, there are two consecutive winnings (irregular winnings) for a short period of time from the open state to the closed state. In FIG. 180 (i), there is an eleventh prize during the closing operation of the attacker, and the count value (number of prizes) of the prize counter circuit of the main controller 300 is 161. As a result, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes “2415”, but there is no change in the cumulative display of prize balls (“2400 GET”) in the prize ball number display effect. In FIG. 180 (j), the 12th ball is won during the closing operation of the attacker, and the count value (winning number) of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 is 162. As a result, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 is “2430”, but there is no change in the cumulative display of prize balls (“2400 GET”) in the prize ball number display effect. In the case of FIG. 180 (i) and FIG. 180 (j), “2415” and “2430”, which are the count values of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400, correspond to an example of the second count value. To do.

  As described above, when the display period of the effect based on the count value is longer than the update interval of the count value, the effect based on the count value is continuously executed without being changed. As a result, a false prize ball number display effect is executed as a result.

  In FIG. 180 (l), the attacker is in a closed state, the end effect of the 16th round, that is, the prize ball number display effect is ended, and the big hit game end effect is started. The count value (winning number) of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 is 162, and the count value of the winning ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 is “2430”. In the big hit game end effect, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit is displayed numerically. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (l), numerical values “GET: 2430” and “TOTAL: 2430” are displayed in two upper and lower rows under the character display “Congratulations”.

  After the big hit game end effect is started, the count value of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 and the count value of the winning ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 are cleared and return to “0”. Note that the count value of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 may be cleared first, and then the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 may be cleared or vice versa. Alternatively, both may be performed simultaneously.

  On the other hand, when the end effect of the final round is started, the count value of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 is cleared and returns to “0”, and as shown in FIG. At the time of starting, the count value (winning number) of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 may be zero. However, even in this case, the count value of the prize ball counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 is not cleared, and the count value of the prize ball counter circuit is displayed numerically in the big hit game end effect. When the end effect of the final round is started, the award of the first sub-control unit 400 is prepared together with the count value of the winning counter circuit of the main control unit 300 after preparing for the numerical display of the count value of the winning ball counter circuit. The count value of the ball counter circuit may also be cleared.

  The prize ball number display effect was an effect of accumulating the number of prize balls during a single big hit game, but the cumulative display of the number of prize balls during the cumulative big hit game since the game started is displayed. An effect to be performed may be used.

  Next, step effects will be described.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram for describing an example of step effects.

  FIG. 181 (X) is a diagram showing a correspondence table stored in the first sub control unit 400.

  In this step effect, the image of the effect button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 within the operation effective period, and the operation of the effect button 136 is prompted. Level display 208R is also performed. In the level display 208R, the level is increased and displayed based on the number of operations of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period, the effect step is increased by one step, and the step effect continues until the operation effective period elapses or the maximum step (here, 3 steps) is reached.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a step counter circuit (corresponding to an example of a counting unit). This step counter circuit counts the progress of step effects. In the correspondence table shown in the upper part of FIG. 181 (X), the count value of the step counter circuit is shown on the left side as the value of the effect step, and the value of the level display is shown on the right side. In this example, when the production button 136 is operated once, the level is increased by 2 and displayed up to 6 levels. The correspondence table shown at the top of FIG. 181 (X) defines the correspondence between the count value (effect step) of the step counter circuit and the level display value. However, the correspondence table is replaced with the count value of the step counter circuit. Thus, a count value of a counter circuit that counts the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be used. Further, one correspondence table may be selected from a plurality of correspondence tables based on a variation pattern of decorative symbols (for example, no reach, normal reach, super reach), a variation time of a special figure, or the like.

  In the correspondence table shown in the lower part of FIG. 181 (X), an effect (reach pattern in this case) started corresponding to the level is shown. That is, if the display result of the level display is 0 to 2 levels, super reach A is executed, if 3 to 5 levels, super reach B is executed, and if the maximum level is 6 levels, super reach C is executed. Executed.

  FIG. 181 (a) to FIG. 18 (g) are diagrams showing an example of step effects in stages, and time elapses in alphabetical order.

  In FIG. 181 (a), the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. This variation display is continued beyond FIG. 181 (g). A fourth symbol 281 is displayed in the upper right corner. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (a), a step effect is started. When the step effect is started, the count value of the step counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes “1” (first step). In addition, an image obtained by adding a push arrow image to the image of the effect button 136 is displayed in the center portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character display prompting the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed thereon. The Further, a level display 208R is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this stage, the level display 208R is 0 level. In FIG. It is shown.

  Eventually, the effect button 136 is pressed once. In the center portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “GET” are displayed instead of the image of the effect button 136. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image with the level display 208R set to two levels based on the correspondence table shown in the upper part of FIG. 181 (X) (see FIG. 181 (b)). . In FIG. 181 (b), “Result: 2” is shown. Note that the count value of the step counter circuit remains “1”.

  When an image with the level display 208R set to two levels is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the count value of the step counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes “2” (second step). In the central part of the decorative symbol display device 208, instead of displaying the characters “GET”, an image obtained by adding a push arrow image to the image of the effect button 136 is displayed again. A character display prompting the user to press is displayed (see FIG. 181 (c)).

  Again, the effect button 136 is pressed once. In the center portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “GET” are displayed instead of the image of the effect button 136. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image with the level display 208R set to four levels based on the correspondence table shown in the upper part of FIG. 181 (X) (see FIG. 181 (d)). . In FIG. 181 (d), “Result: 4” is shown. Note that the count value of the step counter circuit remains “2”.

  When an image with the level display 208R set to 4 levels is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the count value of the step counter circuit of the first sub-control unit 400 becomes “3” (third step which is the final step). In the central part of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which a PUSH arrow image is added to the image of the effect button 136 is displayed instead of the character display of “GET”, and the effect button 136 is displayed on the image. A character display prompting the user to press the button is displayed (see FIG. 181 (e)).

  Again, the effect button 136 is pressed once. In the central portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “MAX” are displayed instead of the image of the effect button 136. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image with the level display 208R set to the maximum level of 6 levels based on the correspondence table shown in the upper part of FIG. 181 (X) (FIG. 181). f)). In FIG. 181 (f), “Result: 6” is shown. Note that the count value of the step counter circuit remains “3”.

  When the maximum step is reached, that is, when the display result of the level display 208R reaches the maximum level of 6 levels, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the correspondence table shown below in FIG. Then, the super reach C is executed (see FIG. 181 (g)).

  The example of the step effect shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (g) described above corresponds to an example of a true step effect.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing an example of a false step effect in stages, and time elapses in alphabetical order. Note that detailed description of the same points as in FIG. 181 may be omitted.

  The state shown in FIG. 182 (a) is a state in which the step effect is started, similarly to the state shown in FIG. 181 (a).

  Hereinafter, the process up to FIG. 182 (e) is the same as FIG. 181 (e), but in this example, the effect button 136 is not operated in the third step, and the operation effective period elapses. If the operation of the three effect buttons 136 is not completed within the operation effective period, “Miss” is displayed instead of the image of the effect button 136 at the center portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the operation effective period has elapsed. "Is displayed. The level display 208R displayed on the left side of the character display of “Miss” remains at the 4th level, and “Result: 4” is shown in FIG. 182 (f).

  Next, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute super reach B based on the correspondence table shown in the lower part of FIG. 181 (X) (see FIG. 182 (g)). Here, the production of Super Reach B corresponds to a true step production as seen from the correspondence table shown in the lower part of FIG. 181 (X), but can be seen including the correspondence table shown in the upper part of FIG. 181 (X). For example, it can be seen that the production step 3 is associated with the super reach C, so that it can be interpreted as a false step production.

  In this example, after the production of Super Reach B is started, advance notice from Super Reach B is performed (see FIG. 182 (h)), and Super Reach C is executed (see FIG. 182 (i)). Performing the effect of Super Reach C corresponds to a false step effect as seen from the correspondence table shown at the bottom of FIG. 181 (X), but if you look at the correspondence table shown at the top of FIG. 181 (X), As described above, since it can be seen that the production step 3 is associated with the super reach C, it can be interpreted as a true step production.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 182, a false step effect is executed in any case.

  In addition to the step effect described here, the effect may be an effect in which the level display is lowered as the number of operations of the effect button 136 increases. In this case, a plurality of types of correspondence tables may be prepared in which the amount of level down with respect to the number of operations of the effect button 136 is changed. Moreover, you may make a production step respond | correspond with the number of the equipment items of an appearance character. Also in this case, a plurality of types of correspondence tables may be prepared in which the number of items that can be equipped with respect to the number of steps in the production step is changed. Further, as the number of performance steps increases, the performance may be such that the number of actions (for example, the number of attacks) of the appearing character decreases. Also in this case, a plurality of types of correspondence tables may be prepared in which the number of possible operations with respect to the number of production steps is changed. Moreover, you may combine suitably the production demonstrated above.

  In addition, even if it is a case where a true effect display is displayed, it may be a mode in which a fake effect display is displayed without displaying it, or a true effect display is displayed without displaying a fake effect display. It is also possible to use this mode.

  As described above, the false performance may be at least executable during the big hit game. For example, the number of remaining rounds that can be obtained may be shown as a fake effect display. Moreover, even if it is a production | presentation, about the display regarding a player's profit, you may perform a fake display. For example, a fake display may be performed for a period during which the first control state advantageous to the player continues or a display related to the number of symbol fluctuations of the special figure.

  In addition, even if the same 16 round big hit, there is a case where it is a real big hit big 8 hit or a big 4 round big hit. . For example, if the remaining 4 rounds are displayed, even though the actual 8 rounds are a big hit, it is 16 rounds big hits as seen from the main control unit 300 in the first place, and it corresponds to the effect of false (8 rounds) and further false (4 rounds) To do. In addition, in the meaning of the remaining 4 rounds in the real 4 round big hit, the display is always true, but in the case of the 16 round big hit, as viewed from the main control unit 300, the false display in the relationship with the 16 round big hit. become.

  Further, the indication regarding the false value may be a multiple or a common divisor of the true value, and conversely, it may not be a multiple or a common divisor.

  Further, as the jackpot-related display, there is a display of the number of winning balls as described with reference to FIG. In the display of the number of winning prize balls, there is one that performs the first display when the number of winning balls reaches the milestone, and if the count value is updated while this first display is being performed, the result As a false indication. In other words, when the display time corresponding to the counter is longer than the counter update period, a phenomenon of false display may occur.

  Besides the jackpot-related, there is a display based on button operation as described with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182. When the button is not operated, the value of the meter is low in appearance, but it is high internally (controllably), and processing may be performed based on internal information when the production is branched. Further, the false display may be performed for a limited period, such as during a single symbol variation. If the fake display is continued for an excessively long time, the player may be distrusted, so the fake display may be performed for a limited period. Furthermore, a false display may be performed even if a button is operated. For example, in an effect display that represents the degree of expectation for a big hit or the like, even if a button operation is performed, a false effect display may be performed. Other false display targets include the number of times of continuous notice, the number of times of pseudo continuous notice, the number of mission achievements, the number of items, the number of chances, and the like.

  Further, in the effect of putting a ball in a small hit game or the like, when displaying the number of winning prizes, a false display may be performed. The true display corresponding to the count value and the false display not corresponding to the count value may be a display using figures, colors, etc. other than numbers. For example, “1” may be blue, “2” may be yellow, “3” may be green, “4” may be red, and so on.

  For example, when a plurality of buttons are displayed, a counter may be prepared for each button or may be managed by a common counter.

  Furthermore, the display start time of the second display or the fifth display may be after the display start time of the first display. For example, a false display (second display) may be performed after a true display (first display) is performed. Furthermore, the display start time of the second display or the fifth display may be the same as the display start time of the first display.

  In addition, each display in the first display to the sixth display may start during the symbol variation and end during the symbol variation, or may start during the jackpot game and during the jackpot game, for example. You may end. Furthermore, it may start at each opportunity described so far (for example, start or end of the electric support state, start or end of the pre-reading mode, etc.) and end at each different opportunity. Combinations of different triggers are possible as appropriate (for example, starting at the start of the prefetching mode and ending at the end of the symbol variation).

  In addition, display of effects related to big hit games, display of effects related to symbol variation display, display of effects related to the number of holds, display of effects related to the player's profit, error display, suggestion display, notification display, demonstration display, etc. Any one type of display among the genres corresponds to an example of the second type of display, and the other type of display corresponds to an example of the third type of display. In addition, the second type display and the third type display have the same genre, and even if one type of display is a fake display and the other type is a true display, Good. Alternatively, the first type of display may be a true or false display of a type related to the count value of the counting means, and the second type of display may be a false or true display of that type. .

  What has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced if it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

In the above explanation,
“Counting means [eg, RAM 308, 408, 508]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display;
Control means [e.g., main control unit 300 or sub-control units 400 and 500],
A game machine equipped with
The control means is means having at least the counting means,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display [e.g., display of images of four thousand-thousand boxes added in FIG. 178 (i)],
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of images of four thousands of boxes shown in FIG. 178 (d)],
The display means is means for starting display of at least the first display when the first condition is satisfied,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the first count value [for example, “5”] [for example, in the case of FIG. 178 (i)]. Yes,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes a second count value [for example, “1”] [for example, the case of FIG. 178 (d)]. Yes,
The second count value is a count value different from the first count value,
The second display is the same display as the first display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Furthermore, in the above explanation,
“Counting means [eg, RAM 308, 408, 508]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display [e.g., display of images of four thousand-thousand boxes added in FIG. 178 (i)],
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of images of four thousands of boxes shown in FIG. 178 (d)],
The display means is means for starting display of at least the first display when the first condition is satisfied,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the first count value [for example, “5”] [for example, in the case of FIG. 178 (i)]. Yes,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes a second count value [for example, “1”] [for example, the case of FIG. 178 (d)]. Yes,
The second count value is a count value different from the first count value,
The second display is the same display as the first display,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied during the jackpot game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In these game machines, for example, the first display may be a true display and the second display may be a false display.

  The first condition may be a condition that is always satisfied when the count value of the counting means reaches the first count value, or only when the count value reaches the first count value. It may be a condition to do. Further, the second condition may be a condition that is always satisfied when the count value of the counting means reaches the second count value, or is satisfied only when the second count value is reached. It may be a condition to do.

Also,
“The first display is a first type of display,
The first type is a type related to the count value of the counting means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the count value of the counting means (for example, the first count value or the second count value) may be “0” when the count down reaches 0, and the first display or second count May be a display corresponding to the value of “0” displayed after the count value becomes “0”.

  In addition, for example, displaying 8 when the count value is 2 and displaying 7 when the count value is 3 are “types related” as long as there is a certain relationship with the count value. become.

Also,
“The display means is means for displaying the first display after displaying the second display [for example, in the case of FIG. 178 (i)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, display of images of eight thousand boxes shown in FIG. 176 (d)],
The display means is means for starting display of at least the third display when the third condition is satisfied,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the second count value [eg, “1”].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, as a 3rd display, the display of the image of the four thousand boxes shown in FIG. 177 (d) can be mentioned as an example, for example.

Also,
“The third display is the display of the first type,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“At least one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, display of jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 178 (c)],
The display means is means for starting display of at least the fourth display when the fourth condition is satisfied;
The fourth display is a second type of display,
The second type is a type different from the first type [for example, a type related to jackpot game]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the fourth display may be an effect display or a fake display, and the fourth display may be a display different from the second display, for example, as shown in FIG. As an example, the display of images of four thousand-thousand boxes to which only two cross marks are added can be given.

Also,
“At least one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, display of images of four thousand boxes with only one cross mark shown in FIG. 178 (e)],
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [e.g., display of images of eight thousand boxes with only one cross mark shown in FIG. 176 (e)],
The display means is means for starting display of at least the fifth display when a fifth condition is satisfied;
The display means is means for starting display of at least the sixth display when the sixth condition is satisfied;
The fifth condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes a fifth count value [for example, “2”] [for example, the case of FIG. 178 (e)]. Yes,
The sixth condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the sixth count value [for example, “2”] [for example, the case of FIG. 176 (e)]. Yes,
The sixth count value is the same count value as the fifth count value,
The sixth display is a display different from the fifth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, as the fifth display, for example, the display of images of four thousand boxes shown in FIG. 178 (d) can be given as an example. In this case, the fifth display is the same display as the second display. There will be. Further, as the sixth display, for example, display of images of four thousand boxes shown in FIG. 178 (i) can be given as an example. In this case, the sixth display is the same display as the first display. There will be.

Also,
“The second count value is a count value larger than the first count value.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second count value is a count value smaller than the first count value.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second control unit [for example, the second sub-control unit 500] is provided,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The display means may be means for starting display of at least the first display only when the first condition is satisfied. The display means may be means for starting display of at least the first display when the second condition is satisfied. The display unit may be a unit that starts displaying only the first display when the first condition is satisfied. The display means may be means for starting display of at least the second display when the first condition is satisfied. The display unit may be a unit that starts displaying only the first display only when the first condition is satisfied. The display means may be means for starting display of at least the second display only when the first condition is satisfied. The display unit may be a unit that starts displaying only the first display when the second condition is satisfied. The display means may be means for starting display of at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied.

  Further, the first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied only in the first case. The first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied in the second case. The first condition may be a condition that is satisfied in the first case. The first condition may be a condition that may not be satisfied in the first case. The first condition may be a condition that is satisfied only in the first case. The first condition may be a condition that may not be satisfied only in the first case. The first condition may be a condition that is satisfied in the second case. The first condition may be a condition that may not be satisfied in the second case. The same applies to the second condition and the like.

Also,
“Control means [for example, main control unit 300 or sub-control unit 400, 500]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
The control means is means having at least counting means [eg, RAM 308, 408, 508],
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display [for example, display of images of four thousands of boxes shown in FIG. 178 (d)],
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of images of four thousand-thousand boxes added in FIG. 178 (i)],
The first display is a first type of display,
The first type is a type related to the count value of the counting means,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the first display when the first condition is satisfied,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the first count value [for example, “1”] [for example, the case of FIG. 178 (d)]. Yes,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the second count value [for example, “5”] [for example, in the case of FIG. 178 (i)]. Yes,
The second count value is a count value different from the first count value,
The second display is the same display as the first display.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

further,
“Counting means [eg, RAM 308, 408, 508]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display [for example, display of images of four thousands of boxes shown in FIG. 178 (d)],
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of images of four thousand-thousand boxes added in FIG. 178 (i)],
The first display is a first type of display,
The first type is a type related to the count value of the counting means,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the first display when the first condition is satisfied,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the first count value [for example, “1”] [for example, the case of FIG. 178 (d)]. Yes,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the second count value [for example, “5”] [for example, in the case of FIG. 178 (i)]. Yes,
The second count value is a count value different from the first count value,
The second display is the same display as the first display,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied during the jackpot game.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

The display means is means capable of starting display of at least the first display when the first condition is satisfied,
The display means may be a means capable of starting display of at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied.

  That is, just because the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the first display and the second display are not necessarily displayed. For example, when an error occurs (for example, When the door opening error occurs), the first display and the second display may not be displayed. On the other hand, as long as the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail even if an error occurs.

  In addition to the first display and the second display, other displays may be displayed together, or only the first display or only the second display may be started.

  The “type relating to the count value of the counting means” may be a type in which the count value is displayed as it is (directly), or a value corresponding to the count value (a value different from the count value). As an example, it may be a type that displays a value multiplied by 10), or a type that displays a picture (for example, meter display, level display, icon display, etc.) corresponding to the count value. May be.

  The first condition may be a condition that may be satisfied during the big hit game. Further, the second count value may be a count value of the counting means during the big hit game, and the first count value may be a count value of the count means during the big hit game. Further, the display means may be means for starting display of at least the first display when the first condition is established during the big hit game, and the second condition is established during the big hit game. When there is, there may be means for starting display of at least the second display.

  The second display may be the first type of display.

Also,
“The display means is means for displaying the first display and then displaying the second display [for example, the case of FIG. 178 (i)].
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
“The second count value [eg,“ 5 ”] is a count value larger than the first count value [eg,“ 1 ”].
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
“At least one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, display of images of four thousand-thousand-boxes to which all the crosses in the right column in FIG. 178 (i) are added]
The fourth display is the first type of display,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the fourth display when the second condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  The display means may be means capable of starting display of at least the fourth display when the second condition is satisfied.

  That is, just because the second condition is satisfied, the fourth display is not always displayed. For example, when an error occurs (for example, when a door opening error occurs), The fourth display may not be displayed. On the other hand, as long as the second condition is satisfied, the fourth display may be displayed without fail even if an error occurs.

  In addition to the fourth display, other displays may be displayed together, or only the fourth display may be started.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Further, the display unit may be a unit that does not start displaying the first display but may start displaying the second display.

  The display unit may start the first display and may not start the second display.

Furthermore, at least one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The fourth display is the first type of display,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the fourth display when the fourth condition is satisfied;
The fourth condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes a fourth count value,
The fourth count value is a count value smaller than the second count value,
The fourth and third count values are greater than the first count value.
It may be a game stand characterized by this.

  The “execution” may be interpreted as “start”, and conversely, the “start” may be interpreted as “execution”.

  Further, the description of “... in some cases” can be appropriately replaced with “may not be in some cases” or “always ...”.

  In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each applicable form and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the structure of the pachinko machine 100 according to the applicable form A. For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine. For example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing the rotation of the reels, and a stop button provided for each reel to individually stop the rotation of the reels A lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is won by lottery, a reel stop control means for performing stop control for stopping rotation of the reel based on a lottery result of the lottery means, and a lottery result of the lottery means Determining means for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reels that are stopped based on the internal winning combination is a symbol combination determined in advance; If a constant of winning, are also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped with a dispensing control means for paying out game media payout processing game media corresponding to a predetermined winning mode.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. Further, in some cases, the contents described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described so far may be applied to other configurations to further expand the range of games.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display device 210 General symbol display device 212 Special symbol display device 216 Normal symbol holding lamp 222 High accuracy middle lamp 230 Special figure starting port 234 Variable winning port 251 Universal drawing start winning port 252 General symbol electric accessory 2521 Door member 253 General-purpose starting gate 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit

Claims (11)

Counting means;
Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display;
Control means;
A game machine equipped with
The control means is means having at least the counting means,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the first display when the first condition is satisfied,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the second display when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the first count value,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the second count value,
The second count value is a count value different from the first count value,
The second display is the same display as the first display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first display is a first type of display,
The first type is a type related to the count value of the counting means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The display unit is a unit that may display the first display after displaying the second display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the third display when the third condition is satisfied,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the second count value.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4,
The third display is the first type display.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 5,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the fourth display when the fourth condition is satisfied;
The fourth display is a second type of display,
The second type is a different type from the first type.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display,
The display means is means for starting display of at least the fifth display when a fifth condition is satisfied;
The display means is means for starting display of at least the sixth display when the sixth condition is satisfied;
The fifth condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the fifth count value,
The sixth condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the count value of the counting means becomes the sixth count value,
The sixth count value is the same count value as the fifth count value,
The sixth display is a display different from the fifth display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The second count value is a count value larger than the first count value.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The second count value is a count value smaller than the first count value.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
Provided with a second control means,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.